Google
 

Trailing-Edge - PDP-10 Archives - tops10v704_docc - 10,7/docupd/cmnd.mem
Click 10,7/docupd/cmnd.mem to see without markup as text/plain
There are 2 other files named cmnd.mem in the archive. Click here to see a list.















                                  TOPS-10
                      Operating System Commands Manual


|                        Electronically Distributed
|  
|  
|  
|            This manual contains descriptions of  the  TOPS-10
|            monitor  commands,  their formats and their usage.
|            This  manual  supercedes  the  TOPS-10   Operating
|            System Commands Manual published in October, 1988.
|            The order number for that manual, AA-0916F-TB,  is
|            obsolete.



             Operating System:             TOPS-10 Version 7.04

             Software:                       GALAXY Version 5.1










   digital equipment corporation                   maynard, massachusetts


|  TOPS-10 Software Update Tape No. 04, December 1990

   First Printing, July 1975
   Revised, August 1977
   Revised, March 1978
   Revised, August 1980
   Updated, July l982
   Updated, February 1984
   Revised, April 1986
   Revised, October 1988
|  Revised, June 1990
|  Revised, December 1990



   The information in this document is subject to change  without  notice
   and  should  not  be  construed  as  a commitment by Digital Equipment
   Corporation.  Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no  responsibility
   for any errors that may appear in this document.

   The software described in this document is furnished under  a  license
   and  may  be  used  or  copied  in  accordance  with the terms of such
   license.

   No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on
   equipment that is not supplied by Digital Equipment Corporation or its
   affiliated companies.



|  Copyright C 1975, 1984, 1988, 1990 Digital Equipment Corporation. 

   All Rights Reserved.



   CI             DECtape     LA50             SITGO-10
   DDCMP          DECUS       LN01             TOPS-10
   DEC            DECwriter   LN03             TOPS-20
   DECmail        DELNI       MASSBUS          TOPS-20AN
   DECnet         DELUA       PDP              UNIBUS
   DECnet-VAX     HSC         PDP-11/24        UETP
   DECserver      HSC-50      PrintServer      VAX
   DECserver 100  KA10        PrintServer 40   VAX/VMS
   DECserver 200  KI          Q-bus            VT50
   DECsystem-10   KL10        ReGIS
   DECSYSTEM-20   KS10        RSX              d i g i t a l


                                      CONTENTS



   PREFACE


   CHAPTER 1       INTRODUCTION

           1.1     JOBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
           1.2     CONNECTING TO THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
           1.3     OPERATING SYSTEM MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
           1.3.1     Interactive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
           1.3.2     Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
           1.4     INTERACTIVE LEVELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
           1.4.1     Monitor Level  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
           1.4.2     User Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
           1.5     CONTEXTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
           1.6     SPECIAL CHARACTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
           1.6.1     CTRL/C - Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
           1.6.2     DELETE Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
           1.6.3     CTRL/W - Delete Word   . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
           1.6.4     CTRL/U - Delete Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
           1.6.5     CTRL/R - Reprint Line  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
           1.6.6     CTRL/O - Cancel Output   . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
           1.6.7     CTRL/S - Hold Output   . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
           1.6.8     CTRL/Q - Resume Output   . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
           1.6.9     CTRL/T - Job Status  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-10
           1.7     TYPE-AHEAD CAPABILITY  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-11
           1.8     COMMAND FORMATS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-11
           1.8.1     Command Termination  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-12
           1.8.2     Line Continuation  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-12
           1.8.3     Command Arguments  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-12
           1.8.3.1     Relative Date-Time Arguments . . . . . . . .  1-13
           1.8.3.2     Absolute Date-Time Arguments . . . . . . . .  1-13
           1.8.4     Command Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-16
           1.8.4.1     Temporary Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-16
           1.8.4.2     Permanent Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-16
           1.8.5     Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-17
           1.9     FILE SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-18
           1.9.1     Device Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-20
           1.9.1.1     Generic Device Names . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-21
           1.9.1.2     Physical Device Names  . . . . . . . . . . .  1-22
           1.9.1.3     File Structures  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-22
           1.9.1.4     Logical Device Names . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-22
           1.9.1.5     Ersatz Device Names  . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-25
           1.9.2     File Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-26
           1.9.3     Directory Names  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-26
           1.9.4     Protection Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-28
           1.9.5     File Daemon  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-31
           1.10    SYSTEM DEFAULTS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-31
           1.11    WILDCARD CONSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-31


                                    iii


           1.12    SEARCH LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-34
           1.13    LIBRARIES  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-35
           1.14    DIRECTORY PATHS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-35
           1.15    USER-DEFINABLE COMMANDS  . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-37
           1.16    PROGRAMMING THE LN01 LASER PRINTER . . . . . . .  1-38
           1.16.1    LN01 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES  . . . . . .  1-38
           1.16.1.1    ESCape Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-39
           1.16.1.2    Control Sequences  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-39
           1.16.2    Font Management  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-40
           1.16.3    Loading Fonts  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-41


   CHAPTER 2       SYSTEM COMMANDS

           2.1     FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS  . . . . . . . . . . 2-1


   CHAPTER 2       SYSTEM COMMANDS

           2.0.1     Job-Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
           2.0.2     Information Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
           2.0.3     Terminal-Control Commands  . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
           2.0.4     Terminal-Communication Commands  . . . . . . . . 2-2
           2.0.5     File-Handling Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
           2.0.6     Device-Handling Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
           2.0.7     Program-Preparation Commands . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
           2.0.8     Program-Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
           2.0.9     Network Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
           2.0.10    MIC Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
           2.1     COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
                     ACCOUNT Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
                     ALLOCATE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
                     ASSIGN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-14
                     ATTACH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-16
                     BACKSPACE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-22
                     CANCEL Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-23
                     CCONTINUE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-26
                     CLOSE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-30
                     COMPILE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-32
                     CONTEXT Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-40
                     CONTINUE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-43
                     COPY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-45
                     CORE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-47
                     CPUNCH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-49
                     CREF Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-60
                     CSTART Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-63
                     DAYTIME Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-66
                     DDT Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-67
                     DEALLOCATE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-71
                     DEASSIGN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-75
                     DEBUG Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-77
                     DECLARE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-86


                                     iv


                     DELETE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-89
                     DEPOSIT Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-91
                     DETACH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-93
                     DIRECTORY Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-94
                     DISMOUNT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
                     DSK Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
                     ENABLE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
                     EOF Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
                     EXAMINE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119
                     EXECUTE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
                     FILE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-128
                     FINISH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-134
                     FUDGE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-136
                     GET Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138
                     HALT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140
                     HELP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
                     INITIA Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-147
                     JCONTINUE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-156
                     KJOB Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-157
                     LABEL Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-161
                     LIST Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-163
                     LOAD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-165
                     LOCATE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-172
                     LOGIN Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-174
                     MAIL Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-190
                     MAKE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-191
                     MERGE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-193
                     MIC Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-196
                     MOUNT Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-199
                     NETWORK Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-208
                     NODE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-216
                     PASSWORD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-219
                     PJOB Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-220
                     PLOT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-224
                     POP Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-234
                     PRESERVE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-236
                     PRINT Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-238
                     PROTECT Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-250
                     PUNCH Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-252
                     PUSH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-253
                     R Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-281
                     REASSIGN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-283
                     REATTACH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-285
                     REENTER Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-287
                     RENAME Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-289
                     RESOURCES Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-291
                     REWIND Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-292
                     RUN Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-293
                     SAVE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-296
                     SCHED Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-298
                     SEND Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-300
                     SESSION Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-303


                                     v


                     SET BLOCKSIZE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-305
                     SET BREAK Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-306
                     SET CDR Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-310
                     SET CPU Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-311
                     SET DDT BREAKPOINT Command . . . . . . . . . . 2-313
                     SET DEFAULT BIGBUF Command . . . . . . . . . . 2-315
                     SET DEFAULT BUFFERS Command  . . . . . . . . . 2-316
                     SET DEFAULT PROTECTION Command . . . . . . . . 2-317
                     SET DEFER Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-320
                     SET DENSITY Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-323
                     SET DSKFUL Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-324
                     SET DSKPRI Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-325
                     SET FORMAT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-327
                     SET HOST Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-328
                     SET HPQ Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-331
                     SET PHYSICAL Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-333
                     SET RETRY Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-335
                     SET SPOOL Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-336
                     SET TERMINAL or TERMINAL Command . . . . . . . 2-338
                     SET TIME Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-339
                     SET TTY or TTY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-341
                     SET VIRTUAL LIMIT Command  . . . . . . . . . . 2-351
                     SET WATCH Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-353
                     SHOW ALLOCATION Command  . . . . . . . . . . . 2-357
                     SHOW QUEUES Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-361
                     SKIP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-363
                     START Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-364
                     SUBMIT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-366
                     SYSTAT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-379
                     TECO Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-383
                     TIME Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-384
                     TPUNCH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-386
                     TRANSLATE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-398
                     TYPE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-399
                     UNLOAD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-401
                     USESTAT Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-402
                     VERSION Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-404
                     WHERE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-408
                     ZERO Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-410


   APPENDIX A      FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS


   APPENDIX B      SWITCH.INI FILES


   APPENDIX C      COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS

           C.1     INDIRECT COMMANDS (@ CONSTRUCTION) . . . . . . . . C-2
           C.2     THE + CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
           C.3     THE = CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4


                                     vi


           C.4     THE < > CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
           C.5     DEFAULT COMPILER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
           C.6     COMPILER SWITCHES  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
           C.7     LINK SWITCHES  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  C-11


   APPENDIX D      STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES

           D.1     FILE NAME EXTENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
           D.2     RESERVED PROJECT-PROGRAMMER NUMBERS  . . . . . . . D-7
           D.3     ERSATZ DEVICE NAMES  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9


   APPENDIX E      CARD CODES


   APPENDIX F      TEMPORARY FILES


   APPENDIX G      SIXBIT/ASCII CHARACTER CODES


   INDEX


   TABLES

           1-1     Device Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-20
           1-2     Generic Device Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-21
           1-3     Protection Codes for Field 1 . . . . . . . . . .  1-29
           1-4     Protection Codes for Fields 2 and 3  . . . . . .  1-30
           2-1     Terminal Hardware Characteristics  . . . . . . . 2-341
           2-2     Fill Characters  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-345
           A-1     Functional Groups of Commands  . . . . . . . . . . A-1
           C-1     Processor Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
           D-1     File Name Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
           D-2     Project-Programmer Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
           D-3     Ersatz Device Names  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
           E-1     ASCII Card Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
           E-2     DEC-026 Card Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
           F-1     Temporary Files  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1














                                  PREFACE



   The TOPS-10 Operating System Commands Manual  describes  the  commands
   available  to  the  users  of  the  TOPS-10 Operating System.  See the
   TOPS-10 Operator's Guide for a description of all  operator-privileged
   commands.

   Commands to TOPS-10 are presented in alphabetical order in  Chapter  2
   for easy reference.

   Reference material for assembly language programming can be  found  in
   the  TOPS-10  Monitor  Calls  Manual Volumes 1 and 2, the DECsystem-10
   MACRO Assembler Reference Manual, and the DEC10/20 Processor Reference
   Manual.

   Getting Started with DECsystem-10 introduces first-time users  to  the
   TOPS-10  operating  system  command  language.   You  should read this
   manual at least once  before  reading  the  TOPS-10  Operating  System
   Commands  Manual.   You  should  also be familiar with Introduction to
   DECsystem-10.


   SYNOPSIS OF TOPS-10 OPERATING SYSTEM COMMANDS MANUAL

   Chapter 1 describes the components of the TOPS-10 operating system and
   how to use them.

   Chapter 2 lists the functional categories of commands, lists  all  the
   commands   alphabetically,  and  describes  each  command  in  detail.
   Examples accompany the command descriptions.

   The appendixes contain additional reference material.








                                    viii


   CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL

   The following conventions are used in this manual:

   Convention     Meaning

   addr           Program or location address

   arg            An argument to a command

   c(addr)        The contents of an octal address

   core           Refers to main (processor) memory

   CTRL/x         A control character.  Control characters are  explained
                  in Section 1.6.

   date           A date in the form of dd-mm-yy.  For example,  22-11-93
                  represents November 22, 1993.

   date-time      The date and time in the standard  format.   (Refer  to
                  Section 1.8.3.)

   density        The density of a magnetic tape

   dev:           Any  logical  or physical  device  name. A colon (:)
   device-name    must  be  included  when  a device name is  part  of  a
                  file specification.  Refer to Section 1.9.1.

   [directory]    A directory  name.  This can  be either a  UFD or an
   [dir]          SFD.

   expression     A numeric expression

   file.ext       A file name and a file extension, separated by a period

   file name      A name of a file

   file-spec      A   file   specification   written   in   the   format:
                  dev:file.ext[directory].  Refer to Section 1.9.

   fs             File structure

   h              High, referring to a job's high segment

   hh:mm:ss       The time of day using a 24-hour clock (0  through  23),
                  where hh is hours, mm is minutes, and ss is seconds

   id             An identifier

   job            A job number



                                     ix


   jobname        The name of the job.

   key            A keyword to a command argument.

   l              Low, referring to a job's low segment

   letter         An alphabetic character

   lh             The left half of an octal word

   line-number    Refers to the number of the line

   list           A list of arguments

   logical-name   A logical device name, chosen by the user
   log-name
   log

   memory         The decimal number of memory words measured in K or  P.
                  1K  is  equal  to 1024 words; 1P (page) is equal to 512
                  words.

   MFD            A master file directory

   <nnn>          A protection code

   nnnn           A tape density

   n              A decimal number, such as a unit number

   ^name^         A DECtape identifier

   nodelist       A list of all the systems in a network environment

   PPN            A project-programmer number

   program        A program name

   proj,prog      A project-programmer number

   [proj,prog]    The name of a user-file directory
   [ppn]

   oo             An octal number

   rh             The right half of an octal word

   SFD            A sub-file directory

   spec           A specification of a file

   str            A file structure name


                                     x


   /switch        A command line modifier

   time           Refers to a time of day

   UFD            A user-file directory

   v              Version number

   x              A numeric or text variable

   xx             A node number in a device name

   $              The symbol printed on your terminal when you press  the
                  ESCape (ALTmode) key

   ^x             A character that is printed when you press the  CONTROL
                  key  while  you  type  a  character  key.  For example,
                  typing a CTRL/C prints ^C at your terminal.

   <DEL>          Indicates when you should press the DELETE (RUBOUT) key

   <RET>          Indicates when you should press the RETURN key

   <ESC>          Indicates when you should press  the  ESCape  (ALTmode)
                  key

   |              Vertical bars (|) in the left margin denote changes  or
                  additions  to  the  TOPS-10  Operating System since the
                  last printing of this manual

   All examples, commands, switches, values, and arguments are  shown  in
   uppercase.   This  is for the sake of distinction.  Examples are shown
   as they would appear on  a  terminal  that  does  not  have  lowercase
   ability.


   MANUALS REFERENCED

   The following manuals are referred to in the text of this manual:

   Introduction to DECsystem-10

   Getting Started with DECsystem-10

   TOPS-10/TOPS-20 Batch Reference Manual

   TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual

   TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual, Vols.  1 and 2

   DECsystem-10 MACRO Assembler Reference Manual



                                     xi


   DEC10/20 Processor Reference Manual

   TOPS-10 Operator's Guide

   TOPS-10 Software Installation Guide

   TOPS-10 LINK Programmer's Reference Manual

   TOPS-10/TOPS-20 FORTRAN Language Manual

   TOPS-10/TOPS-20 DECmail/MS Manual

   TOPS-10 DDT Manual

   TOPS-10 MAKLIB User's Guide

   VT52 Owner's Manual

   LN01 Programmer's Reference Manual



































                                    xii











                                 CHAPTER 1

                                INTRODUCTION



   TOPS-10 is the name of the Timesharing Operating  System  for  use  on
   DIGITAL's  KL10  and  KS10  systems.  You communicate with the TOPS-10
   operating system using the  TOPS-10  command  language.   The  TOPS-10
   operating system is also called the monitor.



   1.1  JOBS

   TOPS-10 is a timesharing system; that is, the system transfers control
   rapidly  among a number of jobs, so that all jobs appear to be running
   simultaneously.  The term job refers to the entire sequence  of  steps
   that  you start from your terminal or card deck.  You start a job from
   your terminal by using the LOGIN command, and you use the KJOB command
   to end your job.

   You can initiate a job at a central computer site  or  from  a  remote
   location.

   After you initiate a job,  you  can  initiate  a  second  job  without
   terminating  the  first.   For example, you can initiate a timesharing
   job and, using the SUBMIT command,  submit  a  second  job  for  batch
   processing.  (The SUBMIT command is discussed in Chapter 2.)

   When configuring and loading TOPS-10, the  system  administrator  sets
   the maximum number of jobs the system can process.



   1.2  CONNECTING TO THE SYSTEM

   Only  authorized  users  have  access   to   TOPS-10.    Your   system
   administrator  provides  each  authorized  user  with  a  user name, a
   project programmer number (PPN), and a password.  These  identify  all
   users  and  their  corresponding  areas  on file structures.  When you
   specify a directory area, your  project-programmer  number  identifies
   you.   A  comma  separates the project and programmer numbers, and the


                                    1-1
                                INTRODUCTION


   entire PPN is enclosed in square brackets.  For example, [27,4072].





















































                                    1-2
                                INTRODUCTION


   The project numbers range from 1 to 377777  (octal).   The  programmer
   numbers  range  from  1  to  777777  (octal).  Numbers 1 through 7 are
   reserved for DIGITAL, and numbers 400000 through 777777  are  reserved
   for special purposes.

   Your password is one to thirty-nine characters long and is  used  when
   you  log  in to the system and when you attach to another job.  (Refer
   to the LOGIN and ATTACH commands, Chapter  2.)  To  maintain  password
   secrecy,  the  monitor  does  not  echo your password on the terminal.
   When you are using a terminal with local copy, a mask is printed  when
   you type your password, making the password unreadable.



   1.3  OPERATING SYSTEM MODES

   You can run jobs  on  the  TOPS-10  operating  system  in  two  modes:
   interactive mode and batch mode.



   1.3.1  Interactive Mode

   Jobs that run in interactive mode use a terminal to access the system.
   The  language  you  use  to  run  a  job is the command language.  The
   commands you type on the terminal are received and  processed  by  the
   command language interpreter of the TOPS-10 monitor.  When your job is
   in interactive mode, you complete your work at  two  levels:   monitor
   and user level.  Section 1.4.  discusses interactive levels.



   1.3.2  Batch Mode

   Batch jobs communicate with the system in batch mode.  They are  input
   to the system from punched cards or from the terminal.  Batch jobs are
   handled by the  batch  command  interpreter.   For  information  about
   TOPS-10 batch, refer to the TOPS-10/TOPS-20 Batch Reference Manual.



   1.4  INTERACTIVE LEVELS

   When your terminal is in interactive mode, your job is at one  of  two
   levels, monitor level or user level.









                                    1-3
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.4.1  Monitor Level

   When your job is at monitor level,  you  are  communicating  with  the
   monitor.   The command language interpreter processes each command you
   type.  The monitor prompts you  with  a  period  (.).   Every  monitor
   command  should  follow  this  prompt.   You  end a monitor command by
   pressing the RETURN key (<RET>).

   The format of each command  is  variable  because  many  commands  are
   followed  by  optional  switches,  arguments, or values.  (See Section
   1.8.)

   Section 1.6  contains  descriptions  of  the  control  characters  and
   special keys you use when typing commands.



   1.4.2  User Level

   When you type the operating system command RUN, followed by a  program
   name,  your  job moves from monitor level to user level.  To move back
   to monitor level, type CTRL/C.  If the  program  is  not  waiting  for
   terminal  input,  it may be necessary to type CTRL/C twice.  (Refer to
   Section 1.6.1.)

   Other commands also bring your job to user level.  When your job is at
   user  level,  you  are working with a program other than the operating
   system itself.  Each program has its own set of commands and  its  own
   command  interpreter.   This  manual  describes  some system programs.
   System programs usually prompt with an asterisk (*).

   At user  level,  control  characters  and  special  keys  can  have  a
   different   effect   than  they  have  at  monitor  level.   Read  the
   description of each program to determine the effects  of  the  control
   characters and special keys.

   The  following  example  shows  a  dialogue  with  the  system  in  an
   interactive job:

   Example

        Monitor level:

        .R SETSRC<RET>

        User level and program response:

        *T<RET>
        DSKC:,DSKB:,FENCE





                                    1-4
                                INTRODUCTION


        User level:

        *A DSKN:<RET>

        User level and program response:

        *T<RET>
        DSKC:,DSKB:,DSKN:,FENCE

        CTRL/C to return to monitor level:

        *^C

        Monitor prompt at monitor level:

        .



   1.5  CONTEXTS

   A core image is what a job's portion of memory contains at  any  given
   time.   The  core  image,  as  well as information about the monitor's
   state with respect to  your  job,  constitute  a  context.   When  you
   initialize  a  program,  your  context usually changes.  For instance,
   running the DIRECT program  creates  a  core  image  with  the  DIRECT
   program  in  it.  Exiting DIRECT and then running SYSTAT, for example,
   destroys what you had in memory (the DIRECT program)  and  loads  data
   pertinent to SYSTAT.

   Three commands allow you to display information  about  contexts,  and
   manipulate  them  in  various ways.  These commands are CONTEXT, PUSH,
   and POP.  CONTEXT and PUSH create additional  contexts.   POP  returns
   you  to  a superior context.  When you work with multiple contexts, at
   least one context  is  preserved  while  you  work  with  the  current
   context.

   You can work with multiple contexts by creating parallel contexts,  or
   creating  inferior  contexts.  The default maximum number of contexts,
   including current, parallel, and inferior, is  four.   The  number  of
   contexts  in  use  at any moment is shown by the CONTEXT command.  You
   can also use the CONTEXT command to  create  parallel  contexts.   You
   might  create a parallel context, run a frequently accessed program in
   it, and then exit, returning to your previous context.  Both  contexts
   now  exist  simultaneously.   When  you need to use the program in the
   created context, simply switch to that context.  You will not have  to
   wait  for  it  to  reinitialize.   The full description of the CONTEXT
   command in Chapter 2 gives an example of this procedure, including how
   to create and access a parallel context.





                                    1-5
                                INTRODUCTION


   The PUSH command allows you to create an inferior context.   When  you
   return  to  your  previous  task  in  a superior context, the inferior
   context is deleted.  You return to the superior context using the  POP
   command.    An  inferior  context  could  be  used  in  the  following
   situation:  If you were in the  process  of  completing  a  task,  and
   needed  to  see  some HELP text, you could create an inferior context,
   read the HELP text you needed, destroy the inferior context and return
   to the unchanged superior context.  The system automatically creates a
   new context for certain commands.  The  system  manager  can  set  the
   system to create a new context when any monitor command is issued.



   1.6  SPECIAL CHARACTERS

   The command language interpreter recognizes several special characters
   that cause specific functions to be performed.

   These special characters are described in the following sections.



   1.6.1  CTRL/C - Interrupt

   When you type  a  CTRL/C  (control-C),  the  monitor  interrupts  your
   current  running  program  and  returns your terminal to monitor mode.
   You must type two CTRL/Cs if your program is not requesting input from
   your terminal (that is, if your program is executing).  If you issue a
   CTRL/C while typing a command in monitor mode, this  character  causes
   the  input  line to be deleted.  If you issue two CTRL/Cs while output
   is being printed on your terminal, the output is ended.

   Example

        This example shows a program prompt.  CTRL/C brings your  job  to
        monitor level.

        *^C

        .



   1.6.2  DELETE Key

   When you press the DELETE (RUBOUT) key, the monitor deletes  the  last
   character  you  typed.   This  function  permits you to correct typing
   errors.  When you press the DELETE key n times,  the  monitor  deletes
   the  last  n  characters  that  you typed.  On hard-copy terminals the
   monitor echoes all deleted characters on your  terminal  and  encloses
   the deleted characters in backslashes (\).



                                    1-6
                                INTRODUCTION


   On video terminals the deleted characters that you typed  are  removed
   from  the screen.  However, you must inform the monitor of the kind of
   terminal you are using.  (Refer to the SET TTY command in Chapter  2.)
   After  you  press RETURN or ESCape, you cannot use the DELETE function
   on that line.

   Example

        Type the characters SET TTY TYPE L036, press  the  DELETE  key  3
        times, then type the correct characters.

        .SET TTY TYPE L036\630\A36<RET>

        .



   1.6.3  CTRL/W - Delete Word

   When you type CTRL/W (control-W), the monitor deletes  the  last  word
   you typed.

   A word is defined as all spaces,  tabs,  and  alphanumeric  characters
   until a nonalphanumeric character is encountered.

   On video terminals, the deleted word is erased from the screen.

   On hard-copy terminals, the deleted word is printed backwards  between
   backslashes.

   Example

        Type the characters SET TTY TYPE L036, type CTRL/W, and type  the
        correct characters.

        .SET TTY TYPE L036\630L\LA36<RET>

        .



   1.6.4  CTRL/U - Delete Line

   When you type CTRL/U (control-U), the  monitor  deletes  your  current
   input  line,  back  to the last time you pressed RETURN.  On hard-copy
   terminals, the  monitor  responds  with  a  carriage-return/line-feed,
   after  which  you can retype the line.  On video terminals, the entire
   line that you typed is  removed  from  the  screen.   After  you  have
   pressed  RETURN,  you can no longer use the line-editing features (for
   example, CTRL/U and DELETE) on that line.




                                    1-7
                                INTRODUCTION


   Example

        Type CTRL/U.

        .SETTTY ^U

        Type the correct characters.

        SET TTY LA36<RET>

        .



   1.6.5  CTRL/R - Reprint Line

   When you type CTRL/R (control-R), the  monitor  reprints  the  current
   input  line.   If  you  type a line incorrectly, then make corrections
   using the DELETE key, the monitor will print the corrected  line  when
   you  type CTRL/R.  The following is an example of this operation using
   a hard-copy terminal:

   Example

        If you type:

        SET TTQ<DEL>Y N0<DEL>O FILE<DEL>L

        The line appears as:

        .SET TTQ\Q\Y N0\0\O FILE\E\L

        If you then press CTRL/R:

        .SET TTQ\Q\Y N0\0\O FILE\E\L ^R

        The monitor prints:

        SET TTY NO FILL

   When you type CTRL/R, the monitor issues  a  carriage-return/line-feed
   before printing the corrected input line.  The cursor or printing head
   of your terminal is left at its previous location.

   If a program such as your text editor uses CTRL/R for another purpose,
   you  can disable the CTRL/R function using the SET TTY RTCOMP command.
   (See Chapter 2 for a complete description of this command.)







                                    1-8
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.6.6  CTRL/O - Cancel Output

   When you type CTRL/O (control-O), the monitor cancels output  to  your
   terminal.   This  function  is useful when a program begins to print a
   long message that you are not interested in reading.  If  you  do  not
   want  to  wait for the monitor to finish printing the message, you can
   stop the monitor from printing the message one of  two  ways.   First,
   you  can type two CTRL/Cs, but this action also stops the execution of
   the program.  Second, you can type a single CTRL/O.

   When you type CTRL/O, the monitor continues  executing  your  program,
   but  does  not  print any output on your terminal.  The monitor begins
   printing to your terminal when one of the following conditions occurs:

        o  The executing program requests input from your terminal.

        o  The program ends and returns control to the monitor.

        o  You type CTRL/C twice, which returns control to the monitor.

   To start the output to your terminal again, type another CTRL/O.



   1.6.7  CTRL/S - Hold Output

   When you type CTRL/S (control-S), the monitor  holds  output  to  your
   terminal.   This control character works only after you have typed the
   SET TTY PAGE command.  (See Chapter  2.)  This  control  character  is
   useful if you have a display terminal, and you have to stop the output
   to read it.  To read the rest of the output, type CTRL/Q.



   1.6.8  CTRL/Q - Resume Output

   When you type CTRL/Q (control-Q), the monitor resumes output  to  your
   terminal.   CTRL/S  and CTRL/Q are useful when you are using a display
   terminal.  Used in conjunction with CTRL/S, you can stop and  continue
   output  to  your  terminal,  thus reading a file before it scrolls off
   your display screen.













                                    1-9
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.6.9  CTRL/T - Job Status

   When  you  type  CTRL/T  (control-T),  the   monitor   prints   status
   information  pertaining to your job on your terminal.  CTRL/T does not
   echo on your terminal.  There are 11 items of  information  output  to
   your terminal.  These items are:

        1.  The incremental daytime (which is the  time  since  you  last
            issued  a  CTRL/T or a USESTAT command) or the time since you
            logged in if you have  not  issued  a  CTRL/T  or  a  USESTAT
            command.  (For example, Day: :05:43.)

        2.  The incremental runtime, which is the CPU time used since you
            issued  a  CTRL/T,  USESTAT  command,  LOGIN command, or TIME
            command.  (For example, Run:0.48.)

        3.  The incremental disk reads,  which  is  the  number  of  disk
            blocks read since you issued a CTRL/T, USESTAT command, LOGIN
            command, or DSK command.  (For example, Rd:75.)

        4.  Incremental disk writes, which is the number of  disk  blocks
            written  since  you  issued  a CTRL/T, USESTAT, LOGIN, or DSK
            command.  (For example, Wr:8.)

        5.  The program name.  (For example, SOS.)

        6.  The memory size.  (For example, 12+19P.)

        7.  The current context number (for example, Ctx:1.)

        8.  The job state.  The job state  codes  are  described  in  the
            SYSTAT  command description in Chapter 2.  (For example, ^C.)
            An ampersand after the job state code indicates  the  job  is
            locked  in  core.  An asterisk indicates the job is being run
            or swapped.

        9.  The program counter, which is  the  address  of  the  current
            instruction.  (For example, PC:400275.)
|  
|      10.  The CPU that the job last ran on.  (For example, CPU0.)

       11.  The job state, which can be INPUT WAIT or OUTPUT WAIT.   This
            item  is  printed  only when you type CTRL/T from user level.
            (For example, OUTPUT WAIT FOR TTY21.)

   This information can be obtained with the USESTAT command  at  monitor
   level.   However,  by  typing  CTRL/T,  you  can  determine your job's
   progress without interrupting its execution.  When  you  type  CTRL/T,
   the  character  is  not  passed  to  your  job  as an input character.
   However, some programs activate a special interrupt feature  when  you
   type CTRL/T.  (See the TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual.)



                                    1-10
                                INTRODUCTION


   If a system program, such as your text editor uses CTRL/T for  another
   purpose,  you can disable the CTRL/T function using the SET TTY RTCOMP
   command.  (See Chapter 2 for a complete description of this command.)

   Example
|  
|       Day: :05:43 Run:8.51 Rd:48 Wr:37 DIRECT
|  15+33P Ctx:1 ^C PC:400275 CPU0





   1.7  TYPE-AHEAD CAPABILITY

   Type-ahead allows you to type another command without waiting for  the
   monitor  to respond to your first command.  If you want two operations
   performed, you can begin typing the request for the  second  operation
   before you receive the prompt that the monitor prints after completing
   the first operation.  If an error occurs during the  first  operation,
   the characters you typed ahead are ignored.



   1.8  COMMAND FORMATS

   The general format of each command is a line  of  ASCII  uppercase  or
   lowercase   characters   or  a  mixture  of  uppercase  and  lowercase
   characters.  You type  the  commands  after  the  monitor  prints  the
   TOPS-10  prompt  (.).   The  following  are  examples of valid TOPS-10
   commands:

        .DIRECT
        .direct
        .dirECT

   If you type spaces or tabs before a command name, the  system  ignores
   them.  For example, the following commands produce the same result:

        .DIRECT
        .     DIRECT

   The commands you type to the command language interpreter are  one  to
   six  characters  long.   If  you  type  any  character  past the sixth
   character,  the  monitor  ignores  it.   You  need  only  type  enough
   characters to uniquely identify the command.

   It is sometimes possible to abbreviate a command by typing  characters
   fewer  than  would  make  the command unique.  This is not encouraged,
   however, because uniqueness of a command may vary from monitor release
   to monitor release.  For this reason, you should use the whole command
   in a batch control file.


                                    1-11
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.8.1  Command Termination

   You terminate every command to the  command  language  interpreter  by
   pressing the RETURN key.  For example:

        .DIRECT<RET>



   1.8.2  Line Continuation

   You can continue a command line  to  some  system  programs,  such  as
   DIRECT  and  QUEUE,  by  placing  a  hyphen  (-) as the last nonblank,
   noncomment character before you press the RETURN key.  These  programs
   treat  continuation  lines  as part of the current command line.  This
   feature allows you to type indefinitely long command lines.  A line is
   terminated by a <RET> that is not preceded by a hyphen.



   1.8.3  Command Arguments

   You specify arguments to a command after the command name and separate
   them  from  the  command  name  by  a  space.  If the command language
   interpreter recognizes a command name, but  cannot  find  a  necessary
   argument, the monitor responds with the error message:

        ?TOO FEW ARGUMENTS

   Example

        The ASSIGN command requires arguments.

        .ASSIGN<RET>

        System error message:

        ?TOO FEW ARGUMENTS

        TOPS-10 prompt:

        .

   After the monitor prints the error message, your terminal is  left  in
   monitor mode, as indicated by the monitor prompt.  You can then retype
   the command.








                                    1-12
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.8.3.1  Relative  Date-Time  Arguments - Certain   commands   require
   arguments that specify a date or time.  Date and time arguments can be
   either relative or absolute.  A relative argument specifies a  certain
   length  of  time  from  the  current  date  or  time.  The format of a
   relative argument is:

        +number-of-daysD:hours:minutes:seconds

   Where:

        number-of-days  is optional.

        D               is required if you specify number of days.

        hours           is optional if you specify number  of  days  with
                        the letter D.  Otherwise, hours is required.

        minutes         is optional.

        seconds         is optional.  However, if  you  specify  seconds,
                        minutes  must  also  be  given or seconds will be
                        interpreted as minutes.

   You must type a colon to separate one field from the other.   You  can
   precede  a  relative  argument  with an optional plus (+) or minus (-)
   sign.  The sign implies either past (-) or future (+).   When  you  do
   not specify number of days, you must precede the time with a plus sign
   or a minus sign.  For example:

        -3D:4:27:21

   means 3 days, 4 hours, 27 minutes, and 21 seconds ago.  Similarly:

        +4

   means 4 hours from now.



   1.8.3.2  Absolute Date-Time Arguments - An absolute argument specifies
   a  particular date or time.  The format of an absolute argument is one
   of the following:

         o  weekday:hours:minutes:seconds

         o  date:hours:minutes:seconds

         o  keyword:hours:minutes:seconds






                                    1-13
                                INTRODUCTION


   Where:    weekday is the day of the week  or  one  of  the  following:
             YESTERDAY, TODAY, TOMORROW.

             This part of the argument is  optional.   The  weekdays  are
             abbreviated as follows:

                  SUNDAY    = SUN
                  MONDAY    = MON
                  TUESDAY   = TUES
                  WEDNESDAY = WED
                  THURSDAY  = THUR
                  FRIDAY    = FRI
                  SATURDAY  = SAT

             date is optional and has one of the following formats:

                  day-month-year (21-OCT-79)

                  month-day-year (OCT-21-79)

                  numeric month-day-year (10-21-79)

                  The month can be abbreviated.   The  abbreviations  for
                  the months are JA, F, MAR, AP, MAY, JUN, JUL, AU, S, O,
                  N, and D.

                  The year and its preceding hyphen are optional, and, if
                  given,  can  be one, two, or four digits.  For example,
                  0, 90, and 1990 will all be  interpreted  as  the  year
                  1990.

             keyword is one of the following options:

                  LOGIN (time of login)

                  NOON

                  MIDNIGHT

             hours is based on a 24-hour clock  (0  through  23)  and  is
             required if you omitted the weekday, date, or keyword, or if
             you specify minutes.

             minutes is optional unless you specify seconds.

             seconds is optional.








                                    1-14
                                INTRODUCTION


   The following example specifies Wednesday at 9:15:06 AM.

   Example

        WED:09:15:06

   Because the date is known to be past or future from either the  switch
   used  (/BEFORE and /SINCE imply past, /AFTER implies the future) or by
   a plus or minus sign, an unspecified field is filled in  so  that  the
   result  is  the next or last occurrence of the specified date.  If you
   omit the time argument, the time defaults to  00:00:00  (midnight)  if
   past,  and  23:59:59  (11  o'clock,  59  minutes, and 59 second PM) if
   future.

   Examples

        /AFTER:SAT is after 23:59:59 next Saturday

        /BEFORE:25-FEB is before last February 25th

        /SINCE:JUL-3-85 is since July 3, 1985 at midnight

































                                    1-15
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.8.4  Command Switches

   You can modify some commands by including  a  switch  in  the  command
   line.   You precede each switch with a slash (/) and terminate it with
   a nonalphanumeric  character,  usually  <RET>,  a  comma,  or  another
   switch.   You  can  abbreviate  the switch if its name remains unique.
   Abbreviation is  not  recommended  for  batch  control  files.   Valid
   switches  for  each  command  are  documented  as  part of the command
   descriptions in Chapter 2.  The following is an example of a  command,
   command argument, and command switch:

   Example

        .PRINT MYFILE.EXT/COPIES:2



   1.8.4.1  Temporary Switches - The switches for COMPILE-class  commands
   are  either  temporary  (local)  or permanent (global).  COMPILE-class
   commands are further described in  Appendix  C.   A  temporary  switch
   applies  only to the immediately preceding file.  Do not place a space
   or comma between the  file  name  and  the  switch.   In  the  command
   construction:

        .COMPILE PROG,TEST/MACRO,SUBLET

   the /MACRO switch applies only to the file named TEST.



   1.8.4.2  Permanent Switches - A permanent switch, sometimes  called  a
   sticky  switch, applies to all files following it on the command line,
   until you modify it by a subsequent switch.  You separate  the  switch
   from  the  file name by spaces, commas, or a combination of both.  For
   example, using the /MACRO switch:

   Examples

        Temporary switch that affects PROG:

        .COMPILE PROG/MACRO TEST,SUBLET

        Temporary switch that affects PROG:

        .COMPILE PROG/MACRO,TEST,SUBLET

        Permanent switch that affects TEST and SUBLET:

        .COMPILE PROG,/MACRO,TEST,SUBLET

        Permanent switch that affects TEST and SUBLET:



                                    1-16
                                INTRODUCTION


        .COMPILE PROG,/MACRO TEST,SUBLET

   The COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG command descriptions in  Chapter
   2 list the switches for these commands.



   1.8.5  Comments

   You can type a comment on the same line as a command by preceding  the
   comment  with  a  semicolon (;) or exclamation point (!).  The monitor
   and  the  batch  command  language  interpreters  do  not  attempt  to
   interpret  the  characters  after  the  semicolon.   Comment lines are
   useful when you are using a  hard-copy  terminal,  or  making  control
   files  for  batch  jobs.   The  following is an example of a line that
   contains both a command and a comment:

        .DIRECT    ;will list names of files in default area <RET>




































                                    1-17
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.9  FILE SPECIFICATION

   The system stores programs and data as named  files.   When  they  are
   stored   on   DECtape   or  disk,  files  are  identified  by  a  file
   specification.   The  file  specification   includes   the   following
   identifications:

        1.  A device name or file structure name

        2.  A file name

        3.  A file name extension

        4.  An ordered list of directory names

        5.  An access protection code

   The file specification is necessary to identify a disk file.   If  you
   issue a file specification for devices other than DECtape or disk, the
   monitor ignores them.  File specifications are used to choose  a  file
   from  a  directory,  a  set  of  files  belonging  to a specific user.
   DECtapes and disks are the only directory-oriented devices.   Items  4
   and 5 in the above list do not apply to DECtapes.

   The device name can be any valid device name described in the  Section
   1.9.1.   Always type a colon following the device name.  An example of
   a device name is DSKC:.

   A file name is  one  to  six  alphanumeric  characters.   The  monitor
   ignores  all  characters  past the sixth.  File names are discussed in
   Section 1.9.2.  An example of  a  device  name  and  a  file  name  is
   DSKC:MYFILE.

   The file name extension is a period (.)  followed  by  zero  to  three
   characters.   It  is  used  to indicate the type of information in the
   file.  (Refer  to  Appendix  D  for  a  list  of  standard  file  name
   extensions.)  For the most efficient use of system resources, use only
   standard file name extensions, though other extensions can  be  valid.
   Most  programs  recognize file names and extensions consisting only of
   letters and digits.  Often the term file name refers to both the  file
   name  and the file extension.  An example of a device name, file name,
   and file extension is DSKC:MYFILE.TXT.

   The directory name identifies the disk area where the file is  stored.
   This  list  can  be  a  user  file  directory (UFD) represented by the
   owner's project-programmer number, or a user file  directory  followed
   by  one  or  more  sub-file  directories  (SFDs).   You must enclose a
   directory name in square brackets ([]).  Directory names are discussed
   in  Section  1.9.3.   An  example  of  a  device name, file name, file
   extension and directory name is DSKC:MYFILE.TXT[21,589].




                                    1-18
                                INTRODUCTION


   The access  protection  code  of  a  file  is  a  3-digit  octal  code
   designating  the  users who can read or write the file.  The code must
   be enclosed in angle brackets (< >),  and  you  specify  it  only  for
   output  files.  For a given file, users are divided into three groups:
   owner of the file, users with the same project number  as  the  owner,
   and  all other users.  The standard protection code is <057>, allowing
   users in the owner's  project  to  read  and  execute  the  file,  and
   preventing  access  by  all other users.  The standard protection code
   may be different at your installation.  Protection codes are described
   in  Section  1.9.4.   An  example  of  a  full  file  specification is
   DSKC:MYFILE.TXT[21,589]<055>.

   The following information is necessary when you refer to a file:

         o  The file name.

         o  The device name, if the file is not on disk and not  in  your
            default search list.

         o  The directory name, if the file is not in your directory.

   The following information is optional in a file specification:

         o  The file name extension.

         o  The device name, if the file is on a file structure  in  your
            search list.

         o  The directory name, if the file is in your directory.

         o  The protection code (if an output file).

   Examples

        File name and file name extension:

        TEXT.MAC

        Physical device name and file name:

        DTA3:FILEA

        Generic device name, file name, file name extension and directory
        name:

        DSK:PROG2.CBL[10,16]

        A complete file specification:  device name, file name, file name
        extension, directory name, and protection code:

        DSKA:MAIN.F4[27,235]<057>



                                    1-19
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.9.1  Device Names

   TOPS-10 supports a number of peripheral input/output devices to handle
   data acquisition, storage, retrieval, and display.  These devices are:

        Card Punch            Card Reader          DECtape
        Disk                  Display Terminal     Graphics Display
        Hard-copy Terminal    Line Printer         Magnetic Tape
        Paper Tape Punch      Paper Tape Reader    Plotter

   The monitor allocates a device to your job when you request access  to
   the  device.   (Refer  to the ASSIGN and MOUNT commands in Chapter 2.)
   Until you request a device, it resides in the system pool of available
   resources.

   To reference a device, you must specify a device name.  In the command
   descriptions  in  this  manual,  places where you must supply a device
   name have the symbol dev:  in the command line format.  The  types  of
   device  names  are  listed  in Table 1.1 and are described in Sections
   1.9.1.1 through 1.9.1.5.


   Table 1-1:  Device Names

   ______________________________________________________________________

     Type of Name                            Meaning
   ______________________________________________________________________

     generic               These specify a generic type of device  such
                           as a disk (DSK:) or a magnetic tape (MTA:).

     physical              These specify a particular physical unit  on
                           a   specific   controller   such  as  MTA1:,
                           magnetic-tape unit number 1.

     logical               These are substitute names for devices.  You
                           assign these names with the ASSIGN command.

     ersatz                These are  names  for  ersatz  (pseudo-disk)
                           devices  normally  used to contain libraries
                           or special directories.

     system defined        These  are  names  defined  by  the  system.
     logical               Each name corresponds to a physical unit  so
                           long  as  the  unit  is  declared  to be the
                           system default for that unit.
   ______________________________________________________________________






                                    1-20
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.9.1.1  Generic Device Names - The most general type of  device  name
   is  the  generic  device  name.   When you specify a generic name, the
   monitor selects a free unit of the device type specified.   When  your
   computer  is  in a network environment, the monitor chooses the device
   from those devices at your location, or, if none  are  available,  the
   monitor chooses the device from the host (central) site.

   A generic name can be two or three letters long and is followed  by  a
   colon (:).  The generic names are listed in Table 1-2.

   Two-character generic names are  less  specific  than  three-character
   generic  names.   For  example,  MT: means any magnetic tape unit, but
   MTA: means any magnetic tape unit on controller A.  When  you  specify
   the generic name DSK: or DS:, the monitor uses your job search list to
   determine which disk device should be selected  for  you.   (Refer  to
   Section 1.12.)


   Table 1-2:  Generic Device Names

   ______________________________________________________________________

                                          3-Letter          2-Letter
     Device                             Device Name       Device Name
   ______________________________________________________________________

     Card punch                             CDP:              CP:
     Card reader                            CDR:              CR:
     Console terminal                       CTY:              ---
     DECtape                                DTx:              DT:
     Disk                                   DSK:              DS:
        Packs                               DPx:              DP:
                                            RPx:              RP:
        Fixed head                          FHx:              FH:
                                            FSx:              FS:
     Display                                DIS:              ---
     Line printer                           LPT:              LP:
        lowercase/uppercase                 ---               LL:
        uppercase                           ---               LU:
     Magnetic tape                          MTx:              ---
        7-track                             ---               M7:
        9-track                             ---               M9:
     Operator terminal                      OPR:              ---
     Paper-tape punch                       PTP:              PP:
     Paper-tape reader                      PTR:              PR:
     Plotter                                PLT:              ---
     Pseudo-terminal                        PTY:              ---
     System library                         SYS:              SY:
     Terminal                               TTY:              TT:
   ______________________________________________________________________




                                    1-21
                                INTRODUCTION


   When  you  specify  a  generic   name,   the   monitor   selects   the
   lowest-numbered  available  unit  of the device type specified.  There
   are two defaults when you specify a generic name:

        1.  When your program specifies DSK or DS, the system  uses  your
            job search list.

        2.  When you specify TTY: or TT:, the monitor always selects your
            terminal (assuming that these are not logical names).



   1.9.1.2  Physical Device Names - Every I/O device has a physical name.
   This  name  consists  of  the  generic  name,  a letter indicating the
   controller, and one numeric character indicating the unit number.  For
   example,  the  generic  name  MTA: indicates any magnetic tape unit on
   controller A.  However,  MTA1:  indicates  magnetic  tape  unit  1  on
   controller A.



   1.9.1.3  File Structures - The TOPS-10 operating system organizes disk
   devices   into   file   structures.    File   structures  are  logical
   arrangements of 128-word blocks on one or more  disk  units.   A  file
   structure  can  exist  on one disk unit, or it can be distributed over
   several disk units designated by a single  name.   However,  two  file
   structures cannot exist on the same unit.

   The operator or system administrator assigns  a  name  to  every  file
   structure  when  he or she defines the system's file structures.  This
   name is one to four characters long, and cannot duplicate  a  physical
   device  name,  a  unit  name, or an existing file structure name.  The
   recommended   names   for   public   file   structures   are    DSKA:,
   DSKB:,...,DSKO: in order of decreasing speed.

   File structures are illustrated and explained in detail in the TOPS-10
   Monitor Calls Manual Vol.  1.



   1.9.1.4  Logical Device Names - You can assign a  logical  name  to  a
   physical device.  The monitor will recognize the name that you assign,
   and associate the logical name with  the  physical  device.   You  can
   assign a logical name to a device using the ASSIGN command.

   The logical name that  you  assign  may  be  up  to  six  alphanumeric
   characters  and  may  optionally be ended by a colon (:).  Thereafter,
   the monitor will use the device that you associated with  the  logical
   name,  when  you  or your programs specify that logical name.  Logical
   names are cleared by the DEASSIGN command.  That is, use the  DEASSIGN
   command to disassociate logical names from devices.  Logical names are
   also cleared when you log off the system, and when you specify another
   logical name for the same device.

                                    1-22
                                INTRODUCTION


   Logical names are useful when you are writing a program that  needs  a
   device,  but you will not know until program execution what device you
   will need.  Use a logical name in the program to represent the device.
   Before  you  run  the  program use the ASSIGN command to associate the
   logical name with a physical device.

   Logical names take precedence over physical names.  Therefore, if  you
   assign the logical name DSK: to the device MTA3: (magnetic tape unit 3
   on controller A), all output to generic DSK will go  to  the  magnetic
   tape.

   Some names are recognized by the  monitor  as  special  system-defined
   logical  names that the monitor translates into physical device names.
   One example is the generic device name OPR:.  The generic name OPR: is
   the system-default logical name for the operator's terminal.

   Therefore, the terminal specified as OPR:  can  change  during  system
   operation;  but  if  you  send  a message to OPR:, the message will be
   routed to the last physical  device  declared  to  be  the  operator's
   terminal at your node.

   All devices except terminals can be  designated  as  being  restricted
   devices.   You  request  a  restricted  device from the system pool of
   available resources  by  issuing  the  MOUNT  command.   This  command
   requires operator intervention before the specified device is assigned
   to your job.  The system deassigns a restricted device from  your  job
   when you log off the system or issue the DISMOUNT, DEASSIGN, or FINISH
   command.

   Unrestricted devices  are  assigned  to  your  job  on  a  first-come,
   first-served  basis  when  you issue the MOUNT or ASSIGN command.  The
   device assignment remains in effect until you release  the  device  by
   issuing  a  DEASSIGN  command  or a FINISH command, or you log off the
   system.

   The following example illustrates the use of both physical and logical
   device names.

















                                    1-23
                                INTRODUCTION


   Example

        You request a DECtape drive with the logical name ABC:

        .ASSIGN DTA: ABC:

        The monitor gives you unrestricted device DTA0: (DECtape number 0
        on controller A).  You then mount a DECtape on drive DTA0:

        DTA0 ASSIGNED

        You request any paper-tape punch and  request  that  the  logical
        name ABC: be assigned to it.

        .ASSIGN PTP: ABC:

        The monitor prints  a  warning  message,  telling  you  that  the
        logical  name  was  previously  assigned  to another device.  The
        monitor changes the logical-name assignment, so that the  logical
        name ABC: now refers to the paper-tape punch.

        %LOGICAL NAME WAS IN USE, PTP0 ASSIGNED

        You run the system program PIP.

        .R PIP

        You issue a command string to PIP asking that file  FILEA.EXT  be
        transferred  from  device  DTA0: to logical device ABC: (physical
        device PTP0:).

        *ABC:=DTA0:FILEA.EXT

        You type a CTRL/C, returning your job to monitor mode.

        *^C

        You request another DECtape drive and request that  logical  name
        DEF: be assigned to it.

        .ASSIGN DTA: DEF:

        The monitor prints a message telling you that all DECtape  drives
        are  in use by the specified jobs.  The monitor does not assign a
        DECtape drive or a logical name to your job.

        ?ALREADY ASSIGNED TO JOB 13







                                    1-24
                                INTRODUCTION


        You request that DECtape unit 0 (which you already have  assigned
        to you) be assigned the logical name DEF:

        .ASSIGN DTA0: DEF:

        DECtape unit 0 takes on the logical name DEF:.

        DTA0 ASSIGNED

        You deassign the paper-tape  punch,  clearing  the  logical  name
        ABC:.

        .DEASSIGN PTP:

        You run the system program PIP.

        .R PIP

        You request that the file FILEB is to be transferred from  device
        DEF: to device ABC:

        *ABC:=DEF:FILEB

        TOPS-10 prints an  error  message  indicating  that  the  logical
        device name ABC: is no longer assigned.

        ?DEVICE ABC DOES NOT EXIST

        You type a CTRL/C, returning your job to monitor mode.

        *^C

        You request drive DTA0: (DECtape drive 0) again and request  that
        the logical DEF: be changed to XYZ:

        .ASSIGN DTA0: XYZ:

        The system  disassociates  the  logical  name  DEF:  from  DTA0:.
        DECtape unit 0 takes on the logical name XYZ:.

        DTA0 ASSIGNED



   1.9.1.5  Ersatz Device Names - An ersatz device  is  a  disk-simulated
   library.  Although you specify an ersatz device like a file structure,
   an ersatz device represents a particular project-programmer number  on
   a  disk  structure.   Ersatz  device  names are three characters long.
   Appendix D contains a complete list of the ersatz device names used by
   TOPS-10.




                                    1-25
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.9.2  File Names

   Data and programs are stored in the system files.  Files are  used  to
   arrange  and  protect data and programs.  The essential part of a file
   specification is the file name.  You name  a  file  when  you  create,
   rename, or copy it.

   The file name  that  you  choose  must  be  one  to  six  alphanumeric
   characters  long.   It is possible to use non-alphanumeric characters,
   but some symbols have a special meaning to  the  system  (see  Section
   1.10),   and   some   programs   may  not  recognize  non-alphanumeric
   characters.

   The file name is divided into the  name  of  the  file  and  the  file
   extension.  The format is:

        FILE.EXT

   Where FILE is the name you choose to distinguish the file, and .EXT is
   a  standard or non-standard file extension.  The period (.) is used to
   separate the file name from the file extension.

   It  is  recommended  that  you  use  standard  file  extensions  where
   applicable.   The standard file name extensions are listed in Appendix
   D.  File extensions are optional.  You can  name  or  specify  a  file
   without an extension.

   File names and extensions can be changed using the RENAME command.



   1.9.3  Directory Names

   Your directory is a file that serves as an index to your other files.

   There are directories on three levels of file storage:

        The directories in a file structure are  indexed  by  the  Master
        File Directory (MFD) of that structure.

        The files in your directory area are indexed  by  your  User-File
        Directory    (UFD).     Your    UFD   is   designated   by   your
        project-programmer number enclosed in brackets.  The following is
        a valid directory name:

        [30,112]

        A Sub-File Directory (SFD), is a  directory  you  can  create  to
        arrange  the files in your UFD.  A file in your UFD points to the
        SFD.  This file has the same name as the SFD, with  an  extension
        of .SFD.  SFDs are discussed in Section 1.14.



                                    1-26
                                INTRODUCTION


   The directory name is an optional part of a file specification.





















































                                    1-27
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.9.4  Protection Codes

   Every file has a protection code.  The code tells who can  and  cannot
   access  the file.  The protection code consists of three octal digits.
   Each digit specifies the amount  of  protection  against  a  group  of
   users.   The  first  (leftmost)  digit  is the protection code for the
   owner of the file; the middle digit is the  protection  code  for  all
   users  having  the  same  project  number  as the file owner; the last
   (rightmost) digit is the protection code for  all  other  users.   For
   example:


           <0      5       7>
            |      |       |
            |      |       |
            |      |       Protection code for all other users.
            |      |
            |      |
            |      Protection code for all members of file owner's
            |      project.
            |
            |
            Protection code for the file owner.


   Ordinarily, the owner of a file is the user  whose  programmer  number
   matches  the User File Directory (UFD) containing the file, regardless
   of the project number.  That is, a user logged in under the  [27,4072]
   project-programmer  number  is assumed to be the owner of files in the
   User File Directory  [44,4072].   This  feature  can  be  set  by  the
   installation; therefore it may not be set at your own installation.

   The access protection codes for the Owner Field (Field 1)  are  listed
   in  Table  1-3;  the  access  protection  codes for Fields 2 and 3 are
   listed in Table 1-4.



















                                    1-28
                                INTRODUCTION


   Table 1-3:  Protection Codes for Field 1

   ______________________________________________________________________

                           Owner Protection Codes

     Code                    Accessibility by Owner
   ______________________________________________________________________

     7*, 6*    You can execute, read, or change the protection code  of
               the file.

     5*        You have  unlimited  access  to  the  file,  except  for
               renaming it.

     4*        You have unlimited access to the file.

     3         You can execute, read, or change the protection code  of
               the file.

     2         You have  unlimited  access  to  the  file,  except  for
               renaming it.

     1, 0      You have unlimited access.
   ______________________________________________________________________


     * The File Daemon is called on a protection failure on this file


























                                    1-29
                                INTRODUCTION


   Table 1-4:  Protection Codes for Fields 2 and 3

   ______________________________________________________________________

                 Project-members and Other User Protections

     Code                       Access Privileges
   ______________________________________________________________________

     7         The user cannot access the file.

     6         The user can only execute the file.

     5         The user can execute or read the file.

     4         The user can execute, read, or append to the file.

     3         The user can execute, read, append  to,  or  update  the
               file.

     2         The user can execute, read, append to, update, and write
               to the file.

     1         The user can execute, read, append to, update, write to,
               and rename the file.

     0         Unlimited access, including changing the protection code
               of the file.
   ______________________________________________________________________


   When you create a file, and you do not specify a protection code to be
   associated with the file, the system uses one of the following default
   protection codes:

         o  The  default  protection  code  that  is  defined   in   your
            SWITCH.INI file on the LOGIN line, using the /DEFPROT switch.

         o  The default protection code you previously specified with the
            SET DEFAULT PROTECTION command.

         o  The standard TOPS-10 default protection code that is  defined
            by your installation (usually <055> or <057>).











                                    1-30
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.9.5  File Daemon

   The File Daemon, a system program, may determine the protection status
   of  files  with a file protection code of 4, 5, 6, or 7 in the owner's
   protection field.  (Protection codes are discussed in Section  1.9.4.)
   When you set such a protection, a protection violation causes the File
   Daemon to access a file named ACCESS.USR.  The file  ACCESS.USR  is  a
   list of the protected files and the users who may access them.  If you
   have no such file, or if the File Daemon is not running, the user  who
   attempted  to  access  the  file receives an error message, and cannot
   access the  file.   The  File  Daemon  and  the  file  ACCESS.USR  are
   described in the FILDAE Specification in the TOPS-10 Notebook Set.



   1.10  SYSTEM DEFAULTS

   The operating system contains defaults for  many  arguments,  switches
   and  parts  of  file  specifications.   Defaults  are  the  values  or
   instructions that the system uses if you do not specify  those  values
   or instructions in the command string.

   Some system defaults are set  by  the  system  administrator  when  he
   generates  the  monitor.   Other  defaults  are  set according to your
   project-programmer number when you log in.  There  are  commands  that
   allow  you  to  set  some  defaults, which will be effective until you
   change those defaults or log off the system.

   File specification defaults are determined by the system according  to
   the  program  you are running, the search list, and the directory path
   of your job.  Search  lists  and  directory  paths  are  discussed  in
   Sections 1.12 and 1.14.



   1.11  WILDCARD CONSTRUCTIONS

   You can use wildcard  constructions  with  many  command  strings.   A
   wildcard   is   an   asterisk  used  to  specify  a  part  of  a  file
   specification, or a question mark used to replace  a  character  in  a
   file specification field.

   You use the asterisk (*) as a wildcard to designate an entire part  of
   a specification.










                                    1-31
                                INTRODUCTION


   Examples

        All files with this file name and any extension:

        file-name.*

        All files with this extension and any file name:

        *.ext  

        All files:

        *.*    

        All files  in  directories  with  this  project  number  and  any
        programmer number:

        *.*[project,*]

   You can use the question mark as a wildcard to designate  a  character
   of  a file specification.  You type a question mark for each character
   that is to be matched.  For example, PR??  matches four characters  or
   less, of which the first two are PR.

   Examples

        All files with this file name and any extension beginning with M:

        file-name.M??

        All files with this extension  and  any  file  name  up  to  five
        characters, beginning with TES:

        TES??.ext

        All files with file names of two characters or less  and  a  file
        name extension of three characters or less:

        ??.??? 

        All files in  directories  with  the  project  number  25  and  a
        programmer number 500 through 577:

        *.*,[25,5??]

   You can specify the asterisk and the question mark in the same command
   construction:

        All files with file names of two characters or less:

        ??.*



                                    1-32
                                INTRODUCTION


   The DIRECTORY and QUEUE programs recognize a number sign  (#)  in  the
   file  specification  to  indicate that SIXBIT octal code follows.  For
   example,

        .DIR #640000000000.

   gives the same directory listing as

        .DIR T.

   because 120000000000 is the 36-bit left-justified SIXBIT code for  the
   character  "T".   This function is useful for file names which contain
   special characters.  Although the  SIXBIT  code  for  an  asterisk  is
   120000000000, the command line

        .DIR #120000000000.

   would not give the same directory listing as

        .DIR *.

   because the first command would list only a file  literally  named  *.
   The  second command would interpret the * as a wildcard and would list
   all files without extensions.

   You cannot mix SIXBIT code and regular characters within the file name
   or  within the file extension.  However, you can combine a SIXBIT file
   name with a regular file extension and vice versa.

   Appendix G contains a chart of SIXBIT and ASCII character codes.

   You can  specify  a  directory  name  with  the  project  number,  the
   programmer  number,  or  both  numbers missing from the specification.
   The following examples represent directory specifications.

        [15,23]             The User-File Directory [15,23]

        [,30]               The UFD that has your project number and  the
                            specified programmer number (30)

        [36,]               The UFD that has the specified project number
                            (36) and your programmer number

        [,]                 Your UFD

        [-]                 Your  default   directory,   which   can   be
                            different  from  your  UFD.   (See the SETSRC
                            Program  description  in  the  TOPS-10   User
                            Utilities Manual.)

        [,,SUB1,SUB2]       The  sub-file  directory   SUB2   under   the
                            sub-file directory SUB1 in your UFD


                                    1-33
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.12  SEARCH LISTS

   A search list is a list of file structures listed in  the  order  that
   the  operating  system will search through them for a file.  There are
   two types:  the system search list and a job search list.

   The system search list, designated by the  ersatz  device  name  SSL:,
   contains all files pertinent to the daily operation of the system.  It
   is  the  same  for  every  job  on  the  system.   Only   the   system
   administrator  can  define  and  change  this  list.  However, you may
   display the system search list using the SETSRC program.

   Some of the types of  files  kept  in  the  system  search  list  file
   structures  include:   accounting files, help and documentation files,
   compilers, and system programs.

   The job search list, designated by the ersatz device name DSK:,  lists
   structures  that contain user files for an individual job.  The system
   administrator creates the default job search list for  each  new  user
   account.   You  can  display,  add,  remove,  and  rearrange  the file
   structures in your job search list using the SETSRC  program.   (Refer
   to  the  TOPS-10  User  Utilities  Manual  for  more information about
   SETSRC.) The MOUNT and DISMOUNT commands also modify your  job  search
   list.  (MOUNT and DISMOUNT are described in Chapter 2.)

   For example, in the following command line

        .MAKE TEST.LIS

   the system uses the system search list  to  find  the  program  (TECO)
   invoked  by the MAKE command.  The system uses your job search list to
   find your user file TEST.LIS.

   The format of the job search list is:

        fs/switch,fs/switch,...FENCE,fs/switch...

   Where:  fs       is the file structure name,

           FENCE    is a logical delimiter to separate the active  search
                    list from the passive structures.

           /switch  indicates how the file can be  accessed  (read  only,
                    for example).

   The job search list has two parts, the  active  search  list  and  the
   passive  search  list.   The  active  search  list is the list of file
   structures on the left side of the fence.  The system searches each of
   these file structures from left to right.





                                    1-34
                                INTRODUCTION


   The passive search list is to the right of the fence.  It is  composed
   of  the  file  structures that you removed from the active search list
   using the SETSRC program.  Therefore, when you first log in, you  have
   no structures in your passive search list.  The file structures in the
   passive search list are not searched by the the monitor, but are  used
   to compute disk usage when you log off the system.



   1.13  LIBRARIES

   The system libraries contain  compilers,  system  programs  and  other
   important files.  Wherever a device can be specified, an ersatz device
   may be specified instead.   An  ersatz  device  is  a  monitor-defined
   logical name for a directory specification.  There are several special
   ersatz devices defined for some libraries.  There are  three  separate
   PPNs,  [1,3],  [1,4],  and  [1,5],  where  system library files can be
   stored.  The standard version of a file or program is usually found on
   SSL:[1,4].

   The newest version of a file, sometimes in an experimental or untested
   state,  can sometimes be found in the [1,5] system library.  NEW: is a
   special ersatz device.  When the operating system looks for a file  on
   NEW: it will first look on SSL:[1,5].  If the file is not found there,
   however, it will next look on SSL:[1,4] for the same file.   Likewise,
   an  outdated  version of a file might be found on OLD:, which searches
   SSL:[1,3] before SSL:[1,4].

   The current system library for the job is  called  SYS:.   By  default
   SYS:  is  SSL:[1,4] or the standard system library.  You may, however,
   change the default definition of SYS: by specifying the /NEW switch to
   LOGIN  or  to the SETSRC program.  This changes the definition of SYS:
   to be NEW:.  In other words, the  system  looks  on  SSL:[1,5]  before
   looking  on  SSL:[1,4].  When you use the R command, the program comes
   from SYS:.

   LIB: is the job's library directory.  If you define LIB:, any file the
   system  cannot  find  on  DSK:  will  be searched for in the user-file
   directory (UFD) defined in LIB:.   LIB:  may  be  set  by  the  SETSRC
   program.



   1.14  DIRECTORY PATHS

   A directory path is an ordered list of directory names, starting  with
   a   user-file   directory,   that  uniquely  identifies  a  directory.
   Directory names are discussed in Section 1.9.3.

   The default directory path for your job can be  any  directory:   your
   job's  user-file  directory  (UFD), a sub-file directory (SFD) in your
   job's UFD, a UFD different from  your  job's  UFD,  or  an  SFD  in  a
   different UFD.

                                    1-35
                                INTRODUCTION


   You can change your default directory path using the  SETSRC  program.
   See  the  TOPS-10  User  Utilities  Manual  for more information about
   SETSRC.

   Sub-file directories allow you to organize your files, and  to  access
   them  in  sets.  Any directory acts as an index to a set of files.  An
   SFD is pointed to by a file in the UFD, or by a higher-level SFD.  You
   create  SFDs  with  the  CREDIR  program, and you can nest them in any
   structure,  to  the  level  that  is  predetermined  by   the   system
   administrator.  The maximum level to which SFDs can be nested is five.
   (See the TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual for more information about  the
   CREDIR  program.)  Nested directories form a directory tree structure,
   which is illustrated in the TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual.

   The following example shows  the  creation  and  use  of  an  SFD  and
   directory paths.

   Example

        Show a list of all the files in your UFD with  a  file  extension
        .TST.

        .DIRECT *.TST<RET>

        NUMB        TST   0   <055>   dd-mmm-yy       DSKC:   [27,5434]
        109         TST   5   <055>   dd-mmm-yy
        FILL        TST   1   <055>   dd-mmm-yy
        PAY3        TST   1   <055>   dd-mmm-yy
           TOTAL OF 7 BLOCKS IN 4 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434]

        Run the CREDIR program.

        .R CREDIR<RET>

        CREATE DIRECTORY: [27,5434,TEST]<RET>
                CREATED DSKC:[27,5434,TEST].SFD/PROTECTION:775

        Create a sub-file directory called  TEST.   Then  exit  from  the
        CREDIR program.

        CREATE DIRECTORY: ^C

        Request a list of all your files named TEST.

        .DIR TEST.*<RET>

        TEST        FOR   1   <055>   dd-mmm-yy       DSKC: [27,5434]
        TEST        SFD   1   <775>   dd-mmm-yy
           TOTAL OF 2 BLOCKS IN 2 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434]

        The directory shows an SFD named TEST.



                                    1-36
                                INTRODUCTION


        Use the RENAME command to transfer all files with  the  extension
        .TST from your UFD to your SFD.

        .RENAME [27,5434,TEST]=*.TST<RET>
        FILES RENAMED:
        DSKC:NUMB.TST
        DSKC:109.TST      
        DSKC:FILL.TST
        DSKC:PAY3.TST

        Show that your UFD no longer lists the files with  the  extension
        .TST.

        .DIR *.TST<RET>

        %WLDNSF NO SUCH FILES AS DSKC:*.TST[27,5434]

        Show  that  the  files  have  been   transferred   to   the   SFD
        [27,5434,TEST].

        .DIR [27,5434,TEST]<RET>

        NUMB        TST   0   <055>   dd-mmm-yy     DSKC: [27,5434,TEST]
        109         TST   5   <055>   dd-mmm-yy
        FILL        TST   1   <055>   dd-mmm-yy
        PAY3        TST   1   <055>   dd-mmm-yy
          TOTAL OF 7 BLOCKS IN 4 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434,TEST]



   1.15  USER-DEFINABLE COMMANDS

   User-definable commands are available at both the  system  programming
   level and at the monitor command level for the timesharing user.

   As a timesharing user, you use the DECLARE command to define a command
   to  run  a  specified program for your job.  This can be done during a
   timesharing session, or you can  include  the  DECLARE  command  in  a
   SWITCH.INI  file.   Any  program  can  be  invoked with a user-defined
   command.

   For example, you can  define  COMPAR  as  a  user-defined  command  to
   execute the FILCOM program as follows:

        .DECLARE  COMPAR=SYS:FILCOM.EXE<RET>

   You can also use DECLARE to display  your  job's  command  list.   The
   commands in the following list were defined previously.

        .DECLARE/LIST<RET>

        COMPAR   LOOK   EDIT   DISKSP


                                    1-37
                                INTRODUCTION


   Use the COMPAR command.  Use CTRL/T to display the  current  state  of
   your  job,  including  the  name of the program that is running.  Note
   that, although CTRL/T  is  shown  here,  it  does  not  echo  on  your
   terminal.  CTRL/Z is used to exit FILCOM and return to the monitor.

        .COMPAR<RET>
        *<CTRL/T>

        Day: 14.83 Run: 0.14 R2.5 Wr:6 FILCOM 3+4P TI PC:401570
        Input wait for TTY70:
        ^Z
        .

   For more information  on  user-definable  commands,  see  the  DECLARE
   command.



   1.16  PROGRAMMING THE LN01 LASER PRINTER

   This section describes the use of escape and control sequences,  which
   you  use  to direct printing on the LN01 laser printer.  Font loading,
   which is one application of control sequences, and font management are
   also discussed.  For a detailed discussion of programming on the LN01,
   refer to the LN01 Programmer's Reference Manual.



   1.16.1  LN01 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES

   You can use escape and control  sequences  to  specify  tab  stops  or
   margins,   change   fonts  within  a  file,  or  indicate  the  text's
   orientation, for instance.  ESCape and control sequences are typed  in
   as  part of a file you want to print on the LN01 laser printer.  Every
   time the printer encounters the characters that introduce an escape or
   control  sequence, it regards the next few characters as instructions,
   until it encounters a final character (described below).  However, you
   must  specify the /PRINT:GRAPHICS switch to the PRINT or QUEUE command
   in order for  the  sequences  to  be  interpreted.   Otherwise,  these
   characters will be printed as part of the file.

   For a complete description of all valid escape and control  sequences,
   please refer to the LN01 Programmer's Reference Manual.











                                    1-38
                                INTRODUCTION


                                    NOTE

           You  use  the  ESC  control  character  as  the  first
           character  of  all escape and control sequences.  When
           referred to here, it means that you actually press the
           ESC  key.   Since  the  ESC  key  is  interpreted as a
           function by most text editors, consult  the  reference
           manual  to find out how your editor can actually print
           the ESC  control  character.   The  examples  in  this
           section  use  a  dollar  sign ($) to show that the ESC
           control character has been pressed.



   1.16.1.1  ESCape  Sequences - An  escape  sequence  can   have   three
   sections:    an  introducer,  intermediate  characters,  and  a  final
   character.  You must include the escape sequence introducer, which  is
   the  ESC  control character, and the final character; the intermediate
   characters  are  optional.    Intermediate   characters   define   the
   interpretation of the sequence.  The final character indicates the end
   of a string, and is defined by the function requested in the sequence.

   The following sequence shows how to reset a printer to a known state:

        ESC control character
         |    Final character
         |      |
         |      |
         $      c

   The characters are spaced here for clarity only.   The  sequence  must
   appear  as  $c  to  actually  be  interpreted  by  the  LN01.  Case is
   significant when final characters are alphabetic.



   1.16.1.2  Control Sequences - The  format  for  control  sequences  is
   similar to that of escape sequences.  However, control sequences begin
   with an ESC control character and a left square bracket.  Also, one or
   more  parameters  are  allowed  before  the intermediate character(s).
   Parameters are separated by the use of a semicolon (;).

   Numeric parameters that designate length (such as specifying 5 inches)
   are  given  in  terms  of  points or decipoints.  A point is a unit of
   length equal to 1/72 of an inch.  A decipoint, then, is  a  length  of
   1/720  of an inch.  In these units, 5 inches equals 360 points or 3600
   decipoints.







                                    1-39
                                INTRODUCTION


   A sequence using length in points is below.  In this example, the left
   margin is set to 5 inches (360 points), and the right to 8 inches (576
   points).

        $[         3 6 0 ; 5 7 6        s
        |          |                    |
        |          |                    Final character
        |          |
        |          Numeric parameter
        |
        Control sequence characters

   In this example, a control sequence is used to  clear  all  horizontal
   tab stops.

        $[      3       g
        |       |       |
        |       |       Final character
        |       Numeric parameter
        Control sequence characters

   Remember, as with escape sequences, there should be  no  blank  spaces
   between the characters.  (They would appear in the file as "$[3g".)



   1.16.2  Font Management

   The LPTSPL program supports font management for the LN01 laser printer
   by  means  of  a font handler.  LPTSPL requires the LPFONT.INI file to
   automatically  process  fonts  by   name.    LPFONT.INI   resides   on
   SSL:[5,36,LN01].  LPFONT.INI maps the font names to the files in which
   the actual fonts are kept.  Font files must be kept in the same area.

   LPFONT.INI has the format:

        filenm = fontnm1<TAB>fontnm2<TAB>...<TAB>fontnmN

   Where:  filenm is the six character filename of the font.

           fontnm is an alphanumeric string from 1 to 30 characters long,
           representing  a  fontname.  Each fontname must be separated by
           at least one tab character, and the line must be ended with  a
           carriage return/line feed.










                                    1-40
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.16.3  Loading Fonts

   When you want to print a file using non-standard fonts, you  have  two
   options.   You  may  use  the  either  /FONT:fontnm or /PRINT:GRAPHICS
   switches to the PRINT or QUEUE commands.

   Use the /FONT:fontnm switch when you want an entire  file  printed  in
   the same font.  LPTSPL loads the font you request, and the LN01 prints
   your file in the font you specified.

   The /PRINT:GRAPHICS switch allows you to dynamically  load  fonts,  so
   that  you  can  print  a  file  in  several different fonts.  The Load
   Character Set (LCS) and Assign Character Set (ACS) sequences are  used
   to  prepare  the  fonts  for  printing.   If you are using fonts which
   reside on the ersatz device FNT: ([5,36,LN01]), you  do  not  need  to
   explicitly  specify  the LCS sequence; LPTSPL loads the character sets
   for you.  You will always  need  to  place  an  ACS  sequence  at  the
   beginning  of  your  file.   The ACS sequence assigns a font name to a
   number.  You refer to this number immediately before the text you want
   printed  in that font.  The text continues printing in that font until
   you specify a new font.  For example, if you assigned 13 to  represent
   a  Times  Bold font, and 14 to represent Times Italic, you could print
   text in those fonts using the following:

        $[13mPrint in Times Bold and $[14mnow switch to Italic

   In the above example, the ESC/square bracket combination  indicates  a
   control  sequence  is  about  to  follow,  the 13 and 14 represent the
   fonts, and the letter m is the final character.  For more  information
   on  font  programming  on  the  LN01,  refer  to the LN01 Programmer's
   Reference Manual.























                                    1-41
























































                                    2-1











                                 CHAPTER 2

                              SYSTEM COMMANDS



   Not all TOPS-10 commands apply to all  system  configurations.   Also,
   you  or  your  system  administrator  can  add  and  delete  commands.
   Therefore, although this chapter contains detailed information on  all
   of the TOPS-10 commands, not all of them may be available to you.



   2.1  FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS

   In Section 2.1, the  TOPS-10  commands  are  divided  into  functional
   groups.  Each section contains:

         o  A discussion of a functional group.

         o  A list of the commands that make up the functional group.

   Section 2.2 contains a detailed  description  of  each  command.   The
   commands are arranged in alphabetical order.

   Appendix A of this manual contains a table that lists the commands  by
   functional description, including a short description of each command.
   This table is included for reference, so that you can find  a  command
   by  its  function.   Please  read  the  description of each command in
   Section 2.2 before using the command.















                                    2-1
























































                                    2-1











                                 CHAPTER 2

                              SYSTEM COMMANDS



   Not all TOPS-10 commands apply to all  system  configurations.   Also,
   you  or  your  system  administrator  can  add  and  delete  commands.
   Therefore, although this chapter contains detailed information on  all
   of the TOPS-10 commands, not all of them may be available to you.



   2.0.1  Job-Control Commands

   Job-control commands control the state of your job.  You can use  them
   to  create,  detach, and terminate your job.  Also, you can change the
   accounting profile and privilege status of your job.  The job  control
   commands are:

        ATTACH     CONTEXT         DECLARE
        DETACH     DISABLE         ENABLE
        KJOB       LOGIN           PASSWORD
        POP        PUSH            REATTACH
        SESSION





   2.0.2  Information Commands

   The information commands  allow  you  to  gain  information  from  the
   monitor.  You can obtain information about your job, your program, the
   operating system, or your terminal characteristics.   The  information
   commands are:

        ACCOUNT    ALLOCATE        CONTEXT         CORE
        CPUNCH     DAYTIME         DIRECTORY       DSK
        HELP       INITIA          MOUNT           NETWORK
        NODE       PJOB            PLOT            PRINT
        PUNCH      QUEUE           RESOURCES       SCHEDULE
        SET WATCH  SHOW ALLOCATION SHOW QUEUES     SUBMIT


                                    2-1
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS


        SYSTAT     TPUNCH          USESTAT         VERSION
        WHERE





   2.0.3  Terminal-Control Commands

   Terminal-control commands allow you to set the characteristics of your
   terminal,  and  to  see  the  characteristics  that  are  set for your
   terminal.  The terminal-control commands are:

        INITIA     SET TERMINAL
        SET TTY    TERMINAL
        TTY



   2.0.4  Terminal-Communication Commands

   You can use the operating system to communicate with a user at another
   terminal.  The commands that allow you to do this are:

        MAIL       PLEASE          SEND





   2.0.5  File-Handling Commands

   You can use the operating system to create, change, and  store  files.
   You  can  create  and  change  directories.   You  can output files to
   various devices.  The file-handling commands are:

        CLOSE      COPY                    CPUNCH
        DELETE     DIRECTORY               EOF
        FILE       LIST                    MAKE
        PLOT       PRESERVE                PRINT
        PROTECT    PUNCH                   QUEUE
        RENAME     SET DEFAULT PROTECTION  SUBMIT
        TECO       TPUNCH                  TYPE
        ZERO





   2.0.6  Device-Handling Commands

   You can use the operating system to control peripheral  devices.   The


                                    2-2
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS


   device-handling commands are:

        ALLOCATE          ASSIGN         BACKSPACE
        CANCEL            CLOSE          CPUNCH
        DEALLOCATE        DEASSIGN       DISMOUNT
        EOF               FINISH         LABEL
        LIST              LOCATE         MOUNT
        PLOT              PRINT          PUNCH
        QUEUE             REASSIGN       REWIND 
        SET BLOCKSIZE     SET CDR        SET DEFER
        SET DENSITY       SET FORMAT     SET RETRY
        SET SPOOL         SKIP           TPUNCH
        UNLOAD





   2.0.7  Program-Preparation Commands

   The program-preparation commands help you to write a  program,  change
   it,  debug  it,  and obtain information about it.  These commands help
   you   to   run   programs   more   easily   and   effectively.     The
   program-preparation commands are:

        CLOSE        COMPILE                CREF
        DDT          DEBUG                  DEPOSIT 
        EOF          EXAMINE                FUDGE
        LOAD         MAKE                   MERGE
        SET BREAK    SET DDT BREAKPOINT     TECO





   2.0.8  Program-Control Commands

   Program-control commands help you to control your program while it  is
   running  and  after it has been run.  These commands are used to start
   and stop execution, save the core image, manipulate the core area, and
   to  facilitate  the  execution  of  your program.  The program-control
   commands are:

        CCONTINUE              CONTEXT           CONTINUE
        CORE                   CSTART            EXECUTE
        GET                    HALT (CTRL/C)     JCONTINUE
        LOAD                   MERGE             POP 
        PUSH                   R                 REENTER
        RUN                    SAVE              SSAVE
        SET BREAK              SET CPU           SET DEFAULT BIGBUF
        SET DEFAULT BUFFERS    SET DSKFUL        SET DSKPRI
        SET HPQ                SET PHYSICAL      SET TIME


                                    2-3
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS


        SET VIRTUAL            START





   2.0.9  Network Commands

   Network commands help you to use a data network  system.   They  allow
   you  to use the resources on another system, and get information about
   the network configuration.  The network commands are:

        ASSIGN         LOCATE
        NETWORK        NODE
        SET HOST       WHERE





   2.0.10  MIC Commands

   MIC (Monitor Interpreted Commands) allows you to create a new  command
   by  writing  any  desired  sequence  of  monitor and MIC commands in a
   command file.  Some MIC commands are briefly described here,  and  are
   more fully described in the file MICV2.DOC.

        DO           Executes a MIC command file.
         or
        @

        BACKTO       Specifies  a  label  at  which  MIC processing is to
        GOTO         resume within the command file.

        COJOB        Creates a COJOB.

        ERROR/       Specifies  an  error  condition   character.
        NOERROR

        IF           Conditionally processes a monitor command.

        LET          Changes the values of user parameters.

        MIC          Passes a subcommand to MIC.

        OPERATOR/    Introduces a line requiring user attention.
        NOOPERATOR

        SILENCE/     Suppresses/resumes output to the terminal.
        REVIVE

        WHENEVER/    Changes  the  default  action  wherever a particular


                                    2-4
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS


        ON           event occurs.



   2.1  COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS

                              ACCOUNT Command



   Function

        If the monitor is running usage  file  accounting  software,  the
        ACCOUNT  command  prints the account you are logged in under (set
        by a LOGIN or SESSION command) on your terminal.  If you  do  not
        have an account, the monitor issues only a carriage-return.

   Format

        ACCOUNT

        After you press RETURN, the monitor prints the  account  you  are
        logged in under.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.

        Requires LOGIN.

   Examples

        1.  This example indicates  that  you  do  not  have  an  account
            string.

            .ACCOUNT<RET>

            .

        2.  The ACCOUNT command prints the string TS547 as  the  name  of
            your account.

            .ACCOUNT <RET>

            TS547

            .







                                    2-5
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              ALLOCATE Command


                             ALLOCATE Command



   Function

        The ALLOCATE command informs the system  that  you  will  need  a
        resource.  A resource is a tape or disk unit.  With ALLOCATE, you
        can reserve a resource from the system and assign a logical  name
        to the resource you will use.

        An  allocated  resource  can  contain  all   the   specifications
        necessary  when  the  resource is mounted.  The switches that you
        specify with the ALLOCATE command will be  retained  and  applied
        when you use the MOUNT command to mount the same resource.

        The  ALLOCATE  command  allocates  a  resource,  and   the   SHOW
        ALLOCATION  display  will  show such a resource as both allocated
        and mounted.  If you  use  the  ALLOCATE  command  to  explicitly
        allocate  a resource, you will be granted extended ownership over
        the  resource.   For  example,  if  a  resource  that  you   have
        explicitly  allocated  and mounted goes off-line unexpectedly (as
        when the operator dismounts it),  your  mount  request  for  that
        resource will be automatically requeued, and the resource will be
        mounted for your job when it comes on line.

   Format

        ALLOCATE resource:log-name/switch/switch...

        Where:    resource is the name of the  resource  that  is  to  be
                  allocated.   The  colon  (:)  in  the  resource name is
                  optional.  The resource name is one of the following:

                   o  A disk structure or volume set name, such as DSKB:.

                   o  A tape volume set name and volume identifiers, such
                      as PAY-WK(PM34,PM35) where PAY-WK is the volume set
                      name, and (PM34,PM35) is a list of the  volumes  in
                      the volume set.

                   o  A tape volume identifier of  a  single-tape  volume
                      set.

                   o  The  logical  name  previously  associated  with  a
                      resource.

                   o  A physical device name.





                                    2-6
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              ALLOCATE Command


                  Note that a tape allocation request requires  a  volume
                  identification.   If  you do not include the volume set
                  name followed by volume identifiers,  you  must  supply
                  the /VOLID switch.

                  log-name is the logical name  you  can  assign  to  the
                  resource that you will use.  The logical name can be up
                  to 6 alphanumeric characters.  A tape volume  set  must
                  always  have  a  logical name.  If you do not specify a
                  logical name for a tape volume set, the system defaults
                  to  the first six characters of the volume set name, or
                  up to  the  first  non-alphanumeric  character  of  the
                  volume  set name.  A disk volume set does not require a
                  logical-name.

                  To allocate more than  one  volume  set,  separate  the
                  volume set identifications with commas.

                  /switches  are  always  preceded  by  a  slash.    Some
                  switches can be used for any kind of volume set; others
                  are restricted to either tape or disk volume sets only.

                                           NOTE

                      The logical name and switches that you  specify
                      in the ALLOCATE command string are saved by the
                      system, and are  applied  when  you  MOUNT  the
                      volume set.

        You can obtain a list of the resources  that  are  allocated  and
        mounted  for  your  job  by  typing ALLOCATE with no arguments or
        switches.  The output is the same as the  output  from  the  SHOW
        ALLOCATION command.

        The following is  a  list  of  the  switches  you  can  use  with
        ALLOCATE.   The  center  column lists the kind of resource(s) the
        switch applies to.

            Switch      Device                  Function

        /ACTIVE         Disk     Requests that the volume set  be  placed
                                 in  your  job's  active search list when
                                 the structure is mounted.   (See  SETSRC
                                 in  the  TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual).
                                 The structure will become  part  of  the
                                 list  that the system automatically uses
                                 to search  for  a  file.   This  is  the
                                 default.  Complement to /PASSIVE.

        /CHECK          Tape     Prints  a list  of  all  the  allocation
                        Disk     requests  for  your   job.    (Same   as
                                 ALLOCATE with no arguments or switches.)

                                    2-7
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              ALLOCATE Command


        /CREATE         Disk     Allows  files  to  be  created  on  this
                                 structure.     This    switch   is   the
                                 complement to /NOCREATE and implies  the
                                 /ACTIVE switch.

        /DENSITY:n-BPI  Tape     Specifies    the    recording    density
                                 (bits-per-inch)  of the volume set.  The
                                 density (n)  can  be:   200,  556,  800,
                                 1600,  or 6250.  The -BPI portion of the
                                 value is optional.

        /DISK           Disk     Identifies the  volume  set  as  a  disk
                                 volume set.

        /EXCLUSIVE      Disk     Ensures that  you  will  have  exclusive
                                 access  to the resource.  No other users
                                 will be allowed to access the  resource.
                                 You must have the same project number as
                                 the owner of the volume set.

        /HELP           Tape     Prints  a  brief   description   of  the
                        Disk     command.

        /LABEL-TYPE:arg Tape     Specifies  the kind of  label processing
                                 to  be  used  and  indicates  the  label
                                 status of the tape.  The  arguments  and
                                 their meanings are:

                                 ANSI      The   label    is    formatted
                                           according to ANSI standards.

                                 BLP       The tape  may or  may not have
                                 BYPASS    labels, but it is  treated  as
                                           if  it  were  unlabeled.  Only
                                           privileged users can use  this
                                           switch.

                                 EBCDIC    The  label   is   formatted in
                                 IBM       EBCDIC.

                                 USER-EOT  The   tape   does   not   have
                                           standard labels.  However, you
                                           will be informed at the end of
                                           tape.   Volume  switching (for
                                           multivolume tape volume  sets)
                                           will    not    be    performed
                                           automatically.  Therefore, the
                                           user  program  is  responsible
                                           for mounting subsequent tapes.
                                           This  is  useful  for programs
                                           that  create  unique   labels,
                                           such as BACKUP.

                                    2-8
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              ALLOCATE Command


                                 UNLABELED The tape is not labeled.  When
                                 NONE      a new tape is mounted from the
                                 NOLABELS  same volume set, you will  not
                                           be notified.  The switching of
                                           tapes in the volume  set  will
                                           be  handled  automatically  by
                                           the system.  You will  not  be
                                           informed  when the end of tape
                                           is reached.

        /NEW-VOLUME-SET Tape     Specifies that a new volume set is going
                                 to be created.  The operator will choose
                                 tapes  for  your  job  from  a  pool  of
                                 available  tapes.   This  switch implies
                                 /WRITE-ENABLE.

        /NOCREATE       Disk     Prevents the creation of files  on  this
                                 volume   set,  unless  you  specify  the
                                 volume set  when  you  write  the  file.
                                 This switch is the complement to /CREATE
                                 and it implies /ACTIVE.

        /NONOTIFY       Tape     Does not inform you when the resource is
                        Disk     mounted or dismounted.

        /NOTIFY         Tape     Sets  the  system to inform you when the
                        Disk     resource is mounted or dismounted.   The
                                 system  sends a message to your terminal
                                 when any of the following occurs:

                                  o  The resource is physically mounted.

                                  o  The resource is  dismounted  by  the
                                     operator  without  a request by your
                                     job.

                                  o  Another volume in a tape volume  set
                                     is mounted.

                                  o  The  disk  structure  is  locked  or
                                     unlocked by the operator.

        /PASSIVE        Disk     Requests that the structure be placed in
                                 your  job's passive search list.  (Refer
                                 to SETSRC program.) The system will  not
                                 search for files in the structure unless
                                 you specify the structure  name  in  the
                                 file  specification.  This switch is the
                                 complement to /ACTIVE.

        /QUOTA          Disk     Removed.


                                    2-9
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              ALLOCATE Command


        /READ-ONLY      Tape     Specifies that you will not write on the
                        Disk     volume set.  Tape volume  sets  will  be
                                 checked  as  they are mounted, to ensure
                                 that they are write-locked.  This is the
                                 default for tape volume sets.

                                 On disk volume sets,  the  monitor  will
                                 not update access dates.  If you specify
                                 both  /EXCLUSIVE  and  /READ-ONLY,   the
                                 operator may write-lock the structure.

        /REMARK:"text"  Tape     Allows  you to  send  a message  to  the
                        Disk     operator identifying the  volume  to  be
                                 mounted.   The argument (text) can be up
                                 to 50 characters  long.   Use  quotation
                                 marks  around  the  text  if it contains
                                 spaces or punctuation marks.

        /SCRATCH        Tape     Instructs  the  operator  to   mount   a
                                 scratch tape.  By implication, a scratch
                                 tape will be returned  to  the  system's
                                 pool  of  available tapes, after you are
                                 finished with it.  This  switch  implies
                                 /WRITE-ENABLE.

        /SHARABLE       Disk     Allows  other  users   to   access   the
                                 resource.  This is the default function.
                                 This  switch  is   the   complement   to
                                 /EXCLUSIVE.

        /TAPE           Tape     Specifies that the volume set is a  tape
                                 volume  set.   This  switch  is required
                                 when the volume set has the same name as
                                 a catalogued disk volume set.

        /TRACKS:n       Tape     Specifies the number of  tracks  on  the
                                 tape.  The value n can be 7 or 9.

        /VOLID:volid    Tape     Identifies the volumes in a tape  volume
                                 set.   This  switch  can be used only if
                                 the   volid-list   was   not   specified
                                 previously.    If   the  volume  set  is
                                 comprised of more than one  volume,  the
                                 volids  should  be  separated by commas,
                                 and the volid-list should be enclosed in
                                 parentheses.

        /WRITE-ENABLE   Tape     Ensures   that  you  can  write  on  the
                        Disk     volume set.  For tape, the system checks
                                 each  volume as it is mounted to be sure
                                 that it is write-enabled.  This  is  the
                                 default for disk volume sets.

                                    2-10
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              ALLOCATE Command


   Associated Commands

        MOUNT            Makes a device available to you.

        DISMOUNT         Removes the specified volume set from your job's
                         search  list.   Dismounts  the volume set if you
                         have exclusive access to it.

        DEALLOCATE       Removes the  specified  resources(s)  from  your
                         job's list of allocated resources.

        SHOW ALLOCATION  Prints  a  list  of  the  resources   that   are
                         allocated and mounted for your job.

        SHOW QUEUE       Prints a list of system queues.

        CANCEL           Cancels a mount or queue request.

   Characteristics

        Runs the QUEUE program.

        Destroys your core image.

        Requires LOGIN.

   Example

        The following example shows the use of the ALLOCATE,  DEALLOCATE,
        MOUNT, DISMOUNT, and SHOW ALLOCATION commands.  The resources are
        reserved for a multivolume tape  volume  set  with  the  ALLOCATE
        command.  The name of the volume set is TAPE-SET, and it contains
        three volumes.  The logical name TS is assigned to the tape  set.
        The tape is write enabled, and it does not have standard labels.

        .ALLOCATE TAPE-SET(VOL1,VOL2,VOL3):TS/WRITE-ENABLE/LABEL:NONE<RET>
        [ALLOCATE REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #672]

        A file structure named DSKR: is mounted for the job:

        .MOUNT DSKR:<RET>
        [MOUNT REQUEST DSKR QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
        [STRUCTURE DSKR MOUNTED]










                                    2-11
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              ALLOCATE Command


        The job's resources are shown using the SHOW ALLOCATION command:

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
           VOLUME SET             RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        ----------------      -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   9 TK 800/1600      MAGTAPE UNIT  1    0
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     2    2
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKR                  DSKR               STRUCTURE     1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0

        The tape set is mounted, and the resources are again displayed:

        .MOUNT TS<RET>
        [MOUNT REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
        [MAGTAPE TS MOUNTED]

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
           VOLUME SET             RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        ----------------      -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   9TK 800/1600       MAGTAPE UNIT  1    1
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     2    2
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKR                  DSKR               STRUCTURE     1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0

        After work  is  finished  by  accessing  the  tape  set  and  the
        structure,  the  structure  is dismounted.  Because the structure
        was not explicitly allocated, it is automatically deallocated:

        .DISMOUNT DSKR<RET>
        [STRUCTURE DSKR DISMOUNTED]

        The tape volume set is dismounted:

        .DISMOUNT TS<RET>
        [VOLUME SET TS DISMOUNTED]




                                    2-12
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              ALLOCATE Command


        The job's resources are displayed:

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
           VOLUME SET             RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        ----------------      -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   9 TK 800/1600      MAGTAPE UNIT  1    0
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     1    1
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0

        At this point, the tape set can again be mounted, or  it  can  be
        deallocated.  The tape set is dismounted:

        .DEALLOCATE TS<RET>
        [VOLUME SET TS HAS BEEN DEALLOCATED]

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
           VOLUME SET             RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        ----------------      -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     1    1
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1


        .



















                                    2-13
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               ASSIGN Command


                              ASSIGN Command




   Function

        The ASSIGN command allocates an input/output device to  your  job
        until  you  log  out  or  until  you issue a REASSIGN, FINISH, or
        DEASSIGN command.  (Device names are discussed in Section 1.9.1.)
        When  an  assignment  is  performed,  the system prints a message
        indicating the name of the physical device assigned to your job.

        You can ASSIGN any unrestricted device to your job.

   Format

        ASSIGN node-id_device-name: logical-name:

        Where:    node-id is an identifier of the node  from  which  the
                  device  is  to  be  assigned.   This  identifier can be
                  either a node name or a node number.   The  node-id  is
                  optional.   If  you omit the node-id, the node to which
                  your terminal is connected is assumed.

                  The node-id and the device name must be separated by an
                  underscore (_).

                  device-name:  is any physical device name or previously
                  assigned  logical name.  (Device names are discussed in
                  Section 1.9.1.)

                  logical-name is a logical name that you request  to  be
                  assigned to the physical device.  Separate the physical
                  device name from the logical name with a  space.   This
                  argument   is  optional.   Subsequent  ASSIGN  commands
                  replace the old logical name with the new one.  Logical
                  names are disassociated from the devices when you issue
                  the DEASSIGN command.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your job at monitor level.

        Does not destroy your core image.








                                    2-14
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               ASSIGN Command


   Associated Messages

        If the assignment is successful, the system prints a  message  in
        the following format:

        device-name: ASSIGNED

        where device-name is the physical device name .  If you specify a
        restricted device, the monitor prints the following message:

        ?DEVICE NOT ASSIGNABLE

        You can access restricted devices using the MOUNT  command.   The
        following  message  occurs when the device is assigned to another
        job:

        ?Already assigned to job n

        Where:    n is the number of the  job  to  which  the  device  is
                  assigned.

   Examples

        1.  Assign line-printer number 2.

            .ASSIGN LPT2:<RET>

            LPT262 ASSIGNED

            .

        2.  Assign the logical name SYS to DSKB.

            .ASSIGN DSKB: SYS:<RET>

            DSKB:  ASSIGNED
            .

        3.  Assign the logical name TAPE to DTA5.

            .ASSIGN DTA5: TAPE<RET>

            DTA5:  ASSIGNED
            .

        4.  Assign a card reader from node COMET to your job.

            .ASSIGN COMET_CDR:<RET>

            CDR701:  ASSIGNED

            .

                                    2-15
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               ATTACH Command


                              ATTACH Command



   Function

        The ATTACH command detaches your current job (if you  are  logged
        in) and connects your terminal to a detached job.

        To prevent unauthorized access  to  detached  jobs,  the  monitor
        temporarily   creates   a   new   job   when   you   specify  the
        project-programmer number  argument.   This  temporary  job  runs
        LOGIN,  which  asks  for  your  password.   If  the temporary job
        exceeds the system's maximum job capacity, you may be  unable  to
        attach  to  the  specified  job.   In  this  case, your first job
        remains detached.  You will be unable to ATTACH to any job  until
        there is room in the system.

   Formats

        ATTACH
        ATTACH job [ppn]/switch
        ATTACH job/switch
        ATTACH [ppn]/switch
        ATTACH user/switch

        Where:    job is the job-number of the job to which your terminal
                  is to be attached.

                  [ppn] is the project-programmer number of  the  desired
                  job.  You must enclose the PPN in square brackets ([]).
                  If you are trying to attach from one  job  to  another,
                  and   both   have  the  same  PPN,  you  can  omit  the
                  project-programmer number argument.

                  user is the user-name associated with the desired job.

                  /switch is one of the following options:

                  /HELP:keyword  Prints the HELP  text.   Valid  keywords
                                 are  ARGUMENTS, SWITCHES, and TEXT.  The
                                 ARGUMENTS keyword  displays  a  list  of
                                 valid   switches   and  arguments.   The
                                 SWITCHES keyword displays only a list of
                                 switches  without  detailed information.
                                 The TEXT keyword displays the full  HELP
                                 text.   TEXT  is  the  default  keyword.
                                 /HELP may be abbreviated to /H.

                  /MAILCHECK:    If  YES,  checks  for  the  existence of
                   YES or NO     new mail.


                                    2-16
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               ATTACH Command


                  /MONITOR       Leaves  your terminal  at monitor level.

                  /SETTTY:       If YES,  sets   terminal  parameters  as
                   YES or NO     specified with the /TERMINAL switch.

                  /TERMINAL:key  Defines  the  terminal  characteristics.
                                 key  is  a  keyword.   The  keywords for
                                 /TERMINAL  are   described   after   the
                                 switches.

                  /USER          Leaves your terminal at user level.

        /Terminal Keywords

        The /TERMINAL switch  takes  a  list  of  parameters  to  specify
        terminal  attributes.   You can include multiple keywords for the
        /TERMINAL  switch,  in  which  case  you  must  enclose  them  in
        parentheses and separate them with commas.  Valid keywords are:

             ALTMODE:yes-no    Do [not] convert  ASCII  175  and  176  to
                               ESCAPE (Altmode (ASCII 33)).

             BLANKS:yes-no     Do [not] print blank lines.

             CRLF:yes-no       Do [not] give a free CRLF at right margin.

             DEFER:yes-no      Do [not] set deferred echo mode.

             DISPLAY:yes-no    Terminal is [not] a display terminal.

             ECHO:yes-no       Do [not] set terminal echo.

             EIGHTBIT:yes-no   Do [not] set 8-bit mode.

             ESCAPE:chr        Set <ESCAPE> translation character to chr.

             FILL:dnum         Set filler class to dnum (0<=dnum<=3).

             FORM:yes-no       Terminal does  [not]  have  hardware  form
                               feeds.

             GAG:yes-no        Do [not]  accept  SEND  messages  at  user
                               level.

             LC:yes-no         Terminal   does   [not]   have   lowercase
                               characters.

             LENGTH:dnum       Set the terminal screen length to dnum.

             LOCALCOPY:yes-no  Do [not] set terminal to local copy.



                                    2-17
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               ATTACH Command


             NOFILL            Do not set terminal fill (same as FILL:0).

             QUOTE:yes-no      Do  [not]   enable   control-V   character
                               quoting.

             RTCOMP:yes-no     Do [not] disable special effects of R  and
                               T.

             RCVSPEED:n        Set terminal receive speed to n baud.

             SBELL:yes-no      Do [not] ring  the  bell  when  output  is
                               stopped due to exceeding STOP/SSTOP value.

             SPEED:dnum        Set receive and  transmit  speed  to  dnum
                               baud.

             STOP:dnum         Set the terminal STOP counter to dnum.

             SSTOP:dnum        Set the terminal SSTOP counter to dnum.

             TABS:yes-no       Terminal does [not] have hardware tabs.

             TAPE:yes-no       Do [not] allow  XON  to  start  paper-tape
                               reader.

             TYPE:xxx          Set terminal type to xxx.

             UNPAUSE:chr       Set the unpause character to chr.

             UC:yes-no         Terminal   does   [not]   have   uppercase
                               characters only.

             WIDTH:dnum        Set carriage width to dnum columns.

             XONXOFF:yes-no    Do [not] allow S/Q to pause output.

             XMTSPEED:dnum     Set terminal transmit speed to dnum baud.

             Switches of the form /*xxxxxx are unique to  one  character.
             The  asterisk is NOT part of the switch name.  The following
             is a list of possible arguments which  may  be  accepted  by
             some switches and keywords:

             args       A list of keywords and optional arguments.

             atxt       A possibly quoted  string  of  ASCII  characters.
                        You  must  include  quotation marks if the string
                        contains any characters other than  alphanumerics
                        or a dash.




                                    2-18
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               ATTACH Command


             chr        A single, possibly quoted character or  an  octal
                        constant.

             cnum       Core  argument:   decimal  number   followed   by
                        optional K or P.

             dnum       Decimal number followed by optional K, M, or G.

             filespec   A standard TOPS-10 file designator  of  the  form
                        dev:file.ext[path].

             onum       Octal number followed by optional K, M, or G.

             pathspec   A standard TOPS-10 path designator of the form:
                        [project#,programmer#,sfd1,sfd2,...].

             prefix     A prefix is the  last  three  characters  of  the
                        "[LGNxxx ...]" or "%LGNxxx ..." messages.

             stxt       A possibly quoted string  of  SIXBIT  characters.
                        You  must  include  quotation marks if the string
                        contains any characters other than  alphanumerics
                        or a dash.

             yes-no     Switch and keyword arguments may  either  be  NO,
                        YES,  OFF (no), ON (yes), 0 (no), or 1 (yes).  In
                        addition, you can precede the switch  or  keyword
                        name  with  NO  to  negate  its  action  (such as
                        /NOxxxxxx instead of /xxxxxx:NO).

   Characteristics

        Does not destroy the core image of either job.

        Does not require that you be logged in.

   Restrictions

        Remote users cannot attach to jobs with a project number of 1.

        Batch programs cannot use this command.












                                    2-19
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               ATTACH Command


   Examples

        1.  Look at jobs 1 and 5 with SYSTAT.

            .SYSTAT 1 5<RET>

            1    27,5434    DET    QUOLST  36+62     to    6 #
            #MEANS NON-SYSTEM HI-SEG
            5    27,5434    TTY31  SYSTAT  19+SPY    RN    25 $
            $ MEANS EXECUTE ONLY

            Output shows that job 1 is detached, and job 5 is attached to
            terminal number 31.

            You attach to job 1 from job 5.

            .ATTACH 1<RET>
            FROM JOB 5

            The  two  jobs  have  the  same  project-programmer   number;
            therefore,  neither  the  project-programmer  number  nor the
            password is required.

            Check jobs 1 and 5 again.

            .SYSTAT 1 5<RET>

            1    27,5434    TTY31  SYSTAT    19+SPY  RN   25 $
            $ MEANS EXECUTE ONLY
            5    27,5434    DET    SYSTAT    24+SPY ^C    23 $
            $ MEANS EXECUTE ONLY

            Job 1 is now attached to TTY31, and job 5 is detached.

        2.  You log in to the system.  You  are  given  job  7;  terminal
            number 116 is attached to your job (7).

            .LOGIN 27,235<RET>

            JOB 7 R5743A SYS #40/2 TTY116
            PASSWORD:   <RET>
            hh:mm    dd-mmm-yyyy    TUE

            You attach to an existing detached job (35) with a  different
            PPN.   This automatically detaches your current job (7).  You
            enter the correct password at the prompt and  LOGIN  attaches
            your terminal to job 35.

            .ATTACH 35<RET>
            PASSWORD:<RET>
            FROM JOB 7


                                    2-20
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               ATTACH Command


            You attach to job 7 again.   You  do  not  need  to  enter  a
            password because job 7 has your original PPN.

            .ATTACH 7<RET>
            FROM JOB 35

            You attach to job 35 again, but you  mis-type  the  password.
            LOGIN does not give you a second chance.

            .ATTACH 35<RET>
            PASSWORD:<RET>
            ?CAN'T ATTACH TO JOB









































                                    2-21
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             BACKSPACE Command


                             BACKSPACE Command



   Function

        The BACKSPACE command spaces a magnetic tape backward a specified
        number  of  files  or  physical  records.   This command runs the
        COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running PIP.

   Formats

        BACKSPACE MTAn:  x FILES

        This command skips backward x files.


        BACKSPACE MTAn:  x RECORDS

        This command skips backward x records.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Runs the PIP program.

        Destroys your core image.

   Examples

        1.  Backspace 7 records on the tape on MTA2.

            .BACKSPACE MTA2: 7 RECORDS<RET>

            .

        2.  Backspace 11 files on the tape on MTA3.

            .BACKSPACE MTA3: 11 FILES<RET>

            .











                                    2-22
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CANCEL Command


                              CANCEL Command



   Function

        The  CANCEL  command  deletes  the  specified  request  from  the
        specified  queue.   You  can  delete  the  request  before  it is
        started, or you can terminate  the  request  after  it  has  been
        started.

   Format

        CANCEL request-type request-id/switch

        Where:    request-type is any of the following:

                       BATCH-REQUEST
                       CARD-PUNCH-REQUEST
                       MOUNT-REQUEST
                       PAPER-TAPE-REQUEST
                       PLOTTER-REQUEST
                       PRINTER-REQUEST

                  The request-type  argument  can  be  abbreviated  to  a
                  unique set of characters.

                  request-id is a request identification.   This  can  be
                  any one of the following:

                   o  The request-id number.  The  request-id  number  is
                      assigned  to the request when it is made, and it is
                      displayed with the SHOW QUEUES command.

                   o  The job name of the request.

                   o  A wildcard construction representing the job  names
                      of several requests.  The standard wildcards (* and
                      ?) are valid, as well as the percent  sign  (%)  to
                      represent   a   single  character.   Wildcards  are
                      described in Section 1.11.  Note, however, that the
                      asterisk  (*)  wildcard  cannot  be used to specify
                      mount requests.










                                    2-23
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CANCEL Command


        There are two switches that can be used  to  specify  the  CANCEL
        command:

           Switch                            Function

        /HELP             Prints information on your terminal  about  the
                          CANCEL  command.   When you use this switch, no
                          requests are cancelled.

        /JOBNAME:name     Specifies the name of the job.  This switch  is
                          used  to  specify  the name of the job when the
                          request-id is the same as the name  of  another
                          job.

   Associated Messages

        The following  message  is  printed  if  the  request  cannot  be
        cancelled:

        NO JOBS CANCELED

        This may be the result of trying to cancel a request  over  which
        you have no authority.

   Characteristics

        Runs the QUEUE program.

        Destroys your core image.

   Example

        The following example illustrates the use of the  CANCEL,  MOUNT,
        and SHOW QUEUES commands.

        A mount request is made for the structure GAL0:

        .MOUNT GAL0:/NOWAIT<RET>

        The mount queue is displayed with the SHOW QUEUES command:

        .SHOW QUEUES MOUNT<RET>

        MOUNT QUEUE:
        VOLUME  STATUS  TYPE   WRITE   REQ#  JOB#            USER
        ------ -------  ----  -------  ----  ----  -----------------------
        BLKA   WAITING  DISK  ENABLE    650    35  MARTIN,C  [30,5621]
        GAL0   WAITING  DISK  LOCKED    672    59  MARY MAROTTA  [27,5434]
        THERE ARE 2 REQUESTS IN THE QUEUE




                                    2-24
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CANCEL Command


        To cancel the mount request, the user issues the CANCEL command:

        .CANCEL MOUNT GAL0<RET>
        [MOUNT REQUEST FOR GAL0 CANCELED]

        Again, the mount queue is displayed:

        .SHOW QUEUES MOUNT<RET>

        MOUNT QUEUE:
        VOLUME  STATUS  TYPE   WRITE   REQ#  JOB#            USER
        ------ -------  ----  -------  ----  ----  -----------------------
        BLKA   WAITING  DISK  ENABLED   650    35  MARTIN,C  [30,5621]
        THERE IS 1 REQUEST IN THE QUEUE

        .            





































                                    2-25
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             CCONTINUE Command


                             CCONTINUE Command



   Function

        The CCONTINUE command  starts  program  execution,  leaving  your
        terminal at monitor level.

   Format

        CCONTINUE

        To use:

        1.  Begin running a program.

        2.  Exit from user mode by typing two CTRL/Cs.

        3.  Type CCONTINUE to  allow  the  previously  begun  program  to
            continue  running from the point at which you interrupted it.
            Your terminal is left at monitor level.

        4.  You can now use commands that do not require core, or you can
            detach  from  your  job  and  create  a  new job to run other
            programs.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Requires core.

   Associated Commands

        CONTINUE - Continues the operation of your program, bringing your
        terminal back to user level.

        START - Starts  the  program  from  the  beginning  or  from  the
        specified address, leaving your terminal at user level.

        CSTART - Starts the program from the specified  address  or  from
        the beginning, but leaves your terminal at monitor level.

                                      NOTE

                If  your  program  requires  terminal  I/O,   the
                CCONTINUE  command allows the program to run only
                to  that  point.   The  program  then  waits  for
                terminal I/O, before it continues executing.  Use
                the CONTINUE command to re-enter user  level  and


                                    2-26
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             CCONTINUE Command


                accept or input the required I/O.




















































                                    2-27
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             CCONTINUE Command


   Example

        This is a program that finds all the numbers  up  to  10,000  and
        writes them out to disk.

        .TYPE NUMBER.FOR<RET>

                N = 0
        100     N = N + 1
                IF (N .EQ. 10000) GO TO 300
                WRITE (22, 201) N
                GO TO 100
        201     FORMAT (1X, I14,' IS BETWEEN 1 AND 10000')
        300     STOP 'DONE'
                END

        Execute the program.

        .EXECUTE  NUMBER.FOR<RET>
        FORTRAN: NUMBER
        NUMBER
        LINK:   LOADING
        [LNKXCT NUMBER EXECUTION]
        ^C
        ^C

        Type two CTRL/C's to halt the program.

        Continue the program, leaving your terminal at monitor level.

        .CCONTINUE<RET>

        Type CTRL/T for  job  status.   CTRL/T  does  not  echo  on  your
        terminal.

        DAY:  8.85 RUN:  2.05 RD:0 WR:0 NUMBER 4+15P RN* PC:000175

        The status message RN* indicates the program NUMBER is running.

        Detach from the job to do work on another job.

        .DETACH<RET>

        FROM JOB 19

                .

                .

                .



                                    2-28
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             CCONTINUE Command


        Later, attach to your original job.

        .ATTACH 19 [27,5434]<RET>

        PASSWORD:<RET>

        Type CONTINUE to re-enter user level.

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        System message (see NOTE).

        ?PLEASE TYPE ^C FIRST

        Type CTRL/C and CONTINUE, to enter user level.

        .^C

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        Program  message  indicates  execution  is  finished.   The  file
        containing  data  from  this  program  is named FOR22.DAT, and is
        stored in your default disk area.

        DONE

        END OF EXECUTION

        CPU TIME:4.60  ELAPSED TIME:12:12.83

        EXIT

        .

                                    NOTE

           It is necessary to type CTRL/C to re-enter user level,
           because  the  program is running.  The program must be
           interrupted so that your terminal can access it.














                                    2-29
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CLOSE Command


                               CLOSE Command



   Function

        The CLOSE command terminates any input  or  output  currently  in
        progress on the specified device.

        Although most programs close files when they finish  executing  a
        command  string, the CLOSE command is provided for a program that
        does not terminate or a program that  is  being  debugged.   This
        command  causes all files which are open for output to be closed.
        If a CLOSE is not done, the next RESET by a command (R, RUN, GET)
        or program deletes any partially written disk files.

   Format

        CLOSE dev:

        Where:    dev:  is the logical or physical name of the device  on
                  which I/O is to be terminated.  dev:  cannot refer to a
                  disk device.  This argument is optional.

                  If dev:  is omitted, I/O is terminated on all  devices,
                  except  for  the  job's  controlling  terminal, and all
                  files are CLOSEd.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

   Restrictions

        You cannot continue the program after using CLOSE,  but  you  can
        restart at the beginning of your program or you can access DDT.

        You cannot specify a disk device as an argument.















                                    2-30
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CLOSE Command


   Examples

        1.  Terminate input from the paper-tape reader number 2.

            .CLOSE PTR2:<RET>

            .

        2.  Terminate I/O from all devices except your terminal.

            .CLOSE<RET>

            .

        3.  Attempt to terminate I/O from DSKB:   assigned  logical  name
            DEVA.

            .ASSIGN DSKB:  DEVA<RET>
             DSKB assigned
             .
             .
             .
            .CLOSE DEVA<RET>
             ?Not legal for disk-like devices
            .




























                                    2-31
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              COMPILE Command


                              COMPILE Command



   Function

        The COMPILE  command  produces  relocatable  binary  files  (.REL
        files)  and/or  compilation listings for specified source program
        files.  The system determines which language compiler to  use  by
        the  source  file  extension  or  by  switches you specify in the
        command string.  If you do not supply any switches in the command
        string,  but you do use a standard extension, the system uses the
        following compilers:

             Source File Extension    Compiler Used

             .ALG                     ALGOL compiler
             .BLI, .B10               BLISS-10 compiler
             .CBL                     COBOL compiler
             .F4 or .FOR              FORTRAN compiler
             .FAI                     FAIL compiler
             .MAC                     MACRO assembler
             .PAL                     PAL10 compiler
             .PAS                     Pascal compiler
             .P11                     MACY11 assembler
             .SAI                     SAIL compiler
             .SIM                     SIMULA compiler
             .SNO                     SNOBOL compiler

                                    NOTE

           The compiler cannot be changed with a switch,  but  it
           can  be  specified  with a switch when the source file
           has an unrecognizable or no extension.  If the  source
           file  has  a  non-standard  extension,  and you do not
           specify the compiler in a switch, FORTRAN is  used  as
           the  default  compiler.   All standard file extensions
           are listed in Appendix D.

        Usually, the system translates the source file  if  there  is  no
        corresponding  binary (.REL) file, or if the date and time of the
        source file is later than the date and time of the  binary  file.
        If the binary file is newer than the source file, the system does
        not generate a new .REL file.

        This command  runs  the  COMPIL  program,  which  interprets  the
        command before running the appropriate language compiler.

        FAIL, MACY11, SAIL, and SNOBOL are recognized as  compilers  only
        if   the   appropriate   assembly   switches   are  set  at  your
        installation.


                                    2-32
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              COMPILE Command


        Each  time  you  issue  the  COMPILE,  LOAD,  EXECUTE,  or  DEBUG
        commands,  the  system remembers the command, with its arguments,
        in a temporary file on disk  or  in  TMPCOR  if  they  are  small
        enough.   When  you  issue  one  of  these  commands  without  an
        argument, it causes the system to use the argument saved  in  the
        temporary file.

        The COMPILE command accepts several command constructions:  the @
        construction  (indirect  commands),  the  +  construction,  the =
        construction, and the < > construction.  Refer to Appendix C  for
        a complete description of each of these constructions.

   Format

        COMPILE file-spec/switch,file-spec/switch,...

        Where:    file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
                  file specifications, separated by commas.  The standard
                  file specification consists of:  a device name, a  file
                  name  (with  or  without an extension), and a directory
                  name.  If you omit the file specification argument, the
                  system  uses  the  argument  specified  in  a  previous
                  COMPILE-class command, if possible.  (Refer to  Section
                  1.9.)

                                           NOTE

                      Note that a maximum  of  150  processor  switch
                      characters can be passed to the compiler.

        You can use the following  switches  as  temporary  or  permanent
        switches.  (Refer to Section 1.8.4.) Switches relevant to COMPILE
        follow; all switches allowed with COMPILE can be used with  LOAD,
        EXECUTE and DEBUG.

          Switch                            Function

        /ALGOL        Compiles with ALGOL.  Assumed for  files  with  the
                      .ALG extension.

        /BINARY       Generates a binary file  for  each  file  compiled.
                      The  file name of the binary file is .REL.  This is
                      the default action.

        /BLISS        Compiles the file with BLISS-10.  Assumed for files
                      with the extension of .B10 and .BLI.

        /C68          Compiles with COBOL-68.

        /C74          Compiles with COBOL-74.



                                    2-33
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              COMPILE Command


        /COBOL        Compiles the file with COBOL.   Assumed  for  files
                      with the extension of .CBL.

        /COMPILE      Forces a compilation of this source  file  even  if
                      the  relocatable  binary  file  is newer.  Use this
                      switch to obtain an extra compilation (for example,
                      to obtain a listing of the compilation).  NOCOMPILE
                      is the default switch.

        /CREF         Produces a listing file on the disk for  each  file
                      compiled, for later processing by the CREF program.
                      The file extension of the  listing  file  is  .CRF.
                      The  file can then be listed with the CREF command.
                      With COBOL files, the CREF file is appended to  the
                      output  file;  additional  commands  are  needed to
                      obtain the cross-referenced file.

        /DDT          Loads the program debugger DDT with the file.

        /DEBUG:(arg, arg,...)
                      Passes the arguments  to  FORTRAN.   Refer  to  the
                      TOPS-10/TOPS-20 FORTRAN Language Manual.

        /DLIST        Creates a listing file with the extension .LST  and
                      stores  it  in  your  disk area.  You can have this
                      file printed on the line printer by using the PRINT
                      command.

        /F66          Applies FORTRAN-66 rules for DO loops and  EXTERNAL
                      statements.

        /FAIL         Assembles the file with FAIL.   Assumed  for  files
                      with the .FAI extension.

        /FORTRAN      Compiles the file with a FORTRAN compiler.  Assumed
                      for  files with either the extension of .F4 or .FOR
                      and for  all  files  with  unrecognizable  compiler
                      extensions, if FORTRAN is the standard compiler for
                      your system.  This switch is necessary if the  file
                      has a unrecognizable compiler extension and FORTRAN
                      is not the standard compiler or is not the  current
                      default.

        /FORDDT       Loads the FORDDT debugger with the program.

        /FOROTS       Obsolete
        /FORSE






                                    2-34
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              COMPILE Command


        /FUDGE:file   Creates a temporary file that contains the  library
                      file  name and the names of the .REL files produced
                      by the command string.  When you  issue  the  FUDGE
                      command,  PIP  reads  this  file  to  generate  the
                      library .REL file.  (See the TOPS-10 MAKLIB  User's
                      Guide for information about library files.)

                      The  argument  to  /FUDGE  is  the   library   file
                      specification.  If you omit the file extension, the
                      default is .REL.

                      This switch is permanent  (sticky).   That  is,  it
                      pertains  to  all  .REL  files  generated  by  this
                      command string.

        /GFLOAT       Indicates that double-precision numbers are  to  be
                      stored  in  G-floating  format.  This format has an
                      expanded exponent range.  This option is  available
                      on KL10 processors only.

        /K?10         Designates the machine on which  the  program  will
                      execute  after  it has been loaded.  The default is
                      the processor that is executing the command.  The ?
                      can  be  replaced  by  L  or  S.  To designate a KS
                      processor, use /KS10.

        /LIBRARY      Loads  the  program   in   library   search   mode.
                      (/LIBRARY is identical to /SEARCH.)

        /LINK         Obsolete

        /LIST         Prints the listing file on the line printer (LPT:).
                      If the line printer is spooled or available to your
                      job, the listing file is automatically printed.

        /LMAP:file    Produces a  loader  map  while  loading.   The  map
                      contains local symbols.

        /MACRO        Assembles the file with MACRO.  Assumed  for  files
                      with the extension of .MAC.

        /MACY11       Assembles the file with MACY11.  Assumed for  files
                      with the extension .P11.  MACY11 is recognized as a
                      compiler only if the appropriate assembly switch is
                      set.  This switch is not supported.

        /MAP:file     Produces a loader map while loading.   The  default
                      file name is MAP.MAP.





                                    2-35
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              COMPILE Command


        /NEW          Runs the appropriate  language  compiler  from  the
                      experimental  library area [1,5] (device NEW:).  If
                      the compiler does not exist on device NEW:,  COMPIL
                      tries to obtain it from device SYS:.

        /NOBINARY     Does not generate binary files.  This switch,  when
                      combined  with the /CREF or /LIST switch, is useful
                      when  compiling   programs   solely   to   generate
                      listings.

        /NOCOMPILE    Compiles the source file if there is no relocatable
                      file   newer  than  the  source  file.   Note  that
                      /COMPILE always compiles, /REL never compiles,  and
                      /NOCOMPILE    (the    default    switch)   compiles
                      conditionally.

        /NODEBUG      Does not pass  previously  specified  arguments  to
                      FORTRAN.

        /NOLIST       Does not  generate  listing  files.   This  is  the
                      default action.  Complement to /LIST.

        /NOOPTIMIZE   Does not optimize the object source code.  This  is
                      the default.  Complement to /OPTIMIZE.

        /NOSEARCH     Does not load the program in library  search  mode.
                      Complement to /SEARCH.

        /OPTIMIZE     Optimizes the object code of a FORTRAN program.

        /OLD          Runs the appropriate  language  compiler  from  the
                      system library [1,3] of old programs (device OLD:).
                      If the compiler does  not  exist  on  device  OLD:,
                      COMPIL tries to obtain it from device SYS:.

        /PAL10        Assembles the file with PAL10.  Assumed  for  files
                      with the .PAL extension.

        /PASCAL       Compiles the file with Pascal.  Assumed  for  files
                      with the .PAS extension.

        /REL          Loads an existing .REL file rather than compiling a
                      new one.  Refer also to /COMPILE and /NOCOMPILE.

        /SAIL         Compiles the file with  SAIL.   Assumed  for  files
                      with the .SAI extension.

        /SAVE         Saves the core image to disk in an executable  file
                      after it is loaded.




                                    2-36
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              COMPILE Command


        /SEARCH       Loads the program in library search mode.  (/SEARCH
                      is identical to /LIBRARY.)

        /SELF         Runs the appropriate language compiler from  device
                      DSK:   instead  of  from the system library (device
                      SYS:).  This switch is useful if you keep a private
                      copy of a compiler in your own disk area.

        /SIMULA       Compiles the file with SIMULA.  Assumed  for  files
                      with the .SIM extension.

        /SNOBOL       Compiles the file with SNOBOL.  Assumed  for  files
                      with the extension .SNO.  SNOBOL is recognized as a
                      compiler only if the appropriate assembly switch is
                      set.  This switch is not supported.

        /SSAVE        Saves the core image in a sharable executable  file
                      after the program is loaded.

        /SYS          Compiles the program with the compiler  from  SYS:.
                      This is the default.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Runs the appropriate language compiler, destroying your  original
        core image.

   Restrictions

        You cannot use wildcard constructions with COMPILE.

        A language compiler appearing more  than  once  within  a  single
        command  string  cannot  access  more  than  one  disk area.  For
        example, the following is invalid:

        .COMPILE TESPRG.F10/NEW,SUBRTN.F10/SYS

        However, the following is valid:

        .COMPILE TESPRG.F10/NEW
        .COMPILE SUBRTN.F10/SYS










                                    2-37
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              COMPILE Command


   Examples

        1.  Compile PROG (with the null extension) with FORTRAN, TEST.MAC
            with  MACRO, and MANAGE (with the null extension) with MACRO.
            A listing file is generated for MANAGE.  The files  generated
            are PROG.REL, TEST.REL, MANAGE.REL, and MANAGE.LST.

            .COMPILE PROG,TEST.MAC,MANAGE/MACRO/LIST<RET>

            FORTRAN:  PROG
            MAIN
            MACRO:  TEST
            MANAGE
            EXIT      

            .

        2.  Compile SIGN.MAC with MACRO, TABLES (with the null extension)
            with  FORTRAN,  and  MULTI.ALG with ALGOL.  Listing files are
            generated for SIGN.MAC and MULTI.ALG.

            .COMPILE/LIST SIGN.MAC,TABLES/NOLIST,MULTI.ALG<RET>

            MACRO:  SIGN
            FORTRAN:  TABLES
            MAIN
            ALGOL:  MULTI
            EXIT

            .

        3.  Compile the files DIVIDE, SUBTRC, and ADD  with  the  FORTRAN
            compiler,  even  if current .REL files exist.  Generate files
            to be processed by CREF.  The files generated are DIVIDE.CRF,
            DIVIDE.REL, SUBTRC.CRF, SUBTRC.REL, ADD.CRF and ADD.REL.

            .COMPILE/CREF/COMPILE DIVIDE,SUBTRC,ADD<RET>

            FORTRAN:  DIVIDE
            MAIN.
            FORTRAN:  SUBTRC
            MAIN.
            FORTRAN:  ADD
            MAIN.

            .







                                    2-38
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              COMPILE Command


        4.  Compile the files  contained  in  the  command  file  LIBALL.
            Create  a  temporary  file  which  contains all the .REL file
            names and the library  file  name  (MONITR.REL).   The  FUDGE
            command  creates  the library file, MONITR.REL, with the .REL
            files in the same order as they were specified in the command
            file.

            .COMPILE/FUDGE:MONITR.REL@LIBALL<RET>

            FORTRAN:  DIVIDE
            MAIN.
            FORTRAN:  SUBTRC
            MAIN.
            FORTRAN:  ADD
            MAIN.

            .FUDGE<RET>

        5.  Compile and execute the program NUMBER.FOR.

            .COMPILE NUMB2.FOR<RET>

            FORTRAN:  NUMB2
            MAIN.

            .EXECUTE
            LINK:  LOADING
            [LNKXCT NUMB2 EXECUTION]
            DONE
            END OF EXECUTION
            CPU TIME:  0.12  ELAPSED TIME:  0.53
            EXIT

            .



















                                    2-39
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              CONTEXT Command


                              CONTEXT Command


   Function

        The CONTEXT command displays the status of a job's  context.   It
        also  allows  you  to  create, kill, and switch between contexts.
        When issued without arguments, the command gives you  information
        about  your  current contexts, such as the name of the program in
        core for that particular context.  You can also  use  CONTEXT  to
        create parallel contexts.  Parallel contexts permit you to switch
        between programs (in separate contexts) without waiting for  them
        to  reinitialize.  You can specify switches to list the status of
        a particular context or delete a context.  (Section 1.5  contains
        a discussion of contexts.)

   Format

        CONTEXT argument/switch

        Where:   argument  is  optional.   With  no  arguments,   CONTEXT
                 displays  information  about all of your job's contexts,
                 including the program loaded in each context.

                 /switch is one of the options listed below.

        Argument, when specified, can be one of the following:

             handle       A  context  name  or  number.   This   argument
                          switches  your  job's  current  context  to the
                          specified one.  A  period  (.)  can  replace  a
                          context name for the current context only.

             name=number  Where  name  is  a   one   to   six   character
                          alphanumeric  string  to be associated with the
                          specified context number.

             =            An equal sign can be  used  to  create  a  new,
                          parallel context, without switching the current
                          context to the newly created context.

        /Switch, when specified with the handle argument, can be  one  of
        the following:

             /KILL  Deletes the specified parallel context.

             /LIST  Lists information about the specified context only.






                                    2-40
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              CONTEXT Command


   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Requires LOGIN.

        Preserves your core image.

   Restrictions

        To use the CONTEXT command, you must be at monitor level, and the
        job must be halted.

   Associated Commands

        POP    Returns you to a previous superior context,  and  destroys
               the current context.

        PUSH   Creates an inferior context.

   Examples

        1.  Name context 1 (the current context, in this case) TOPLVL.

            .CONTEXT TOPLVL=1

        2.  Display the status of the current context.

            .CONTEXT
            Contexts used/quota = 1/4, pages used/quota = 0/1000
            Contexts     Superior     Prog     Idle time
            * TOPLVL 1                PATH

            Notice that the current context,  TOPLVL,  is  marked  by  an
            asterisk  (*).   For  this  particular  example,  one of four
            allotted  contexts  is  being  used,  none   of   the   1,000
            saved-pages  is  in  use,  the  context  name  is TOPLVL, the
            context number is 1, and the PATH program is running in  this
            context.














                                    2-41
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              CONTEXT Command


        3.  Create an adjacent context, run  MAIL  under  it,  and  exit.
            Then look at the context status.

            .CONTEXT=

            .MAIL
            21 messages, 116 blocks.

            MS>quit

            .CONTEXT
            Contexts used/quota = 2/4, pages used/quota = 4/1000
            Context     Superior     Prog     Idle time
            TOPLVL  1                PATH      19.78
            *       2                MS

            Note the differences from the previous status.  There are now
            two  contexts  in  use, and the current, unnamed context 2 is
            running MS.  Also, PATH has been idle for 19.78 seconds since
            the  last  CONTEXT  command was issued.  MS will restart very
            quickly if you type CONTINUE, because it  does  not  have  to
            re-initialize.

        4.  Finally, kill one context that is  running  MS,  and  examine
            your status.  You have to move to another context to do this,
            because you cannot kill the current context.

            .CONTEXT 1

            .CONTEXT 2/KILL

            .CONTEXT
            Contexts used/quota = 1/4, pages used/quota = 0/1000
            Context     Superior     Prog      Idle time
            * TOPLVL   1             PATH

            Context 1 is now the current and only context.
















                                    2-42
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              CONTINUE Command


                             CONTINUE Command



   Function

        The CONTINUE command continues your program  from  the  point  at
        which  you  interrupted it.  You interrupt program execution with
        CTRL/C.  After you use CONTINUE, your terminal  returns  to  user
        level.

   Format

        CONTINUE

   Characteristics

        Places your terminal at user level.

        Requires core.

   Example

        This is a program that finds all the numbers up to 10,000.

        .TYPE NUMBER.FOR<RET>

                N = 0
        100     N = N + 1
                IF (N .EQ.  10000) GO TO 300
                WRITE (22, 201) N
                GO TO 100
        201     FORMAT (1X, I14,' IS BETWEEN 1 AND 10000')
        300     STOP 'DONE'
                END

        Execute the program.

        .EXECUTE  NUMBER.FOR<RET>
        FORTRAN:NUMBER
        NUMBER
        LINK:LOADING
        [LNKXCT NUMBER EXECUTION]
        ^C

        ^C

        Type two CTRL/Cs to halt the program.





                                    2-43
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              CONTINUE Command


        Detach from the job to do work on another job.

        .DETACH<RET>

        FROM JOB 19

                .

                .

                .

        Later, attach to your original job.

        .ATTACH 19 [27,5434]<RET>

        PASSWORD:<RET>

        Type CONTINUE to enter user level.

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        ?PLEASE TYPE ^C FIRST

        System message (see NOTE).

        Type CTRL/C and CONTINUE to enter user level.

        .^C

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        DONE

        END OF EXECUTION

        CPU TIME:4.60  ELAPSED TIME:12:12.83

        EXIT

        .

        Program  message  indicates  execution  is  finished.   The  file
        containing  data  from  this  program  is named FOR22.DAT, and is
        stored in your default disk area.

                                    NOTE

           You must type CTRL/C to re-enter user  level,  because
           the   program   is   running.   The  program  must  be
           interrupted so that your terminal can access it.


                                    2-44
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                COPY Command


                               COPY Command



   Function

        The COPY command copies a file from one  device  to  another,  or
        within  a  device,  file  structure,  or  directory.  The command
        string can contain one output specification  and  any  number  of
        input specifications.

   Format

        COPY dev:file.ext[directory]<nnn>=dev:file.ext[directory],...

        Where:    The file to the left of  the  equal  sign  (=)  is  the
                  destination,  or  output  file,  and the file(s) to the
                  right of  the  equal  sign  is  the  source,  or  input
                  file(s).

                  dev:  is a physical or logical  device  name.   If  you
                  omit a device name, the system assumes DSK:.

                  file.ext is the name of the file(s) to be used in input
                  or  output.   If  you  omit  the  output file name, the
                  system  defaults  to  the  input  file  name.   If  you
                  transfer  many  input  files  to  one  output file, the
                  system  combines  the  files.   You  can  use  wildcard
                  constructions with the COPY command.

                  [directory] is the disk area in which the files are  to
                  be  read  or written.  If you type this area before the
                  file name, the system uses this area as the default for
                  all  succeeding files.  If you omit this argument, your
                  default directory is accessed.  You can transfer  files
                  to or from another directory only if you have access to
                  that directory.

                  <nnn> is the protection code to be given to the  output
                  file.   If  you  omit this argument, the system assigns
                  the system standard protection code, even if the  input
                  file   already   has  a  non-standard  protection  code
                  associated with it.  Protection codes are described  in
                  Section 1.9.4.

                  Use the equal sign  (=)  to  separate  the  destination
                  (output) side from the source (input) side.






                                    2-45
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                COPY Command


   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.

        Runs the PIP program.

   Example

        Find file NOTICE.TXT in SYS:

        .DIRECT SYS:NOTICE.TXT<RET>

        NOTICE TXT 2 <155> 6-SEP-79 DSKC:[1,4]

        Search your own directory.

        .DIRECT DSKB:NOTICE<RET>

        %WLDNSF No such files as NOTICE.TXT

        Copy NOTICE from SYS: into your directory on DSKB:

        .COPY DSKB:NOTICE.TXT=SYS:NOTICE.TXT<RET>

        Check your directory to find NOTICE on DSKB:

        .DIR NOTICE<RET>

        NOTICE TXT 2 <055> 6-SEP-79 DSKB:[27,5434]
        .





















                                    2-46
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                CORE Command


                               CORE Command



   Function

        The CORE command prints or changes  the  amount  of  core  memory
        assigned  to  your  job.  Because programs usually allocate core,
        you generally do not need this command.

        If your job is locked in core and you issue this command  with  a
        nonzero argument, the monitor prints an error message.

   Format

        CORE nx

        Where:    n is a decimal number; this argument is optional.
                  You may not assign more than one  section  of  core  to
                  your job.

                  If n is 0, the low and high segments are  removed  from
                  the virtual addressing space of your job.

                  If n is greater than 0, n represents the  total  number
                  of  blocks of core to be assigned to your job from this
                  point on.

                  If n is  less  than  the  high-segment  size  plus  the
                  minimum  low-segment size, n plus the high-segment size
                  is assumed.

                  x is either K or P.  K represents units of 1024  words.
                  P   represents   512-word   pages.    For  example,  3P
                  represents three pages or 1536 words.  If  you  do  not
                  specify x, K is assumed.

        If you omit nx, the monitor prints the amount of  core  currently
        being  used  by  your job, as well as the octal page number, page
        (accessibility) status, and the origin of the pages.   This  form
        of the CORE command does not change the core assignment.












                                    2-47
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                CORE Command


        Page status can be any of the following:

         o  executable (EX)

         o  readable (RD)

         o  writable (WR)

         o  sharable (SH)

         o  locked (LK)

         o  allocated-but-zero (AZ).

        Origin  can  be  private  pages,   spy   pages,   or   the   file
        specification.

        The total pages in the space is also displayed.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not operate when your job is in run state.

   Example

        Use CORE to look at the amount and contents  of  memory  assigned
        after using MAIL.

        .CORE<RET>

        Page number     Page status     Origin
        0-74            EX RD WR        Private pages
        76-165          EX RD WR        Private pages
        620-674         EX RD SH        DSKA:MS[1,4]
        Total of 162 pages

        Virt. mem. assigned 118+45P (Current limit: 16384P Max limit: 16384P)
        Phys. mem. assigned 118+45P (Guideline: 16384P Max limit: 999P)
        Swap space left: 81502P












                                    2-48
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CPUNCH Command


                              CPUNCH Command



   Function

        The CPUNCH command places entries in the card punch queue.  Refer
        to the QUEUE command for further information and examples.

   Format

        CPUNCH dev:jobname=file-spec/switches

        Where:    dev:  is the name of the individual device on which the
                  file  is  to  be punched.  (For example, CDP2:  is card
                  punch number 2.) The device name is optional.  To punch
                  the  file  on  a  card  punch  at a different node, use
                  devSxx;, where xx is the node  number.   (For  example,
                  CDPS22:  is a card punch on node number 22.)

                  jobname is the name of the job you  are  entering  into
                  the  queue.   The  default  job name is the name of the
                  first file in the request.

                  The equal sign is required if you  specify  either  the
                  device or job name.

                  file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
                  file specifications, separated by commas, for the files
                  being processed.  A file specification is in  the  form
                  dev:file.ext[directory].  (Refer to Section 1.9.)

                  If you specify neither a job name nor  a  file-spec,  a
                  list  of  all  the jobs in the card punch queue will be
                  printed on your terminal.

                  The wildcard construction can  be  used  for  the  file
                  specifications.















                                    2-49
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CPUNCH Command


                  /switches are  listed  below.   The  switches  to  this
                  command  can  be divided into two categories, depending
                  on whether the switch can be used only once, or can  be
                  used  more  times, in a single command string.  The two
                  categories are:

                   o  Queue-Operation Switches

                      These switches can be used only once in  a  command
                      string.   They  affect  the entire request, and you
                      can place them anywhere in the command string.   If
                      you  have  used  one of these switches in a command
                      string, you cannot use it again in the same string.
                      Many  commands have a /NO construction, which takes
                      a negative effect.  Be sure you do not use the  /NO
                      construction of a switch in the same command string
                      with the positive construction.

                   o  File-Control Switches

                      These switches can be used any number of  times  in
                      the  command  string.   You  can  also  use the /NO
                      construction  of  a  switch  in  the  same  command
                      string.  To achieve a temporary or permanent effect
                      by the placement of the switch,  refer  to  Section
                      1.8.4.

          Switches       Category                   Function

        /ABEFORE:        File         Queues the  file only if the access
         date-time       control      date is before the  specified  date
                                      and time.

        /ACCOUNT:name    Queue        Specifies the account  to which the
                         operation    job should be charged.

        /AFTER:          Queue        Processes  the  request  after  the
         date-time       operation    specified time.

        /ALLFILES:       Queue        Accepts the request only if  all of
         YES or NO       operation    the files in the request exist.  By
                                      default, if any of the files do not
                                      exist, the others will be processed
                                      appropriately.      This     switch
                                      specifies that if any file does not
                                      exist,    no    files   should   be
                                      processed.  The value YES or NO  is
                                      optional.   If  you use YES, all of
                                      the files you specified must exist.
                                      If    NO,    existing   files   are
                                      processed, and warning messages are
                                      printed   for  files  that  do  not
                                      exist.
                                    2-50
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CPUNCH Command


        /ASINCE:         File         Queues the  file only if the access
         date-time       control      date is later  than  the  specified
                                      date and time.

        /BEFORE:         File         Queues only the files with creation
         date-time       control      dates before the specified date and
                                      time.

        /CHARACTERISTIC: Queue        Specifies an output characteristic.
         arg             operation    You  can  find  a   list   of   the
                                      characteristics  arguments  defined
                                      for  your  system   in   the   file
                                      SYS:CHARTY.DAT.

        /CHECK           Queue        Prints on your terminal  a list  of
                         operation    the queue entries made by your job.

        /COPIES:n        File         Repeats the  output  the  specified
                         control      number of times  (n  must  be  less
                                      than 64).  The default is one copy.

        /CREATE          Queue        Makes a new entry  in the specified
                         operation    queue.   This   function   is   the
                                      default,  except when listing queue
                                      entries.

        /DEFERRED        Queue        Causes   deferred   output   to  be
                         operation    released to the card  punch  queue.
                                      You  must  use one of the following
                                      switches with /DEFERRED.

                                      /CREATE to  complete  the  released
                                      output requests.

                                      /KILL  to  eliminate  the  released
                                      output requests.

                                      Refer to the SET DEFER command  for
                                      more information.

        /DELETE          File         Deletes  the file  after processing
                         control      it.  Same as /DISPOSE:DELETE.











                                    2-51
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CPUNCH Command


        /DESTINATION:    Queue        Specifies the  node  at  which  the
         node            operation    file will be punched.  Use the node
                                      name  or node number to specify the
                                      node.   The  files  will   not   be
                                      punched  at any host other than the
                                      host  to  which  the  terminal   is
                                      connected.

        /DISPOSE:arg     File         Controls  the  disposition  of  the
                         control      file after it  is  processed.   The
                                      arguments to this switch are:

                                      DELETE deletes the file  from  your
                                      directory after processing it.

                                      PRESERVE preserves the  file  after
                                      processing it.

                                      RENAME renames the file  from  your
                                      directory  into  the spooling area.
                                      Thus,  the  file   is   effectively
                                      deleted immediately.

        /DISTRIBUTION:   Queue        Specifies  text  to  place  in  the
         "text"          operation    distribution field, on  the  banner
                                      page  of  output.  You can use this
                                      field    to     include     mailing
                                      information,  or the location where
                                      the  operator  should   leave   the
                                      listing.   The text field may be up
                                      to  39   alphanumeric   characters,
                                      including punctuation and spaces if
                                      the text  is  placed  in  quotation
                                      marks.

        /ERBINARY        File         Prints an error message if a binary
                         control      file  is  included  in  the  queue.
                                      This is the default.

        /ERNONE          Queue        Prints an error message if no files
                         operation    match the file specification.  This
                                      is the default.

        /ERPROTECTION    Queue        Prints  an  error  message  if  the
                         operation    the request involves  a  protection
                                      violation.  This is the default.

        /FAST            Queue        Prints the entries in the queue  on
                         operation    your terminal.




                                    2-52
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CPUNCH Command


        /FILE:arg        File         Specifies how the file format is to
                         control      interpreted.      The     following
                                      arguments  can  be  used  with this
                                      switch:

                                      ASCII interprets the file as  ASCII
                                      text.

                                      ELEVEN interprets the file as  four
                                      8-bit  bytes  in  each 36-bit word.
                                      The bits are arranged as follows:

                                           Byte 1:  bits 10-17
                                           Byte 2:  bits 2-9
                                           Byte 3:  bits 28-35
                                           Byte 4:  bits 20-27

        /FORMS:arg       Queue        Specifies  any special cards  to be
                         operation    used.  Available forms  are  listed
                                      in SYS:FORMST.DAT.

        /GENERIC         File         Sends output  to the next available
                         control      card punch.  Complement to /UNIT.

        /HEADER:         File         Makes header cards  for  the  file.
         YES or NO       control      The default is YES.

        /HELP:arg        Queue        Prints information on your terminal
                         operation    about  the  QUEUE  command.    This
                                      switch  does  not  queue any files.
                                      The  switch  can  be   used   alone
                                      (/HELP)   or   with   one   of  the
                                      following arguments:

                                      TEXT  prints  a  message  with  the
                                      format  and  switches  of the QUEUE
                                      command.  This is the same as /HELP
                                      with no arguments.

                                      SWITCHES prints a list of  all  the
                                      switches  available  with the QUEUE
                                      command.

        /JOBNAME:name    Queue        Specifies the name of the job.  The
                         operation    name can be up  to  6  alphanumeric
                                      characters.

        /KILL            Queue        Removes  the  specified  entry from
                         operation    the queue.  You  must  specify  the
                                      job name, /REQUESTID, or /SEQUENCE,
                                      left  of  the  equal  sign  in  the
                                      command line.

                                    2-53
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CPUNCH Command


        /LENGTH:n:m      File         Processes   only  the  files  whose
                         control      length is between n and m blocks in
                                      length.

        /LIMIT:n         Queue        Limits  the output to the specified
                         operation    number of cards.

        /LIST:arg        Queue        Prints  information  about the jobs
                         operation    in the queue.   If  you  use  /LIST
                                      alone,  it  shows  the  jobs in the
                                      queue.  This is equivalent to using
                                      the    CPUNCH   command   with   no
                                      arguments and no  switches.   /LIST
                                      can  be  abbreviated  to  /L.   The
                                      switch can also  take  one  of  the
                                      following arguments:

                                      ALL shows all data about each queue
                                      request.

                                      FAST shows a fast list of the queue
                                      requests.

                                      JOBS shows a list of  the  jobs  in
                                      the  queue.  (Same as /LIST with no
                                      arguments.)

                                      SUMMARY shows only the summary line
                                      of the queue display.

        /MESSAGE:arg     Queue        Specifies   the information  to  be
                         operation    output if  an  error  occurs.   The
                                      arguments are:

                                      ADDRESS        Prints the  location
                                                     in  memory where the
                                                     error occurred.

                                      CONTINUATION   Prints   information
                                                     about the error.

                                      FIRST          Prints  a   one-line
                                                     error message.

                                      PREFIX         Prints    the    six
                                                     character prefix.







                                    2-54
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CPUNCH Command


        /MODIFY          Queue        Alters the specified  parameter  in
                         operation    the  specified  job.   This  switch
                                      requires   that   you  have  access
                                      rights  to  the  job.    You   must
                                      specify  the  job name, /REQUESTID,
                                      or /SEQUENCE,  left  of  the  equal
                                      sign  in  the  command  line.  This
                                      switch can  be  used  to  modify  a
                                      previously   submitted  request  as
                                      long as the request  has  not  been
                                      started.

        /NEW:            File         Accepts   file   specifications  of
         YES or NO       control      files that do not exist.

        /NOHEADER        File         Does not make header cards for each
                         control      file.

        /NONEW           File         Does not accept file specifications
                         control      of files that  do  not  yet  exist.
                                      This is the default.

        /NONOTIFY        Queue        Does not notify you when the job is
                         operation    finished.  This is the default.

        /NONULL          Queue        Prints  a fatal  error message on a
                         operation    null request.  This is the default.

        /NOOPTION        Queue        Suppresses  reading  the SWITCH.INI
                         operation    file.

        /NOPHYSICAL      File         Allows logical names for devices in
                         control      the command string.

        /NOSTRS          File         When  scanning  structures  for the
                         control      file,   takes   only   the    first
                                      occurrence.   This  is  the default
                                      function.

        /NOTES:"text"    Queue        Prints the text in the header card.
                         operation












                                    2-55
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CPUNCH Command


        /NOTIFY:         Queue        Notifies  you on your terminal when
         YES or NO       operation    your request is completed.   To  be
                                      notified,   use   /NOTIFY  with  no
                                      argument, or with YES or  1  as  an
                                      argument.         To       suppress
                                      notification,  use   /NOTIFY:0   or
                                      /NOTIFY:NO.   By  default,  you are
                                      not  notified  when  a  request  is
                                      finished.   Special  cases, such as
                                      printing of  batch  log  files  and
                                      output  of  deferred requests, will
                                      never  notify  you  when  they  are
                                      completed.

        /NULL:           Queue        Does   not   print  a  fatal  error
         YES or NO       operation    message if the specified  files  do
                                      not exist.

        /OKBINARY        File         Accepts  files   whose   extensions
                         control      indicate that they  include  binary
                                      information.   Normally, files with
                                      extensions .SAV, .SHR, .LOW,  .REL,
                                      .EXE, and .HGH will not be accepted
                                      for processing.

        /OKNONE          Queue        Does not produce a warning  message
                         operation    if  no   files   match   the   file
                                      specification.

        /OKPROTECTION    Queue        Does not print an error message  if
                         operation    a file protection violation occurs.

        /OPTION:name     Queue        Uses   the option  line  QUEUE:name
                         operation    in the SWITCH.INI file.  SWITCH.INI
                                      files are described in Appendix B.

        /PHYSICAL        File         Ignores logical device names in the
                         control      command line.

        /PRESERVE        File         Saves       the      file     after
                         control      processing   it.    This   is   the
                                      default.   This  switch is the same
                                      as /DISPOSE:PRESERVE.

        /PRIORITY:n      Queue        Assigns  the  specified priority (n
                         operation    is 1 to  63)  to  the  request.   A
                                      larger number has greater priority.






                                    2-56
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CPUNCH Command


        /PROTECTION:nnn  Queue        Specifies  a  protection code to be
                         operation    associated with the request.  Queue
                                      requests may have protection codes.
                                      These   are   exactly   like   file
                                      protection codes.  Refer to Section
                                      1.9.4.

        /PUNCH:arg       File         Punches  the  file in the specified
                         control      mode.  If you omit this switch, the
                                      file  is  punched  according to the
                                      data mode specified  in  the  file.
                                      The following arguments can be used
                                      with this switch:

                                      026     Punches the  files  in  026
                                              Hollerith mode.

                                      ASCII   Punches the files in  ASCII
                                              card mode.

                                      BCD     Punches the  files  in  026
                                              Hollerith  mode.   (Same as
                                              026.)

                                      BINARY  Punches  the  files  in   a
                                              checksummed   binary   card
                                              mode.

                                      IMAGE   Punches the files in  image
                                              card format.

        /REMOTE          Queue        Prints on your terminal a  list  of
                         operation    remote queues.  Must be  used  with
                                      /DESTINATION.

        /REQUESTID:n     Queue        Specifies        the        request
                         operation    identification number  of  the  job
                                      you  wish  to  modify or terminate.
                                      The request  identification  number
                                      is  assigned  when  you  queue  the
                                      request.

        /RUN:file        Queue        Executes  the specified  file after
                         operation    the request is accepted.

        /RUNCORE:n       Queue        Executes  the specified  file in nK
                         operation    of  core  after  the   request   is
                                      accepted.





                                    2-57
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CPUNCH Command


        /RUNOFFSET:n     Queue        Executes the  specified  file  with
                         operation    start offset n after the request is
                                      accepted.

        /SEQUENCE:n      Queue        Specifies  a sequence number to aid
                         operation    in  identifying  a  request  to  be
                                      modified or deleted.

        /SINCE:          File         Queues only the files with creation
         date-time       control      dates after the specified date  and
                                      time.

        /STRS:           Queue        Searches  for   the   file  on  all
         YES or NO       operation    structures in the search  list  and
                                      takes    every   occurrence.    The
                                      default is to take just  the  first
                                      occurrence of the file.

        /TMPFIL:file:    Queue        Creates  a temporary  file on  TMP:
         text            operation    and enters the text into the file.

        /UNIT:n          Queue        Specifies the unit  number  of  the
                         operation    device you want the output sent to.

        /USERNAME:       Queue        Specifies  the  user name field for
         "name"          operation    the banner page  of  output.   This
                                      field   can   contain   up   to  39
                                      alphanumeric  characters,  and  may
                                      include  punctuation  and spaces if
                                      the name  is  placed  in  quotation
                                      marks.

   Associated Messages

        When a new entry is made in a system queue, the system  prints  a
        message on the user's terminal.  The message is in the form:

             [CARD-PUNCH JOB name QUEUED, REQUEST #nnn, LIMIT xxx]

             Where:    name is the name of the job in  the  queue.   This
                       can  be  specified  by  the  user.   Otherwise, it
                       defaults to the name of  the  first  file  in  the
                       request.

                       nnn is the  number  that  represents  the  request
                       identification of the job in the queue.

                       xxx is the maximum number of cards  that  the  job
                       will use.




                                    2-58
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CPUNCH Command


   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Runs the QUEUE program.

        Destroys your core image.

        Does not require LOGIN if you desire a list of queue entries.

   Examples

        1.  Punch the file SYSTAT.MAC in ASCII format.

            .CPUNCH SYSTAT.MAC/PUNCH:ASCII<RET>
            [CARD-PUNCH JOB SYSTAT QUEUED, REQUEST #75, LIMIT 33]
            .          

        2.  Punch the file SYSTAT.REL in binary format, but do not  begin
            output until after 5:00 P.M.

            .CPUNCH SYSTAT.REL/PUNCH:BINARY/AFTER:17:00<RET>
            [CARD-PUNCH JOB SYSTAT QUEUED, REQUEST #43, LIMIT 200]

            .          




























                                    2-59
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                CREF Command


                               CREF Command



   Function

        The CREF command runs the CREF program.  If you have created  any
        files  to  be  processed with CREF (using the /CREF switch with a
        COMPILE, LOAD, DEBUG, or EXECUTE command),  CREF  processes  them
        and  prints  them  on  the line printer.  The file containing the
        names of these CREF files is then deleted so that subsequent CREF
        commands will not list them again.

        When the logical device name LPT:  is assigned to a device  other
        than  the  line printer, the CREF files are stored on that device
        with the same file name and the extension .LST.   (See  the  CREF
        manual in the TOPS-10 Software Notebooks for more information.)

   Format

        CREF file-spec

        Where:    file-spec is a valid  file  specification.   (Refer  to
                  Section  1.9.)  When you supply a file specification in
                  the command  line,  CREF  produces  a  cross-referenced
                  listing  file  for  the  specified file.  If you do not
                  give an argument to the command, CREF uses the argument
                  saved  from a previous COMPILE-class command.  If there
                  is no stored argument, CREF prompts  with  an  asterisk
                  (*).

        You can use the following switches with the CREF command.

        Switch                  Function

        /A        Advances magtape by one file (may be repeated).

        /B        Backspaces magtape by one file (may be repeated).

        /C        Cancels SWITCH.INI switch defaulting.

        /D        Permits default switches as for SWITCH.INI.

        /H        Types this text.

        /K        Kills user-defined symbol table listing.

        /M        Suppresses user macro's, OPDEF's, symbol table.

        /O        Lists the opcodes.



                                    2-60
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                CREF Command


        /P        Preserves (does not delete) input files.

        /R        Restarts listing and prompts for line number.

        /S        Suppresses  program  listing  and  lists  only   symbol
                  tables.

        /W        Rewinds tape.

        /Z        Indicates zero DECtape directory.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.

        Requires LOGIN.

   Examples

        1.  Compile the files contained in the command  file  PROMAC  and
            produce CREF listing files on the disk.

            .COMPILE/CREF@PROMAC<RET>
            FORTRAN:  INPUT1
            MAIN.
            FORTRAN:  INPUT2
            MAIN.

            Process and list the cross-referenced listing files  produced
            by  the COMPILE command.  The argument is the stored argument
            that was used in the COMPILE command.

            .SET SPOOL LPT<RET>
            .CREF<RET>
            CREF:INPUT1
            CREF:INPUT2
            .














                                    2-61
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                CREF Command


        2.  Compile and load the files  contained  in  the  command  file
            CONALL.   Produce  a  loader  map with the file name NAME and
            CREF files on disk.

            .LOAD/CREF/MAP:NAME@CONALL<RET>
            MACRO:  HIGH
            MACRO:  SHARE
            EXIT

            Assign the logical name LPT to magnetic tape unit  1.   Store
            the CREF files on MTA1: to be output at a later time.

            .ASSIGN MTA1 LPT<RET>
            MTA261 ASSIGNED

            .CREF<RET>
            CREF:  HIGH
            CREF:  SHARE
            .


































                                    2-62
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CSTART Command


                              CSTART Command



   Function

        The  CSTART  command  begins  executing  the  program  from   the
        beginning,  or  from  the  address  you  specify  in the command,
        leaving your terminal at monitor level.  The  CSTART  command  is
        the  same  as  the  START  command,  except  that  it leaves your
        terminal at monitor level.

   Format

        CSTART addr

        Where:    addr is the address at which execution is to  begin  if
                  it is other than the location specified within the file
                  (.JBSA).   If  you  do  not  specify  an  address,  the
                  starting  address  comes  from .JBSA (stored in the job
                  data area).

                  To use CSTART:

                  1.  Use LOAD or GET to bring a program into memory.

                  2.  Type one or two CTRL/Cs to halt your job with  your
                      terminal at monitor level.

                  3.  Type CSTART to begin running the program  from  the
                      beginning.

                  4.  You can now  type  additional  commands  from  your
                      terminal  if  they  do not require core, or you can
                      detach your terminal from the job, using the DETACH
                      command.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Requires core.

   Restrictions

        This command should not be used if your  program  requests  input
        from the terminal.  This command is not available to batch users.






                                    2-63
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CSTART Command


                                    NOTE

           The CSTART command allows the program to run from  the
           beginning  or  from  the  specified  address.   If the
           program requires terminal I/O, the program  will  wait
           until you access user level with the START or CONTINUE
           commands.  Then your terminal  can  accept  output  or
           provide input.

   Example

        This is a program to find all the numbers up to 10,000.

        .TYPE NUMBER.FOR<RET>
                N = 0
        100     N = N + 1
                IF(N .EQ.  10000) GO TO 300
                WRITE(22,201) N
                GO TO 100
        201     FORMAT(1X, I14, 'IS BETWEEN 1 AND 10000')
        300     STOP 'DONE'
                END

        Execute the program.

        .EXECUTE  NUMBER.FOR<RET>
        FORTRAN:NUMBER
        NUMBER
        LINK:LOADING
        [LNKXCT NUMBER EXECUTION]
        ^C
        ^C

        Type two CTRL/C's to halt the program.

        Type CSTART.

        .CSTART<RET>

        Type CTRL/T for  job  status.   CTRL/T  does  not  echo  on  your
        terminal.

        DAY: :07:20 RUN: :01:00 RD:1093 WR:21 NUMBER 4+15P RN* PC000200

        The status message RN* indicates the NUMBER program is running.








                                    2-64
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CSTART Command


        Detach from the job to do work on another job.

        .DETACH<RET>

        FROM JOB 19

                .

                .

                .

        Later, attach to your original job.

        .ATTACH 19 [27,5434]<RET>

        PASSWORD:<RET>

        Type CONTINUE to return  to  user  level.   System  message  (see
        NOTE).

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        ?PLEASE TYPE ^C FIRST

        Type CTRL/C and CONTINUE, to access user level.

        .^C

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        DONE

        END OF EXECUTION

        CPU TIME:4:6.88  ELAPSED TIME:5:30.97

        EXIT

        .

        Program  message  indicates  execution  is  finished.   The  file
        containing  data  from  this  program  is named FOR22.DAT, and is
        stored in your default disk area.

                                    NOTE

           It is necessary to type CTRL/C to re-enter user level,
           because  the  program is running.  The program must be
           interrupted so that your terminal can access it.



                                    2-65
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DAYTIME Command


                              DAYTIME Command



   Function

        The DAYTIME command prints the date and the time of day,  in  the
        following format:

        wkdy dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss

        Where:    wkdy is the name of day of the week
                  dd is the day of the month
                  mmm is the name of the month
                  yy is the year
                  hh is the hour
                  mm is the minute
                  ss is the second to the nearest hundredth

   Format

        DAYTIME

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not require LOGIN.

        Does not destroy your core image.

   Example

        .DAYTIME<RET>
        MONDAY 29-FEB-88 16:46:42

        .
















                                    2-66
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                DDT Command


                                DDT Command



   Function

        The DDT command starts DDT, the dynamic system debugger.  If  DDT
        is already loaded with your core image, DDT starts at the address
        given by the right half of .JBDDT in the Job Data Area.  (The Job
        Data  Area  stores  information  pertinent  to  your  job.  It is
        described in the TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual.) If DDT is not yet
        loaded,  the  monitor  tries  to  merge  a special version of DDT
        (called VMDDT)  into  the  address  space  starting  at  location
        700000.

        If DDT is not yet loaded and the monitor cannot read in VMDDT, it
        prints  the  message:   ?NO  START ADDRESS.  The monitor will not
        read in VMDDT if your core image is execute-only.

        The DDT command copies  the  saved  program  counter  value  into
        .JBOPC  and  starts  the  program  at  an  alternate  entry point
        specified in .JBDDT (beginning address  of  DDT  as  set  by  the
        monitor).   DDT contains commands to allow you to start or resume
        at any desired address.

        If your job was executing a monitor  call  when  interrupted  (at
        monitor  level  and  not  in  TTY  input wait or SLEEP mode), the
        monitor sets a status bit (UTRP) and continues  the  job  at  the
        location  where  it  was  interrupted.   When  the  monitor  call
        processing is complete, the monitor clears the status  bit,  sets
        .JBOPC  to the address following the monitor call, and then traps
        to the DDT address found in .JBDDT.

        If your job is at monitor level and in TTY INPUT  WAIT  or  SLEEP
        mode,  the  trap to the DDT address occurs immediately and .JBOPC
        contains the address of the monitor call.  If your job is at user
        level, the trap also occurs immediately.  Therefore, it is always
        possible to continue the interrupted program  after  trapping  to
        DDT by executing a JRSTF @.JBOPC.

        (For additional information on the  DDT  program,  refer  to  the
        TOPS-10 DDT Manual.)

   Format

        DDT







                                    2-67
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                DDT Command


   Characteristics

        Places your terminal at user level.

        If .JBDDT is zero, the monitor will merge  SYS:VMDDT.EXE  at
        location 700000.

   Example

        The following example shows how the DEBUG and  DDT  commands  are
        used.   Begin  by  writing  a  simple  program  with  a  spelling
        (syntactical) error.

        .TYPE TEST.MAC<RET>
           TITLE   TEST    SIMPLE PROGRAM
           SEARCH  MACTEN,UUOSYM

        HIMSG:     ASCIZ   \HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
        \
        TEST:      JCLF
                   RESET  
                   OUTSTR  HIMSG 
                   MONRT.  

                   END     TEST

        Use DEBUG to compile and load the program:

        .DEBUG TEST.MAC<RET>
        MACRO: TEST
        LINK: LOADING
        ?LNKUGS 1 UNDEFINED GLOBAL SYMBOL
           JCLF    0
        [LNKDEB DDT EXECUTION]
        DDT
        ^Z

        Loading showed that the program contained an error, which is then
        corrected  by  using  the  SOS  editor to replace "JCLF" with the
        correct "JFCL".

        .SOS TEST.MAC<RET>
        EDIT: TEST.MAC

        *SJCLF<ESC>JFCL<ESC>.<ESC><RET>
        600 TEST: JFCL
        *ES<RET>

        [DSKC:TEST.MAC]




                                    2-68
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                DDT Command


        After correcting the file, reload the program, again using DEBUG.

        .DEBUG TEST.MAC<RET>
        MACRO: TEST
        LINK: LOADING
        [LNKDEB DDT EXECUTION]
        DDT
        ^Z

        The debugger successfully loaded  the  program;  no  errors  were
        detected.  The new TEST.REL file automatically supersedes the old
        .REL file.  Next, save the core image of the loaded program,  and
        begin execution.

        .SAVE TEST<RET>
        TEST SAVED

        .START<RET>

        HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!

        The program ran successfully.  However, when you try to  run  the
        program  again  with the CONTINUE command, the command fails.  No
        provision has been made for rerunning the program.

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        ?ILLEGAL UUO AT USER PC 013303


        Start the debugger, using the DDT command:

        .DDT<RET>
        DDT

        13303/ 0  ^
        TEST+3/ MONRT.<LF>
        PAT../ 0 JRST TEST<RET>
        ^Z

        While running DDT, alter the core image of  the  program:   since
        the  error  was  reported  at address 13303 (octal), examine that
        address.  Then type an uparrow (^)  to  see  the  previous  line,
        which  is  the  last line of program code.  Then type a line-feed
        (<LF>) to see the next line.  "PAT.." is on the next line.  Here,
        insert the call "JRST TEST," then exit DDT.

        Next, start the program:

        .START<RET>

        HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!

                                    2-69
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                DDT Command


        Then CONTINUE the program.  The execution is successful.

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!


        Finally, edit the file with the changes made to the core image:

        .SOS TEST.MAC<RET>
        EDIT:TEST.MAC
        *P^:*<RET>
        100  TITLE TEST SIMPLE PROGRAM
        200  SEARCH MACTEN,UUOSYM
        300 
        400 HIMSG: ASCIZ \HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
        500 \
        600 TEST: JFCL   
        700  RESET
        800 OUTSTR HIMSG  
        900 MONRT.   
        1000 
        1100 END  TEST
        *I950<RET>
        950 JRST TEST  
        *ES<RET>
        [DSKC:TEST.MAC]

        Load the program, begin execution, and rerun the program:

        .LOAD TEST.MAC<RET>
        LINK: LOADING
        EXIT

        .START<RET>

        HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!

        .

        Execution is successful.








                                    2-70
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DEALLOCATE Command


                            DEALLOCATE Command



   Function

        The DEALLOCATE command removes a volume set from your job's  list
        of  allocated  resources.   DEALLOCATE  implies a DISMOUNT of the
        specified resource.  The logical  name  for  the  volume  set  is
        cleared,  and  you  will  not be able to use that logical-name to
        refer to the volume set.

   Format

        DEALLOCATE resource-name,resource-name...

        Where:    For disk volume sets, the resource-name is  the  volume
                  set-name or the structure name.

                  For tape volume sets, the resource-name is the  logical
                  name.

        DEALLOCATE has one switch:

        /HELP     Prints a short description  of  the  command.   If  you
                  specify an argument with this switch, the argument will
                  be ignored.

   Associated Commands

        ALLOCATE         Informs the system of your  future  need  for  a
                         resource.

        MOUNT            Requests ownership of a resource.

        DISMOUNT         Removes the  resource  from  your  job's  search
                         list.  Dismounts the volume set from the unit if
                         no other users are accessing the resource.

        SHOW ALLOCATION  Prints  a  list  of  the  resources   that   are
                         allocated and mounted for your job.

        SHOW QUEUE       Prints a list of the jobs in the system queues.

   Characteristics

        Runs the QUEUE program.

        Destroys your core image.

        Requires LOGIN.


                                    2-71
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DEALLOCATE Command


   Example

        The following example shows the use of the ALLOCATE,  DEALLOCATE,
        MOUNT, DISMOUNT, and SHOW ALLOCATION commands.  The resources are
        reserved for a multivolume tape  volume  set  with  the  ALLOCATE
        command.  The name of the volume set is TAPE-SET, and it contains
        three volumes.  The logical name TS is assigned to the tape  set.
        The tape is write enabled, and it does not have standard labels.

        .ALLOCATE TAPE-SET(VOL1,VOL2,VOL3):TS/WRITE-ENABLE/LABEL:NONE<RET>
        [ALLOCATE REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUESTS #672]

        A file structure named DSKR: is mounted for the job:

        .MOUNT DSKR:<RET>
        [MOUNT REQUEST DSKR QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
        [STRUCTURE DSKR MOUNTED]

        The job's resources are shown using the SHOW ALLOCATION command:

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
             VOLUME SET           RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        --------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   9 TK 800/1600      MAGTAPE UNIT  1    0
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     2    2
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1  
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKR                  DSKR               STRUCTURE     1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0




















                                    2-72
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DEALLOCATE Command


        The tape set is mounted, and the resources are again displayed:

        .MOUNT TS<RET>
        [MOUNT REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
        [MAGTAPE TS MOUNTED]

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
             VOLUME SET           RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        --------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   9TK 800/1600       MAGTAPE UNIT  1    1
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     2    2
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKR                  DSKR               STRUCTURE     1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0

        After work  is  finished  by  accessing  the  tape  set  and  the
        structure,  the  structure  is dismounted.  Because the structure
        was not explicitly allocated, it is automatically deallocated.

        .DISMOUNT  DSKR<RET>
        [STRUCTURE DSKR DISMOUNTED]

        The tape volume set is dismounted:

        .DISMOUNT TS<RET>
        [VOLUME SET TS DISMOUNTED]

        The job's resources are displayed:

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
             VOLUME SET           RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        --------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   9 TK 800/1600      MAGTAPE UNIT  1    0
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     1    1
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0





                                    2-73
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DEALLOCATE Command


        At this point, the tape set can again be mounted, or  it  can  be
        deallocated.  The tape set is deallocated:

        .DEALLOCATE TS<RET>
        [VOLUME SET TS HAS BEEN DEALLOCATED]

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
             VOLUME SET           RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        --------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     1    1
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1


        .



































                                    2-74
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DEASSIGN Command


                             DEASSIGN Command



   Function

        The DEASSIGN  command  returns  one  or  more  devices  currently
        assigned  to  your job to the monitor's pool of available devices
        and clears the logical names associated with them.   If  you  are
        running  an  assembly-language  program,  and have an INITialized
        device, it is not returned to the system's pool unless  you  have
        issued a RELEASE or RESET monitor call; only the device's logical
        name is cleared.

   Format

        DEASSIGN dev:

        Where:    dev:  is either the  logical  or  the  physical  device
                  name.   This  argument  is  optional.   If  you  do not
                  specify this argument, the system deassigns all devices
                  from  your  job except your job's controlling terminal.
                  Also, the system clears any logical name that might  be
                  associated with the controlling terminal.

   Associated Messages

        If you specify a nonexistent device, the monitor prints:

        ?NO SUCH DEVICE

        and leaves all current device  assignments.   If  you  specify  a
        device  that  has  never  been  ASSIGNed to your job, the monitor
        prints:

        ?devxxn WASN'T ASSIGNED

        and leaves all current job assignments.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not destroy your core image.

        Requires LOGIN.







                                    2-75
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DEASSIGN Command


   Example

        Assign a card reader to  your  job.   Card  reader  number  1  is
        assigned.

        .ASSIGN CDR:<RET>
        CDR261 ASSIGNED

        Card reader number 1 is busy because it is assigned to your  job.
        Show the devices that are busy.

        .SYSTAT B<RET>

        BUSY DEVICES:
        DEVICE    JOB    WHY    LOGICAL

        TTY144     18    INIT
        TTY235     18    INIT
        LPT260     18    INIT
        LPT261     18    INIT
        LPT263     18    INIT
        CDR260     18    INIT
        CDR261     24    AS

        Deassign the card reader.

        .DEASSIGN CDR<RET>

        Again, show the busy devices.

        .SYSTAT B<RET>

        BUSY DEVICES:
        DEVICE    JOB    WHY    LOGICAL

        TTY144     18    INIT
        TTY235     18    INIT
        LPT260     18    INIT
        LPT261     18    INIT
        LPT263     18    INIT
        CDR260     18    INIT

        Card reader 1 is not in the list of busy devices.  Therefore,  it
        is available to any user.









                                    2-76
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DEBUG Command


                               DEBUG Command



   Function

        The DEBUG command compiles the specified source files, loads  the
        resulting  .REL  files  (if  necessary),  and prepares the loaded
        program for debugging.  A  system  debugging  program  is  loaded
        first,  followed  by your program, including local symbols.  Upon
        completion of  loading,  the  system  transfers  control  to  the
        debugging program.

        The debugging program that is used depends on the first  file  in
        the  command string.  If this file is a COBOL source file, COBDDT
        (the COBOL debugging program) is used.  If the file is a  FORTRAN
        source file, FORDDT is used.

        Generally, a program debugged with  the  DEBUG  command  requires
        more  core  to  execute  than  the same program compiled with the
        EXECUTE  command  requires.   Extra  space  is  occupied  by  the
        debugging  program  and additional debugging information, such as
        local symbols.

        Each time the system executes a COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or  DEBUG
        command,  the  system  stores the command argument in a temporary
        file.  When you issue one of these  commands  without  arguments,
        the  system  uses  the  arguments  stored  in the temporary file.
        (Refer to Appendix C).  EXECUTE runs the COMPIL program before it
        runs the appropriate compiler and debugger.

   Format

        DEBUG file-spec

        Where:    file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
                  file specifications, separated by commas.

        The following switches can be used to modify the command string:

            Switch                         Function

        /ALGOL              Compiles the file with  ALGOL.   Assumed  for
                            files with the extension of .ALG.

        /BIN                Generates  a  binary  file  for   each   file
                            compiled.   The  file extension of the output
                            file is .REL.  This is the default action.

        /BLISS              Compiles the file with BLISS-10.  Assumed for
                            files with the extension of .B10 and .BLI.


                                    2-77
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DEBUG Command


        /C68                Runs the specified COBOL version.
        /C74

        /COBOL              Compiles the file with  COBOL.   Assumed  for
                            files with the extension of .CBL.

        /COMPILE            Forces a compilation of this file even  if  a
                            binary file exists with a newer date and time
                            than the source file.  This switch causes  an
                            extra compilation, because compilation is not
                            normally performed  if  the  binary  file  is
                            newer than the source file.

        /CREF               Produces a cross-referenced listing  file  on
                            the  disk  for  each  file compiled for later
                            processing by the  CREF  program.   The  file
                            extension  of  the  output file is .CRF.  The
                            file  can  then  be  listed  with  the   CREF
                            command.   However,  with  COBOL  files,  the
                            cross-referenced listing is  always  appended
                            to the listing file.  You must issue the CREF
                            command to obtain the listing.

        /DDT                Loads DDT and disregards the extension of the
                            first  file  in  the  command  string.   This
                            switch applies to all subsequent files.

        /DEBUG:             Passes  the  specified  arguments to FORTRAN.
         (arg, arg,...)     Refer to the TOPS-10/TOPS-20 FORTRAN Language
                            Manual.

        /DLIST              Creates a .LST file in your disk  area.   You
                            can  list  the  file on the line printer with
                            the PRINT command.

        /F10                Obsolete
        /F40

        /F66                Applies FORTRAN-66 rules  for  DO  loops  and
                            EXTERNAL statements.

        /FOROTS             Obsolete
        /FORSE

        /FORTRAN            Compiles the file with  a  FORTRAN  compiler.
                            Assumed  for files with the extension .F4 and
                            .FOR  and  all  files   with   unrecognizable
                            compiler   extensions,   if  FORTRAN  is  the
                            standard compiler.  This switch is  necessary
                            if  the  file  has  a unrecognizable compiler
                            extension and FORTRAN  is  not  the  standard
                            compiler or is not the current default.

                                    2-78
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DEBUG Command


        /FUDGE:file         Creates a disk file containing the  names  of
                            the   .REL  files  produced  by  the  command
                            string.  When the FUDGE switch is given,  PIP
                            reads  this  file  to generate a library .REL
                            file.    (Refer   to   the   FUDGE    command
                            description.)  The argument to this switch is
                            a valid file specification, as  described  in
                            Section 1.9.

        /GFLOAT             Indicates that double-precision  numbers  are
                            to  be  stored  in  G-floating  format.  This
                            format has an extended exponent range.   This
                            option is available on KL10 processors only.

        /K?10               Designates the processor  where  the  program
                            will execute after it has been loaded.  These
                            switches   are   necessary   for   FORTRAN-10
                            programs   because   the  compiler  generates
                            different  codes  for  different  processors.
                            The  default  is  the  processor  where  your
                            program is running.  The ?  can  be  replaced
                            by L or S.

        /LIBRARY            Loads the file in library search mode.   This
                            mode  causes  a  program  file  in  a special
                            library to be loaded only if one or  more  of
                            its   declared  entry  symbols  satisfies  an
                            undefined global request in the source  file.
                            The  system  libraries  are  always searched.
                            (See the LINK documentation.) /LIBRARY is the
                            same as /SEARCH.

        /LINK               Obsolete

        /LIST               Generates a disk listing file for  each  file
                            compiled.   The  file extension of the output
                            file is .LST.   These  files  can  be  listed
                            later  with  the  PRINT command.  If the line
                            printer is being spooled for  this  job,  the
                            listing files are written on device LPT:  and
                            are automatically spooled when you log out.

        /LMAP               Produces a  loader  map  during  the  loading
                            process that contains the local symbols.

        /LOADER             Obsolete

        /MACRO              Assembles the file with MACRO.   Assumed  for
                            files with the .MAC extension.




                                    2-79
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DEBUG Command


        /MACY11             Assembles the file with MACY11.  Assumed  for
                            files  with  the .P11 extension.  This switch
                            is not supported.

        /MANTIS             Compiles the file with the  MANTIS  debugging
                            information.   This switch affects FORTRAN-40
                            programs only.  This switch is not supported.

        /MAP:file           Produces a loader map  during  loading.   The
                            file  name  can be specified.  If the file is
                            not specified, the default is MAP.MAP.

        /NEW                Runs the appropriate language  compiler  from
                            the experimental system library (device NEW:)
                            area [1,5].  If the compiler does  not  exist
                            on  device  NEW:,  COMPIL  tries to obtain it
                            from device SYS:.

        /NOBIN              Does not generate binary files.  Binary files
                            are  generated  unless  you give this switch.
                            This switch, when combined with the /LIST  or
                            /CREF   switch,   is  useful  when  compiling
                            programs solely for the purpose of generating
                            a listing.

        /NOCOMPILE          Complement  to  the  /COMPILE  switch,   this
                            switch  does  not  force  a  compilation on a
                            source file whose date is not  as  recent  as
                            the  date  on  the  binary file.  This switch
                            differs from the  /REL  switch,  in  that  it
                            turns off all compilation, even if the source
                            file is newer than the .REL file.  /NOCOMPILE
                            is the default action.

        /NODEBUG            Does not pass arguments that were  previously
                            specified to FORTRAN.

        /NOLIST             Does not generate listing files.  This is the
                            default action.

        /NOMANTIS           Compiles  the   file   without   the   MANTIS
                            debugging  information.   This switch affects
                            FORTRAN-40 programs only.  This switch is not
                            supported.

        /NOOPTIMIZE         Does not optimize the object source code  for
                            FORTRAN programs.






                                    2-80
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DEBUG Command


        /NOSEARCH           Loads all routines of the  file  whether  the
                            routines are referenced or not.  Because this
                            is the default action, this  switch  is  used
                            only   to   turn   off  library  search  mode
                            (/LIBRARY).   The  /NOSEARCH  default  is  to
                            search the system libraries.

        /OLD                Runs the appropriate language  compiler  from
                            the  system  library  of old programs (device
                            OLD:), which resides on disk area [1,3].   If
                            the  compiler  does not exist on device OLD:,
                            COMPIL tries to obtain it from device SYS:.

        /OPTIMIZE           Optimizes the object source code for  FORTRAN
                            programs.

        /PAL10              Assembles the file with PAL10.   Assumed  for
                            files with the .PAL extension.

        /PASCAL             Compiles the file with Pascal.   Assumed  for
                            files with the .PAS extension.

        /REL                Uses the existing .REL files  although  newer
                            source files might be present.

        /SAVE               Saves the core image of the loaded program.

        /SEARCH             Loads the files in library search mode.   The
                            action  is  identical to that of the /LIBRARY
                            switch.

        /SELF               Runs the appropriate language  compiler  from
                            device  DSK:   instead  of  from  the  system
                            library (device SYS:).  This switch is useful
                            if  you  keep a private copy of a compiler in
                            your own disk area.

        /SNOBOL             Compiles the file with SNOBOL.   Assumed  for
                            files  with  the .SNO extension.  This switch
                            is not supported.

        /SSAVE              Saves the core image of the loaded program in
                            a sharable executable file.

        /SYS                Runs the appropriate language processor  from
                            the  system  library  (device  SYS:)  area of
                            [1,4].  This is the default action.






                                    2-81
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DEBUG Command


   Restriction

        A language processor appearing more than  once  within  a  single
        command  string  cannot  specify  more  than  one disk area.  For
        example, the following is invalid:

        .DEBUG MAIN.MAC/SELF,PART1.MAC/OLD

        However, the following is valid:

        .COMPILE MAIN.MAC/SELF
        .COMPILE PART1.MAC/OLD
        .DEBUG /REL MAIN,PART1

   Characteristics

        Places your terminal at user level.

        Runs  the   appropriate  processor,   LINK,   and  the  debugger,
        destroying your core image.

   Example

        The following example shows how the DEBUG and  DDT  commands  are
        used.   Begin  by  writing  a  simple  program  with  a  spelling
        (syntactical) error.

        .TYPE TEST.MAC<RET>
         TITLE TEST SIMPLE PROGRAM
         SEARCH MACTEN,UUOSYM

        HIMSG: ASCIZ \HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
        \
        TEST: JCLF
         RESET  
         OUTSTR HIMSG 
         MONRT.  

         END TEST

        Use DEBUG to compile and load the program:

        .DEBUG TEST.MAC<RET>
        MACRO: TEST
        LINK: LOADING
        ?LNKUGS 1 UNDEFINED GLOBAL SYMBOL
         JCLF 0
        [LNKDEB DDT EXECUTION]
        DDT
        ^Z



                                    2-82
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DEBUG Command


        Loading showed that the program contained an error, which is then
        corrected  by  using  the  SOS  editor to replace "JCLF" with the
        correct "JFCL".

        .SOS TEST.MAC<RET>
        EDIT: TEST.MAC

        *SJCLF<ESC>JFCL<ESC>.<ESC><RET>
        600 TEST: JFCL
        *ES<RET>

        [DSKC:TEST.MAC]

        After correcting the file, reload the program, again using DEBUG.

        .DEBUG TEST.MAC<RET>
        MACRO: TEST
        LINK: LOADING
        [LNKDEB DDT EXECUTION]
        DDT
        ^Z

        The debugger successfully loaded  the  program;  no  errors  were
        detected.  The new TEST.REL file automatically supersedes the old
        .REL file.  Next, save the core image of the loaded program,  and
        begin execution.

        .SAVE TEST<RET>
        TEST SAVED

        .START<RET>

        HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!

        The program ran successfully.  However, when you try to  run  the
        program  again  with the CONTINUE command, the command fails.  No
        provision has been made for rerunning the program.

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        ?ILLEGAL UUO AT USER PC 013303

        Start the debugger, using the DDT command:

        .DDT<RET>
        DDT

        13303/ 0  ^
        TEST+3/ MONRT.<LF>

        PAT. ./ O JRST TEST<RET>
        ^Z

                                    2-83
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DEBUG Command


        While running DDT, alter the core image of  the  program:   since
        the  error  was  reported  at address 13303 (octal), examine that
        address.  Then type an uparrow (^)  to  see  the  previous  line,
        which  is  the  last line of program code.  Then type a line-feed
        (<LF>) to see the next line.  "PAT.." is on the next line.  Here,
        insert the call "JRST TEST," then exit DDT.

        Next, START the program:

        .START<RET>

        HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!

        Then CONTINUE the program.  The execution is successful.

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!


        Finally, edit the file with the changes made to the core image:

        .SOS TEST.MAC<RET>
        EDIT:TEST.MAC
        *P^:*<RET>
        100  TITLE TEST SIMPLE PROGRAM
        200  SEARCH MACTEN,UUOSYM
        300
        400 HIMSG: ASCIZ \HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
        500 \
        600 TEST: JFCL   
        700  RESET
        800  OUTSTR HIMSG  
        900  MONRT.   
        1000 
        1100  END   TEST
        *I950<RET>
        950  JRST TEST  
        *ES<RET>
        [DSKC:TEST.MAC]













                                    2-84
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DEBUG Command


        Load the program, begin execution, and run the program again:

        .LOAD TEST.MAC<RET>
        LINK: LOADING
        EXIT

        .START<RET>

        HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!

        .

        Execution is successful.




































                                    2-85
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DECLARE Command


                              DECLARE Command



   Function

        The DECLARE command defines new monitor commands to run specified
        programs  for  your  job.   You  can  invoke  any  program with a
        user-defined command.  When you define  a  command,  the  monitor
        searches  your  command table and then the monitor command table.
        Exact definitions are  given  precedence.   An  exact  definition
        occurs  if  you  type  the complete, exact command name.  Inexact
        definitions occur when a command is abbreviated.   If  there  are
        conflicts  within  the  exact  definitions,  your definitions are
        given precedence.

        To use abbreviations  when  typing  a  command,  you  can  define
        "uniqueness"  for  a  command.  The monitor will behave as if the
        command had been given an exact definition.  If conflicts  arise,
        the monitor searches its own command table without searching your
        command table.

   Format

        DECLARE name/switch=filespec

        Where:    name  is  a  command  name  of  1  to  6   alphanumeric
                  characters.

                  filespec is  the  complete  file  specification  of  an
                  executable program.  There is no default filespec.

                  /switch is one of the optional switches listed below.

        Switches allowed by this command are:

         Switch                          Function

        /AUTOPUSH      Defines a command to automatically PUSH to a  new,
                       temporary  context,  in  which  the called program
                       will run.  When  the  program  is  completed,  the
                       original  context  is  restored, and the temporary
                       context is destroyed.

                                              NOTE

                           Do not define the PATH or DECLARE programs
                           with the AUTOPUSH switch.  This is because
                           the original context is restored  and  all
                           changes  made in the temporary context are
                           destroyed when they finish running.


                                    2-86
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DECLARE Command


        /CLEAR         Clears all user-defined commands.  Do not  include
                       a command name with this switch.

        /KILL          Removes the definition of a command.   Requires  a
                       command name.

        /LIST          Lists the command names currently defined by  your
                       job.   Do  not  include  a  command name with this
                       switch.

        /UNIQUE:n      Defines the number of characters  in  the  command
                       that  must  be  typed  to  be  interpreted as your
                       definition and that  cannot  be  overridden  by  a
                       monitor  command.   The variable n can be 1, 2, 3,
                       4, ALL, NONE, or a list of these values  separated
                       by  commas and enclosed in parentheses.  /NOUNIQUE
                       is the same as /UNIQUE:NONE.

   Characteristics

        Requires LOGIN.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.

   Example

        Use DECLARE to define a command, LOOK, to run the SETSRC program.

        .DECLARE LOOK=SYS:SETSRC.EXE<RET>

        Use DECLARE to display your job's command list.   Other  commands
        in the following example were defined previously.

        .DECLARE/LIST<RET>

             EDIT DSR    TAPE LOOK















                                    2-87
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DECLARE Command


        Use the new command.  Use CTRL/T to display the current state  of
        your  job,  including  the  name  of the program that is running.
        Note that, although CTRL/T is shown here, it  does  not  echo  on
        your terminal.

        .LOOK<RET>

        *<CTRL/T>

        Day:  1:02:23 Run:  0.13 Rd:32 Wr:0 SETSRC 4+OP T1 PC:002030
        Input wait for TTY52:
        <CTRL/Z>
        EXIT

        .






































                                    2-88
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DELETE Command


                              DELETE Command



   Function

        The DELETE command deletes files.  Because  of  protection  codes
        associated with files, it is not usually possible to delete files
        in another user's directory.  Once a file is deleted,  it  cannot
        be recovered.

   Format

        DELETE file-spec

        Where:    file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
                  file  specifications,  separated  by  commas.  The full
                  wildcard construction (* and ?) can be used in the file
                  specification.  (Refer to Section 1.11.)

                  If you do not specify a device name or a file structure
                  name,  your job's search list is used.  You can specify
                  a  directory  name  before  the  file  names  and  that
                  directory  becomes the default for all subsequent files
                  in that command line.  If you specify a directory  name
                  after  a  file name, the directory applies only to that
                  file.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Runs the PIP program.

        Requires LOGIN.

        Permanently deletes the file(s).

        Destroys your core image.














                                    2-89
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DELETE Command


   Examples

        1.  Delete all files with .MAC extension.

            .DELETE *.MAC<RET>

            FILES DELETED:
            DSKB:T1.MAC
            DSKB:T2.MAC
            DSKB:T3.MAC
            14 BLOCKS FREED

            .

        2.  Delete the file TEST.FOR.

            .DELETE DSKC:TEST.FOR<RET>

            FILES DELETED:
            DSKC:TEST.FOR
            3 BLOCKS FREED

            .

        3.  Delete all files with  the  file  name  TEST  followed  by  2
            alphanumeric characters or less, and the extension .FOR.

            .DELETE TEST??.FOR<RET>

            FILES DELETED:
            DSKB:TEST1.FOR
            DSKB:TEST2.FOR
            DSKB:TEST22.FOR
            DSKB:TESTER.FOR
            23 BLOCKS FREED

            .
















                                    2-90
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DEPOSIT Command


                              DEPOSIT Command



   Function

        The DEPOSIT command deposits information in your core area  (high
        or low segment).  This function is useful for debugging programs.

   Format

        D lh rh addr

        Where:    lh is the octal value to be deposited in the left  half
                  of the location.  This argument is required.

                  rh is the octal value to be deposited in the right half
                  of the location.  This argument is required.

                  addr is the address of  the  location  into  which  the
                  information  is  to  be  deposited.   This  argument is
                  optional.  If you omit the address, the system deposits
                  the  data  into  the location following the address you
                  specified in the last D command or  into  the  location
                  you  looked  at  with your last E command.  The command
                  used is the one specified most recently.

   Characteristics

        Requires LOGIN.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Requires core.

   Example

        Deposit in location 141.

        .D 266000 2616 141<RET>

        Examine location 140.

        .E 140<RET>
        000140/ 265720 40011

        Because the address is  omitted,  the  deposit  made  is  in  the
        location of the last E command (that is, location 140).

        .D 47000 1<RET>



                                    2-91
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DEPOSIT Command


        Examine the location specified in the previous D command.

        .E<RET>
        000140/ 047000 000001
        .
















































                                    2-92
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DETACH Command


                              DETACH Command



   Function

        The DETACH command disconnects the terminal from your job without
        changing  the status of your job.  Your terminal is then free, so
        that you can start a new job, attach to another detached job,  or
        cause your terminal to become a slave terminal for another job.

   Format

        DETACH

   Characteristics

        Detaches your terminal.

        Does not destroy your core image.

        Requires LOGIN.

   Restrictions

        This command is not available to batch users.

   Example

        Show the status of your job.

        .SYSTAT .<RET>
        1   27,5434   TTY263   SYSTAT   6+7     ^C

        .

        System message shows that  your  terminal  line  number  is  263.
        Detach your terminal.

        .DETACH<RET>
        FROM JOB 24

        Show the status of your job.

        .SYSTAT .<RET>
        1   27,5434   DET   SYSTAT   6+7     ^C

        .

        System message shows your job is detached.



                                    2-93
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


                             DIRECTORY Command



   Function

        The DIRECTORY command prints a  list  of  the  file  names  in  a
        specified  directory  area.   The standard output consists of the
        following information:  file name, file name extension, length of
        the  file  in  blocks,  protection  code,  creation date, version
        number, account, structure name, and directory name.

   Format

        DIRECTORY output file-spec=input file-spec

        Where:    input file-spec is a single file  specification,  or  a
                  string  of  file  specifications separated by commas or
                  plus signs.  The devices used on  input  can  be  DSK:,
                  DTA:,  or  MTA:   If the device is a magnetic tape, the
                  tape is rewound before and after the listing  operation
                  and  analyzed to determine if it is a BACKUP tape.  The
                  default input specification is DSK:*.*, and  the  files
                  in  all  file  structures  defined by your job's search
                  list are listed.  Generally, a device name,  file  name
                  extension,  or  a directory name that precedes the file
                  name becomes the default for all  succeeding  files  in
                  the list.

                  output file-spec = This argument and the equal sign are
                  optional.  If you omit the entire output specification,
                  the default is TTY:.  If you do not specify  an  output
                  device,  the  default  device  is  DSK:.  If you do not
                  specify an output file name, and  one  is  needed,  the
                  file  name is generated from the time of day as hhmmss.
                  The default output extension is .DIR.

        The full wildcard construction (* and/or ?) can be  used  in  the
        input  file-spec.  When a wildcard designation is used, DIRECTORY
        limits its search for the file to certain directories.  When  you
        give  a  wildcard  designation  for a file name or extension, the
        program only searches the specified  directory  or  your  default
        directory.   No  additional devices, such as LIB:  or SYS:, which
        might be in your default path, are searched.  (Refer  to  Section
        1.14,  and  to  the  PATH monitor call description in the TOPS-10
        Monitor Calls Manual, for information about directory paths.)

        If you use the wildcard construction in the directory name,  only
        the   directories   implied  by  the  wildcard  construction  are
        searched.  No additional directories are searched.



                                    2-94
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


        The following  switches  can  be  used  in  the  command  string.
        Generally,  any switches can be used together in the same command
        string, unless the switches  contradict  one  another.   Switches
        that  precede the file name become the default for all succeeding
        files in the same command line.

        You can abbreviate switches as long  as  the  result  is  unique.
        This  is not recommended for batch control files.  Spaces are not
        permitted within a switch.


             Switch                            Function

        /ACCESS:n           Updates the access date  of  any  file  of  n
                            blocks  or less to the current date.  Because
                            some installations delete files that have not
                            been  recently  accessed,  this switch allows
                            you to prevent such deletion by updating  the
                            files.   n is a decimal number, and refers to
                            the number of  blocks  written  in  the  file
                            unless  the  /ALLOC  switch is also used.  If
                            you omit the /ACCESS switch, the system  does
                            not  change the date.  If you specify /ACCESS
                            but you omit :n, 5 is assumed.

        /ACCOUNT            Prints the account name associated with  that
                            file.  The account you are logged in under is
                            stored in the RIB of  all  files  created  or
                            superseded.

        /ALLOCATED          Lists  the  allocated  length  of  the   file
                            instead  of  the  written length.  Space on a
                            structure is sometimes allocated in units  of
                            more   than   one   block   for   efficiency.
                            Therefore, the number of blocks allocated  to
                            a  file  can  be  greater  than the number of
                            blocks actually written.  The LOGOUT  program
                            uses   the  allocated  length  when  checking
                            quotas.  The total allocated  length  of  all
                            files is the same as the length output by the
                            QUOLST  program  under   the   USED   column.
                            Normally,  when a file is created, the system
                            allocates 30 blocks for it.  Then the  system
                            deallocates unused blocks after file creation
                            is complete.  This switch is  the  complement
                            to the /WRITTEN switch.

        /ANYDEVICE          Searches all devices.

        /AUTHOR             Prints the project-programmer number  of  the
                            author of the file.


                                    2-95
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


        /BEFORE:date-time   Lists  those   files   created   before   the
                            specified   date   and   time.    Default  is
                            +infinity.  Refer to Section 1.8.3.
|  
|       /BLOCKINGFACTOR:n   Sets the number of disk blocks per tape block
|                           read  from  tape.  The default value is 4 for
|                           compatability with tapes  written  by  BACKUP
|                           without   blocking-factor   capability.   The
|                           specified value must be in the range of 4  to
|                           96,  and must be a multiple of 4 disk blocks.
|                           Due to KS10 UNIBUS adapter  limitations,  the
|                           maximum blocking-factor on a KS10 is 56.

        /BLOCKS             Prints the length  of  the  file  in  blocks.
                            This is the default.  Complement to /WORDS.

        /CHECKSUM           Computes and prints an  18-bit  checksum  for
                            each  file.   This  checksum  is  computed by
                            rotating the  result  to  the  left  one  bit
                            before   adding  each  word.   Complement  to
                            /NOCHECKSUM.

        /COMPARE            Suppresses headers and  titles,  as  well  as
                            error messages in the output.  This makes the
                            output  file  suitable  for  comparison  with
                            another   file  (with  FILCOM).   Default  is
                            /NOCOMPARE.

        /DENSITY:n          Uses the specified  density  when  reading  a
                            magnetic  tape.  n is 200, 556, 800, 1600, or
                            6250  bpi.   The  default  depends  on   your
                            installation.   You  can  change  the default
                            with the SET DENSITY command.

        /DETAIL             Prints  all  available  information  about  a
                            file.  The information includes:

                            The full file specification for the file.
                            The access date.
                            The time and date of creation.
                            The access protection  code  associated  with
                              the file.
                            The data mode that the file is written in.
                            The estimated length of the file.
                            The blocks allocated for the file.
                            The data block in the directory in which  the
                              file is located.
                            The internal date and time of creation.
                            The RIB block number.

                            All numbers that are followed  by  a  decimal


                                    2-96
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


                            point  are  decimal values; all other numbers
                            are  octal.   The  project-programmer  number
                            associated  with  the file is printed only if
                            it is not the same as that of  the  user  who
                            issued the DIRECTORY command.

        /DIRECT             Provides ASCII-formatted  output.   This  the
                            default.  Complement to /NODIRECT.













































                                    2-97
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


        /DSKONLY            Searches all disk devices.

        /DTA                Lists the directory in old DECtape form.

        /EOTS               Stops  at  the  logical  end  of  tape   (two
                            consecutive   tape   marks)  when  reading  a
                            magnetic  tape.   This   is   the   default. 
                            Complement to /NOEOTS.

        /ERLOG              Enables  automatic  device   error   logging.
                            Complement   to   /NOERLOG.  /ERLOG   is  the
                            default.

        /FAST               Lists short form of  directory:   file  name,
                            extension,   structure  name,  and  directory
                            name.   Abbreviated  to  /F.   Complement  to
                            /NORMAL and /SLOW.

        /FILES:n            Stops after n files when reading  a  magnetic
                            tape.  If you specify /FILES but you omit :n,
                            5 is assumed.  When the  system  reaches  the
                            logical EOT, it will stop reading the tape.

        /FIND               Looks for the Find Files  for  the  directory
                            listing rather than the devices.  A Find File
                            is the binary output of a directory  listing,
                            and  is  created  with  the  /FNDBLD  switch.
                            /FIND   looks   for   the   Find   File    in
                            SYS:FNDDAT.FDF  or  .FPF.   You  can  use the
                            /FNDDAT switch to specify the  file  name  of
                            the Find File.

        /FLSDIR             Prints each file's device  and  directory  to
                            the  right  of  the  first line of output for
                            each directory.  Complement to /NOFLSDIR, the
                            default  is /FLSDIR, unless /HDSDIR or /WIDTH
                            is specified.

        /FNDBLD             Creates Find Files from the DIRECTORY output.
                            A  Find  File  is  the  binary  output from a
                            DIRECTORY listing.  Find Files are useful for
                            archiving  and  retrieving  files on magnetic
                            tape.  The file name of the Find File is that
                            specified  in the output specification of the
                            command format.  If you do  not  specify  the
                            output    file    name,    the   default   is
                            DSK:FNDDAT.FDF or .FPF.  The files can  later
                            be  accessed  with  the  /FIND  switch.   The
                            complement   to   /FDNBLD    is    /NOFDNBLD.
                            /NOFNDBLD is the default.



                                    2-98
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


        /FNDDAT:file        Specifies the file name of the Find Files  to
                            be  read  for  the directory listing.  A Find
                            File is the binary  output  for  a  directory
                            listing,  and  is  created  with  the /FNDBLD
                            switch.  You must use the /FIND  switch  with
                            the /FNDDAT switch.

        /HDSDIR             Prints the device and  directory  information
                            of  the  file  as  a  separate  header  line,
                            immediately preceding the  directory  listing
                            for   each   directory.    Complementary   to
                            /FLSDIR.  The default  is  /NOHDSDIR,  unless
                            /WIDTH and /NOFLSDIR are specified.

        /HELP:arg           Prints DIRECTORY help text on your  terminal.
                            /HELP   can  be  abbreviated  to  /H.   Valid
                            arguments are:  TEXT, KEYWORDS, and SWITCHES.
                            TEXT  is  the default argument; it prints the
                            entire   DIRECT.HLP   file.    The   KEYWORDS
                            argument  (K)  lists  and describes all LOGIN
                            switches  which   take   keyword   arguments.
                            SWITCHES  (S)  briefly  lists  all  DIRECTORY
                            switches without explanations.  Switches that
                            have   a   single-letter   abbreviation   are
                            prefixed with an asterisk.

        /INDIRECT           Creates the output listing file in  a  format
                            suitable  for  use  as  a  command file to be
                            input to other programs.

        /LENGTH:n:m         Processes only files whose length is  between
                            n and m blocks.

        /LIST               Queues   the   output   to    device    LPT:.
                            Abbreviated to /L.  Refer to the LIST command
                            for restrictions on this switch.

        /MARKS              Indicates each tape mark and UFD when reading
                            a magnetic tape.  Complement of /NOMARKS.

        /MVOLUME            When  reading  BACKUP  and  DUMPER   magnetic
                            tapes,  asks  the  user to mount another reel
                            when the end of tape is  encountered  in  the
                            middle   of   a   save  set.   Complement  to
                            /NOMVOLUME, the default is /NOMVOLUME.

        /NOAUTHOR           Does not print the project-programmer  number
                            of  the  author  of  the  file.   This is the
                            default.  Complement to /AUTHOR.




                                    2-99
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


        /NOCHECKSUM         Does not  compute  and  print  the  checksum.
                            This   is   the   default.    Complement   of
                            /CHECKSUM.

        /NOCOMPARE          Prints the normal headers, titles, and  error
                            messages.    Complement   to   /COMPARE,  the
                            default is /NOCOMPARE.

        /NODETAIL           Does not print the words in the LOOKUP block.
                            This is the default.  Complement to /DETAIL.

        /NODIRECT           Does not  print  the  normal  ASCII  listing.
                            Complement   to   /DIRECT,   the  default  is
                            /DIRECT.

        /NOEOTS             Does not stop at the logical end of tape when
                            reading   a  magnetic  tape.   Complement  to
                            /EOTS.

        /NOERLOG            Does  not  enable  automatic   device   error
                            logging.    /ERLOG   is   the  compliment  to
                            /NOERLOG, and the default.

        /NOFIND             Does not look for Find Files for the  output.
                            Complement to /FIND, the default is /NOFIND.

        /NOFLSDIR           Does  not  print  each  file's   device   and
                            directory  to the right of the first line for
                            each   directory   listed.    Complement   to
                            /FLSDIR;   the  default  is  /FLSDIR,  unless
                            /HDSDIR or /WIDTH is specified.

        /NOFNDBLD           Does not make a Find File  from  the  output.
                            Complement   to   /FNDBLD;   the  default  is
                            /NOFNDBLD.

        /NOHDSDIR           Does not print the device and directory as  a
                            header for each directory listed.  Complement
                            to /HDSDIR, the default is /NOHDSDIR,  unless
                            /WIDTH is specified.

        /NOINDIRECT         Does not format the output listing so that it
                            can   be   used   as   input  to  a  program.
                            Complement  to  /INDIRECT,  the  default   is
                            /NOINDIRECT.

        /NOMARKS            Does not indicate each tape mark and UFD when
                            reading   a   magnetic  tape.   This  is  the
                            default.  Complement to /MARKS.




                                   2-100
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


        /NOMVOLUME          When using BACKUP or DUMPER, does not ask the
                            user  to mount another magnetic tape when the
                            end of tape comes in the  middle  of  a  save
                            set.   Complement to /MVOLUME, the default is
                            /NOMVOLUME.

        /NOPRDEVICE         Does not print the device  name.   Complement
                            to /PRDEVICE.

        /NOPRDIRECTORY      Does not print the directory.  Complement  to
                            /PRDIRECTORY.

        /NOPRVERSION        Suppresses printing the version number of the
                            files.  The normal listing prints the version
                            number only if it is not zero.  Complement to
                            /PRVERSION.

        /NORETRY            Disables automatic error retry when reading a
                            file.   Generates  error  messages  for  soft
                            errors.  Complement to /RETRY, the default is
                            /RETRY.

        /NOREWIND           Does not rewind the  tape  before  and  after
                            reading   a  magnetic  tape.   Complement  to
                            /REWIND.

        /NORMAL             Prints the normal directory list.  This  list
                            includes  the file name, extension, length in
                            blocks written,  protection,  creation  date,
                            structure  name, nonzero version numbers, and
                            directory  name.   Complement  to  /FAST  and
                            /SLOW.  This is the default.  Use this switch
                            to  override  a  /FAST  or  /SLOW   in   your
                            SWITCH.INI file.

        /NOSORT             Does not produce a file suitable for sorting.
                            This is the default.  Complement to /SORT.

        /NOSUMMARY          Does not  use  summary  mode.   This  is  the
                            default.  Complement to /SUMMARY.

        /NOTITLE            Does not print page  headers.   This  is  the
                            default   for   output   to   the   terminal.
                            Complement to /TITLE.

        /NOUNITS            Does not list the name  of  the  actual  disk
                            unit; instead, just lists the structure name.
                            This is the default.  Complement to /UNITS.

        /OKNONE             Suppresses the  error  message  if  no  files
                            match the wildcard construction.


                                   2-101
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


        /OPTION:name        Reads your option file (DSK:SWITCH.INI[,]) to
                            determine  your specified switch defaults for
                            DIRECT.  The name appearing as the  value  of
                            the switch is the pointer to the line to read
                            in  the  file.   For  example,  if  the  file
                            contains the line:

                            DIRECT:ALL/DETAIL

                            then you reference this line  by  typing  the
                            command:

                            DIRECT/OPTION:ALL

                            Refer   to   Appendix   B   for    additional
                            information.

        /PARITY:ODD         Specifies the parity to be used  when reading
        /PARITY:EVEN        a magnetic tape.  The default is :ODD.

        /PHYSICAL           Ignores  logical  names.   Refer  to  Section
                            1.9.1 for a description of logical names.

        /PRDEVICE           Prints the name of the device for each file.

        /PRDIRECTORY        Prints the name of  the  directory  for  each
                            file.

        /PROTECTION:nnn     Gives the  output  file  the  protection  nnn
                            (octal).   Protection  codes are discussed in
                            Section 1.9.4.

        /PRVERSION          Prints the version of each file.  If  you  do
                            not  specify  this  switch, the default is to
                            print the version only if  it  is  not  zero.
                            The complement is /NOPRVERSION.

        /RETRY              Enables automatic error retry when reading  a
                            file.  Complement to /NORETRY, the default is
                            /RETRY.

        /REWIND             Rewinds the magnetic tape  before  and  after
                            reading it.  This is the default.  Complement
                            to /NOREWIND.

        /RUN:file-spec      Runs the specified program when this  command
                            is finished.

        /RUNOFFSET:n        Runs the program specified with /RUN with  an
                            offset  of  n.   If  you omit the switch, the
                            default is 0; if  you  omit  the  value,  the
                            default is 1.

                                   2-102
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


        /SINCE:date-time    Lists only  those  files  created  after  the
                            specified  date  and  time.   The  default is
                            January 1, 1964.  Refer to Section 1.8.3.

        /SLOW               Prints a full listing that includes the  file
                            name,  extension,  length  in blocks written,
                            protection, access date,  creation  time  and
                            date,  structure  name,  and  directory name.
                            Equivalent to /S.  Complement  to  /FAST  and
                            /NORMAL.  (Disk and magnetic tape only.)

        /SORT               Lists the file structure name  and  directory
                            name  for each file.  The file structure name
                            is output  for  every  file  if  you  do  not
                            specify  a file structure name in the command
                            string or if you specify generic  DSK:.   The
                            wildcard   construction   is   used   in  the
                            directory name.   TABs  are  space-filled  to
                            maintain  a  constant number of characters in
                            any given line.   Project-programmer  numbers
                            include  leading  zeros;  the date is in ANSI
                            format:  19721009 for Oct 9, 1972.  Use  this
                            switch  to prepare a file to be sorted by the
                            SORT program.  (See the COBOL documentation.)
                            Complement to /NOSORT.

        /SUMMARY            Prints only the summary line  that  indicates
                            the  total  number  of  blocks  and files.  A
                            /FAST/SUMMARY prints a /FAST listing followed
                            by the summary.

        /TITLE              Causes a heading to be output  on  each  page
                            consisting  of a label for each column, date,
                            time, and page number.   Standard  output  to
                            the    line   printer   has   this   heading.
                            Complement to /NOTITLE.

        /TMPCOR             Lists the directory in old TMPCOR format.

        /UNITS              Lists the name of the  actual  disk  unit  on
                            which  the  files  are  stored instead of the
                            file structure name.  Complement to /NOUNITS.

        /WIDTH:n            Prints several entries on a  single  line  to
                            make  the  output  appear  in  columns.   The
                            default for n is the terminal carriage width.
                            (See the SET TTY WIDTH command.)

        /WORDS              Prints  the  length  of  the  file  in  words
                            instead of blocks.  Complement to /BLOCKS.



                                   2-103
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


        /WRITTEN            Prints the written length of the file  rather
                            than  the  allocated  length.   This  is  the
                            default.  Complement to /ALLOCATED.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.

   Examples

        1.  List all files on DSKB:.

            .DIRECT DSKB:<RET>

            FILE    DAT    220 <055> dd-mmm-yy 31(225) DSKB: [27,5055]
            SWITCH  INI     10 <057> dd-mmm-yy
            PROG    MAC      5 <055> dd-mmm-yy

            .

        2.  List all files with extension .MAC in all file structures  in
            your job's search list.

            .DIRECT *.MAC<RET>

            PROG MAC  5 <057> dd-mmm-yy 31(225) DSKB:[27,5055]
            FILE MAC  1 <055> dd-mmm-yy 30(201) DSKC:[27,5055]

            .

        3.  List the directory entry for the file TEST.F4  in  user  area
            [27,4072].

            .DIR TEST.F4[27,4072]<RET>

            TEST F4  6 <055> dd-mmm-yy 31(225) DSKC:[27,4072]

            .

        4.  List all files in sub-file directory WIZZER.SFD in the  [7,2]
            area on BLKT:.

            .DIR BLKT:[7,2,WIZZER]<RET>

            ATTA   TST    1 <055> dd-mmm-yy BLKT:[7,2,WIZZER]
            NEW    ALG    4 <055> dd-mmm-yy
            ALGOL  DOC   20 <055> dd-mmm-yy

            .


                                   2-104
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


        5.  Show the switches to the DIRECT command.

            .DIRECT/HELP:SWITCHES<RET>

            DIRECT switches are: 

            ACCESS, ACCOUN, *ALLOC, AUTHOR, CHECKS, COMPAR, DETAIL, 
            DIRECT, DTA,    EOTS,   ERLOG,  *FAST,  FILES,  FIND,
            FLSDIR, FNDBLD, FNDDAT, HDSDIR, *INDIR, *LIST,  MARKS,
            MVOLUM, *NORMA, PRDEVI, PRDIRE, PRVERS, RETRY,  REWIND,
            SBRMSG, *SLOW,  SORT,   SUMMAR, TITLES, TMPCOR, UNITS, 
            *WIDTH, WORDS,  WRITTE

            Standard switches are: 
            ABEFOR, ALLOCA, ANYDEV, APPEND, ASCII,  ASINCE, BEFORE,
            BINARY, BLOCKS, BYTESI, BUFFER, CONTIG, DATAMO, DELETE,
            DENSIT, DSKONL, ERNONE, ERPROT, ERSUPE, ERUID,  ESTIMA, 
            EXIT,   FIXED,  FRAMES, *HELP,  IMAGE,  IOMODE, LENGTH, 
            LIB,    MACY11, MECY11, MESSAG, NEW,    NOOPTI, OKNONE, 
            OKPROT, OKSUPE, OKUID,  OPTION, PARITY, PBEFOR, PHYSIC, 
            PRINT,  PROTEC, PSINCE, QUERY,  RECSIZ, RECFOR, RUN, 
            RUNCOR, RUNOFF, SCERRO, SCWILD, SINCE,  STRS,   SUBMIT,
            SYS,    TELL,   TMPFIL, VARIAB, VERSIO

            .

        6.  Create an output listing file in a format suitable for  input
            to other programs.

            .
            .DIRECT OUT.FIL/INDIRECT=*.TXT

            Total of 10 files
            .

            .TYPE OUT.FIL
            DSKB:MAIL.TXT[10,5763]
            DSKB:OPRGD.TXT[10,5763]
            DSKB:MCO.TXT[10,5763]
            DSKB:RDH.TXT[10,5763]
            DSKB:MSRDH.TXT[10,5763]
            DSKB:MSDPM.TXT[10,5763]
            DSKB:INITIA.TXT[10,5763]
            DSKB:STEVS.TXT[10,5763]
            DSKB:SPIDER.TXT[10,5763]
            DSKB:BARRY2.TXT[10,5763]

            .





                                   2-105
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


   hl2 DISABLE Command


   Function

        The DISABLE command disables the POKE, SPY, and other  privileged
        monitor  calls that were enabled when you first logged in or when
        you used the ENABLE command.  When you log in,  your  privileges,
        if any, are enabled by default.

   Format

        DISABLE

   Characteristics

        Does not destroy your core image.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not change privileges associated with being [1,2] or on
        the operator's terminal.

        Requires LOGIN.

   Example

        Run FILDDT.

        .R FILDDT<RET>

        Look at monitor  memory.   Privileges  are  required  to  examine
        address 41.

        FILE:  /M<RET>
        41/     JSR 3600
         C

        The contents of 41 are shown, indicating your job has  privileges
        enabled.  Disable the privileges:

        .DISABLE<RET>

        Run FILDDT.

        .R FILDDT<RET>







                                   2-106
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


        When you attempt to examine address  41,  the  contents  are  not
        revealed.  0 is printed.

        FILE:  /M<RET>
        41/     0
         ^C

        Enable your privileges.

        .ENABLE<RET>

        Again, examine memory with FILDDT.  Your  job's  privileges  have
        been reinstated.

        .R FILDDT<RET>
        FILE:  /M<RET>
        41/     JSR 3600
         ^C                 

        .

































                                   2-107
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DISMOUNT Command


                             DISMOUNT Command



   Function

        The DISMOUNT command relinquishes ownership of a device.  It does
        not  affect  your  allocation  requests,  if  you  have  used the
        ALLOCATE command, and you can MOUNT the device again.   Once  you
        have  dismounted  a  volume set, the device is available to other
        users.  However, if the  resource  was  not  allocated  with  the
        ALLOCATE command DISMOUNT performs an implicit DEALLOCATE.

        If you used the ALLOCATE command for the resource, the DISMOUNTed
        resource  remains  in  an  allocated  state  until  you issue the
        DEALLOCATE command.  Once you have dismounted a volume set,  your
        programs can no longer reference the resource by the logical name
        except with the MOUNT and DEALLOCATE commands.

   Format

        DISMOUNT resource-name/switch,resource-name/switch,...

        Where:    For disk volume sets, the resource-name is  the  volume
                  set-name or the logical name.

                  For tape volume sets, the resource-name is the  logical
                  name.

        You can use the following switches in the command string:

         Switch                            Function

        /HELP          Prints a short description of the command.  If you
                       specify  any resource names with this switch, they
                       will be ignored.

        /NONOTIFY      Does not set the system to notify  your  job  when
                       the  dismount  is  complete.   This is the default
                       function if you have not specified /NOWAIT.

        /NOTIFY        Sets the  system  to  notify  your  job  when  the
                       dismount  is  complete.   If  you specify /NOWAIT,
                       this is the default function.

        /NOWAIT        Allows your job to return to monitor level  before
                       the dismount is complete.  This implies /NOTIFY.

        /REMOVE        Removes the specified  file  structure  from  your
                       job's search list.  If no other jobs are accessing
                       the  structure,  and  if  it  is  not   a   system


                                   2-108
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DISMOUNT Command


                       structure, the operator physically dismounts it.




















































                                   2-109
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DISMOUNT Command


        /WAIT          Holds your job until  the  dismount  is  complete.
                       This is the default function.

   Associated Commands

        ALLOCATE         Informs the system of your  future  need  for  a
                         resource.

        DEALLOCATE       Removes the resource from  your  job's  list  of
                         allocated  resources.   If  the resource has not
                         been dismounted, DEALLOCATE dismounts it.

        MOUNT            Requests ownership of the resource(s).

        SHOW ALLOCATION  Prints  a  list  of  the  resources   that   are
                         allocated and mounted for your job.

        SHOW QUEUE       Prints a list of  the  requests  in  the  system
                         queues.

   Characteristics

        Runs the QUEUE program.

        Destroys your core image.

        Requires LOGIN.

   Examples

        1.  The  following  example  shows  the  use  of  the   ALLOCATE,
            DEALLOCATE,  MOUNT,  DISMOUNT,  and SHOW ALLOCATION commands.
            The resources are reserved for a multivolume tape volume  set
            with  the  ALLOCATE  command.   The name of the volume set is
            TAPE-SET, and it contains three volumes.  The logical name TS
            is  assigned to the tape set.  The tape is write enabled, and
            it does not have standard labels.

            .ALLOCATE TAPE-SET(VOL1,VOL2,VOL3):TS/WRITE-ENABLE
            /LABEL:NONE<RET>
            [ALLOCATE REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUESTS #672]

            A file structure named DSKR: is mounted for the job:

            .MOUNT DSKR:<RET>
            [MOUNT REQUEST DSKR QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
            [STRUCTURE DSKR MOUNTED]






                                   2-110
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DISMOUNT Command


            The job's resources are displayed using the  SHOW  ALLOCATION
            command:

            .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

            ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
                 VOLUME SET          RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
            -------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
            ---                  9 TK 800/1600      MAGTAPE UNIT  1    0
            ---                  RP06               DISK UNIT     2    2
            ---                  RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
            DSKB                 DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
            DSKC                 DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
            DSKR                 DSKR               STRUCTURE     1    1
            TAPE-SET             VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
            TAPE-SET             VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
            TAPE-SET             VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0


            The  tape  set  is  mounted,  and  the  resources  are  again
            displayed:

            .MOUNT TS<RET>
            [MOUNT REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
            [MAGTAPE TS MOUNTED]

            .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

            ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
                 VOLUME SET          RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
            -------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
            ---                  9TK 800/1600       MAGTAPE UNIT  1    1
            ---                  RP06               DISK UNIT     2    2
            ---                  RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
            DSKB                 DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
            DSKC                 DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
            DSKR                 DSKR               STRUCTURE     1    1
            TAPE-SET             VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    1
            TAPE-SET             VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
            TAPE-SET             VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0


            After work with the tape set and the structure  is  finished,
            the  structure  is dismounted.  Because the structure was not
            explicitly allocated, it is automatically deallocated.

            .DEALLOCATE DSKR<RET>
            [STRUCTURE DSKR DISMOUNTED]





                                   2-111
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DISMOUNT Command


            The tape volume set is dismounted:

            .DISMOUNT TS<RET>
            [VOLUME SET TS DISMOUNTED]


            The job's resources are displayed:

            .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

            ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
                 VOLUME SET          RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
            -------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
            ---                  9 TK 800/1600      MAGTAPE UNIT  1    0
            ---                  RP06               DISK UNIT     1    1
            ---                  RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
            DSKB                 DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
            DSKC                 DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
            TAPE-SET             VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
            TAPE-SET             VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
            TAPE-SET             VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0

            At this point, the tape set can again be mounted, or  it  can
            be deallocated.  The tape set is deallocated:

            .DEALLOCATE TS<RET>
            [VOLUME SET TS HAS BEEN DEALLOCATED]

            .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

            ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
                 VOLUME SET          RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
            -------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
            ---                  RP06               DISK UNIT     1    1
            ---                  RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
            DSKB                 DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
            DSKC                 DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1


            .













                                   2-112
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DISMOUNT Command


        2.  In this example, you knew that the job was the only one using
            the  structure  BLKJ:  and included a /REMOVE switch, so that
            the operator would remove the disk pack from the drive.   The
            message  "BLKJ  DISMOUNTED" means that BLKJ:  is no longer in
            your search list, and that a request has been queued  to  the
            operator to remove the pack from the drive.  The message does
            not mean that  BLKJ  has  already  been  physically  removed.
            Because  this  command  implies /NOWAIT, you will not receive
            notification of the physical removal of the disk pack.

            .DISMOUNT BLKJ/REMOVE<RET>
            [BLKJ DISMOUNTED]

        3.  The following DISMOUNT/WAIT command causes the job to suspend
            further  processing  until all pending dismount requests from
            it have been  completed.   There  were  no  pending  dismount
            requests  from  this job, so the job returns to monitor level
            immediately.

            .DISMOUNT/WAIT<RET>
            NONE PENDING FOR YOUR JOB

            .






























                                   2-113
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                DSK Command


                                DSK Command



   Function

        The DSK command prints  disk  usage  figures  for  all  disk  I/O
        performed  since  the  last  DSK  command,  followed by the total
        amount of disk I/O performed since the  job  was  started.   Disk
        usage is printed in the following format:

        RD,WT=i,j
        RD,WT=m,n

        Where:    i and j are the incremental number of  128-word  blocks
                  read and written since the last DSK command.

                  m and n are the total number of  128-word  blocks  read
                  and written since the job started.

                                           NOTE

                      i and j are kept modulo 4096.  If  you  enabled
                      automatic  READ  or WRITE output, using the SET
                      WATCH  command,  i  and  j  are  usually  zero,
                      because  SET WATCH resets these values.  CTRL/T
                      also resets these values.

   Format

        DSK job

        Where:    job is the number of the job for  which  you  want  the
                  disk usage.  This argument is optional.  If you include
                  the job number in the command string,  only  the  total
                  statistics (m and n above) are printed.

                  If the job-number is omitted,  the  system  prints  the
                  disk usage figures for your job.

   Characteristics

        Requires LOGIN.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not destroy your core image.






                                   2-114
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                DSK Command


   Example

        Print the disk usage values for your job.

        .DSK<RET>
        RD,WT=5,10
        RD,WT=474,12

        Print the total disk usage values for job 50.

        .DSK 50<RET>

        RD,WT=474,12








































                                   2-115
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               ENABLE Command


                              ENABLE Command



   Function

        If you are not a privileged user, this  command  has  no  effect.
        However,  if  you  are  a  privileged user (that is, you have the
        privilege word set in ACTDAE.SYS) you can  turn  your  privileges
        off with the DISABLE command, and you can turn your privileges on
        with  the  ENABLE   command.    Your   privileges   are   enabled
        automatically  when  you  log  in.   Privileges  allow you to use
        privileged monitor calls such as POKE and SPY.

   Format

        ENABLE

   Characteristics

        Does not destroy your core image.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not affect privileges associated with [1,2] or with being on
        the operator's terminal (OPR:).

   Example

        Run  FILDDT.   Look  at  memory  area.    Examine   address   41.
        Privileges are required to examine this location.

        .R FILDDT<RET>
        FILE:  /M<RET>
        41/     JSR 3600
         ^C

        Disable your privileges:

        .DISABLE<RET>

        Run  FILDDT.   Examine  41.   Your   privileges   are   disabled;
        therefore, 0 is printed rather than the contents of 41.

        .R FILDDT<RET>
        FILE:  /M<RET>
        41/     0
         ^C





                                   2-116
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               ENABLE Command


        Enable your privileges:

        .ENABLE<RET>

        Again, examine memory.  The contents of 41 are displayed.

        .R FILDDT<RET>
        FILE:  /M<RET>
        41/     JSR 3600
         ^C       
        .










































                                   2-117
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                EOF Command


                                EOF Command



   Function

        The EOF command writes  an  end-of-file  mark  on  the  specified
        magnetic  tape.   This  command  runs  the  COMPIL program, which
        interprets the command before running the PIP program.

   Format

        EOF MTxn:

        Where:    MTxn:  specifies the magnetic-tape unit.

                  More than one magnetic-tape unit can  be  specified  in
                  the  command  string  by  separating the specifications
                  with commas.  Refer to Section 1.9.1 for a  description
                  of device name formats.

   Characteristics

        Requires LOGIN.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.

   Example

        Write end-of-file mark on magnetic tape MTA2:.

        .EOF MTA2:<RET>

        .

















                                   2-118
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              EXAMINE Command


                              EXAMINE Command



   Function

        The EXAMINE command displays a core location in your  area  (high
        or  low  segment).  The contents of the location are typed out in
        half-word octal mode.  This  command  is  useful  when  debugging
        programs.

   Format

        E addr

        Where:    addr is the address of  the  location  being  examined.
                  The  address  is  required  the  first time the EXAMINE
                  command is used.

                  If you omit the address, the system  will  examine  the
                  next  location.  If the previous command was a deposit,
                  the system will examine the location of the deposit.

   Characteristics

        Requires LOGIN.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Requires core.

   Example

        Examine location 140.

        .E 140<RET>
        000140/ 000000 000000

        Examine the next location, 141.  You do not need to  specify  the
        address for a consecutive location.

        .E<RET>
        000141/ 000000 000000

        Deposit 1 in location 141.  You can omit the address because  the
        DEPOSIT  command  will  use  the  location  of  the  last EXAMINE
        command.

        .D 0 1<RET>




                                   2-119
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              EXAMINE Command


        Examine the same location, 141.  You do not need to  specify  the
        address.   The  EXAMINE command will use the location of the last
        DEPOSIT command.

        .E<RET>
        000141/ 000000 000001















































                                   2-120
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              EXECUTE Command


                              EXECUTE Command



   Function

        The EXECUTE command  compiles  the  specified  source  files,  if
        necessary,  loads  the  generated REL files into core, and begins
        execution of the  program.   The  system  determines  the  proper
        language  compiler to use from the source file extensions or from
        switches you specify  in  the  command  string.   (Refer  to  the
        COMPILE  command.)   If  a  .REL file already exists with a newer
        date than that of the source file, the system  does  not  compile
        the file unless you request this explicitly with a switch.

        This command is equal to issuing the LOAD and START commands.

        Each time you issue a COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or  DEBUG  command,
        the  system  remembers  the  command  with  its  arguments  in  a
        temporary file on disk or in core.  Therefore, when you issue one
        of  these  commands  without specifying any arguments, the system
        uses the arguments that it saved in the temporary  file.   (Refer
        to Appendix C.)

        The EXECUTE command accepts several command constructions:  the @
        construction  (indirect  commands),  the  +  construction,  the =
        construction, and the < > construction.  Refer to Appendix C  for
        a complete description of each of these constructions.

        This command  runs  the  COMPIL  program,  which  interprets  the
        command  before  running  the  appropriate  language compiler for
        LINK.

   Format

        EXECUTE file-spec

        Where:    file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
                  file   specifications  separated  by  commas.   A  file
                  specification consists of a device name,  a  file  name
                  with  or  without  an  extension, and a directory name.
                  (Refer to Section 1.9.)

        You can use the following switches to modify the command  string.
        These  switches  can  be  temporary  or permanent switches unless
        otherwise stated.  (Refer to Section 1.8.4.)







                                   2-121
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              EXECUTE Command


          Switch                         Function

        /ALGOL         Compiles the file with ALGOL.  Assumed  for  files
                       with the extension of .ALG.

        /BINARY        Generates a binary file for  each  file  compiled.
                       The  file  name  for  the  binary file follows the
                       standard conventions for determining the  name  of
                       the  output file.  (Refer to the COMPILE command.)
                       The file name extension  is  .REL.   This  is  the
                       default action.

        /BLISS         Compiles the  file  with  BLISS-10.   Assumed  for
                       files  with  the  extension of .b10 or .bLI.  This
                       switch is not supported.

        /C68           Runs the appropriate COBOL compiler.
        /C74

        /COBOL         Compiles the file with COBOL.  Assumed  for  files
                       with the extension of .CBL.

        /COMPILE       Forces a compilation of this file even if a binary
                       file  exists  with  a newer date and time than the
                       source file.  You can use this switch to obtain an
                       extra   compilation  (for  example,  to  obtain  a
                       listing)  because  the  system  does  not  perform
                       compilation  if  the binary file is newer than the
                       source file.

        /CREF          Produces a cross-referenced listing  file  on  the
                       disk  for each file compiled, for later processing
                       by the CREF program.  The file  extension  of  the
                       output  file is .CRF.  You can then list the files
                       using  the  CREF  command.   However,  with  COBOL
                       files,  the  system  appends  the cross-referenced
                       listing to the listing file.

        /DDT           Loads the program debugger DDT with the program.

        /DEBUG:(arg, arg,...)
                       Passes the arguments to  FORTRAN.   Refer  to  the
                       TOPS-10/TOPS-20 FORTRAN Language Manual.

        /DLIST         Produces a .LST file in your directory area.   You
                       can  output  the file to the line printer with the
                       PRINT command.

        /F40           Obsolete
        /F10



                                   2-122
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              EXECUTE Command


        /F66           Applies FORTRAN-66 rules for DO loops and EXTERNAL
                       statements.

        /FOROTS        Obsolete
        /FORSE

        /FORTRAN       Compiles  the  file  with  a   FORTRAN   compiler.
                       Assumed  for  files  with the extension of .F4 and
                       .FOR and all files with  nonrecognizable  compiler
                       extensions  if  FORTRAN  is the standard compiler.
                       You need to specify this switch if the file has  a
                       nonrecognizable  compiler extension and FORTRAN is
                       not the standard compiler or is  not  the  current
                       default.   (For  example,  EXE/ALGOL  FIL1,  FIL2,
                       FIL3/FORTRAN).

        /FUDGE:        Creates a temporary file that contains   the names
         file-spec     of the .REL files produced by the  command  string
                       plus  the  library  file name.  When you issue the
                       FUDGE command, PIP reads this  temporary  file  to
                       generate a library .REL file.  (Refer to the FUDGE
                       command description.)  The argument to this switch
                       is:

                       dev:file.ext[proj,prog]

                       Where:  dev:  is the device on which to write  the
                               file.   If you omit the device, the system
                               assumes DSK.

                               file.ext is the name of the library  file.
                               The  file  name  is required.  If you omit
                               the extension, the system assumes .REL.

                               [proj,prog] is the directory in  which  to
                               place the file.  Your directory is assumed
                               if you do not specify a directory.

                       This switch is permanent  in  the  sense  that  it
                       pertains  to  all  .REL  files  generated  by  the
                       command string.

        /GFLOAT        Indicates that double-precision numbers are to  be
                       stored  in  G-floating format.  This format has an
                       extended exponent range.  This option is available
                       on KL-10 proessors only.







                                   2-123
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              EXECUTE Command


        /K?10          Designates the processor where  the  program  will
                       execute once it has been loaded.  The variable (?)
                       can be L or S.  These switches are  necessary  for
                       FORTRAN-10 programs because the compiler generates
                       different code for the processors.  The default is
                       the   processor  on  the  computer  executing  the
                       command.

        /LIBRARY       Loads the files in library search mode.  This mode
                       causes a program file in a special library file to
                       be loaded only if one  or  more  of  its  declared
                       entry   symbols   satisfies  an  undefined  global
                       request in the source file.  The system  libraries
                       are   always  searched.   (See  the  TOPS-10  LINK
                       Reference Manual.)

        /LINK          Obsolete

        /LIST          Generates a listing file for each  file  compiled.
                       The  extension  of  the  output file is .LST.  The
                       system automatically spools it when you  log  out.
                       The complement of this switch is /NOLIST.

        /LMAP          Produces a loader map during the  loading  process
                       containing the local symbols.

        /LOADER        Obsolete

        /MACRO         Assembles the file with MACRO.  Assumed for  files
                       with extensions of .MAC.

        /MACY11        Assembles the file with MACY11.  Assumed for files
                       with  extensions  of  .P11.   This  switch  is not
                       supported.

        /MANTIS        Compiles   the   file   with   MANTIS    debugging
                       information.  This switch affects Fortran-40 files
                       only.  This switch is not supported.

        /MAP           Produces loader maps during the  loading  process.
                       When  this  switch is encountered, a loader map is
                       requested from  the  loader.   After  the  library
                       search of the system libraries, the map is written
                       in your  disk  area  with  either  the  file  name
                       specified  by  you (for example, /MAP:file) or the
                       default file name nnnLNK.MAP.  This switch  is  an
                       exception  to the permanent switch rule in that it
                       causes only one map to be produced even though  it
                       appears as a permanent switch.




                                   2-124
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              EXECUTE Command


        /NEW           Runs the appropriate language  compiler  from  the
                       experimental  system  library  (device  NEW:) area
                       [1,5].  If the compiler does not exist  on  device
                       NEW:,  COMPIL tries to obtain it from device SYS:.
                       (Refer to the Restriction.)

        /NOBINARY      Does not generate binary files.  Unless you  issue
                       this  switch,  the  system generates binary files.
                       This switch, when combined with the /CREF or /LIST
                       switch, is useful when you compile programs solely
                       for the purpose of generating listings.

        /NOCOMPILE     Does not force a  compilation  on  a  source  file
                       whose  date  is  not  as recent as the date on the
                       binary file.  This switch is not the same  as  the
                       /REL  switch,  which  turns  off all compilations,
                       even if the source file is  newer  than  the  .REL
                       file.    Complement   to   the   /COMPILE  switch.
                       /NOCOMPILE is the default action.

        /NODEBUG       Does not pass previously  specified  arguments  to
                       FORTRAN.

        /NOLIST        Does not generate  listing  files.   This  is  the
                       default action.

        /NOMANTIS      Compiles  the  file   without   MANTIS   debugging
                       information.    This   switch  affects  Fortran-40
                       programs only.  This switch is not supported.

        /NOOPTIMIZE    Does not  optimize  the  object  code  of  FORTRAN
                       programs.

        /NOSEARCH      Loads  all  routines  of  the  file  whether   the
                       routines  are  referenced or not.  Because this is
                       the default action, this switch is  used  to  turn
                       off library search mode (/LIBRARY).

        /OLD           Runs the appropriate language  compiler  from  the
                       system library of old programs (device OLD:) which
                       resides on the disk area [1,3].  If  the  compiler
                       does  not  exist  on  device OLD:, COMPIL tries to
                       obtain  it  from  device  SYS:.   (Refer  to   the
                       Restriction.)

        /OPTIMIZE      Optimizes  the  object  code  of  FORTRAN   source
                       programs.

        /PAL10         Assembles the file with PAL10.  Assumed for  files
                       with the .PAL extension.



                                   2-125
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              EXECUTE Command


        /PASCAL        Compiles the file with Pascal.  Assumed for  files
                       with the .PAS extension.

        /REL           Uses the existing .REL files although newer source
                       files might be present.

        /SAVE          Saves the core image of the loaded program.

        /SEARCH        Loads the  files  in  library  search  mode.   The
                       action  is  identical  to  that  of  the  /LIBRARY
                       switch.

        /SELF          Runs the appropriate language compiler from device
                       DSK:   instead  of from the system library (device
                       SYS:).  This  switch  is  useful  if  you  keep  a
                       private  copy of a compiler in your own disk area.
                       (Refer to the Restriction.)

        /SNOBOL        Compiles the file with SNOBOL.  Assumed for  files
                       with  an  extension  of  .SNO.  This switch is not
                       supported.

        /SSAVE         Saves the core image of the loaded  program  in  a
                       sharable executable file.

        /SYS           Runs the appropriate language  compiler  from  the
                       system  library (device SYS:) area [1,4].  This is
                       the default action.

   Restriction

        You cannot specify compilers from  different  structures  in  the
        same command string.  For example, the following is invalid:

        .EXECUTE PARTA.FOR/NEW,PARTB.FOR/OLD

        However, the following is valid:

        .COMPILE PARTA.FOR/NEW<RET>
        .COMPILE PARTB.FOR/OLD<RET>
        .EXECUTE/REL PARTA,PARTB

   Characteristics

        Requires LOGIN.

        Places your terminal at user level.

        Runs the  appropriate  compiler  or  assembler  and  linking
        loader, destroying your original core image.

        Starts the execution of the compiled and loaded program.

                                   2-126
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              EXECUTE Command


   Example

        Type out a test program.

        .TYPE PROG.FOR<RET>

            TYPE 10
         10 FORMAT (' TESTING EXECUTION')
            END

        Execute the program.

        .EXECUTE PROG.FOR<RET>
        FORTRAN:  PROG
        MAIN
        LINK:  LOADING
        [LNKXCT PROG EXECUTION]

        TESTING EXECUTION

        END OF EXECUTION
        CPU TIME:  0.02 ELAPSED TIME:  0.05
        EXIT
        .

        Message shows the time parameters of your job.



























                                   2-127
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                FILE Command


                               FILE Command



   Function

        The  FILE   command   remotely   controls   DECtape-to-disk   and
        disk-to-DECtape transfers on operator-handled DECtapes.

                                      NOTE

                The FILE command is  not  part  of  the  standard
                system.   Your site must run OMOUNT explicitly to
                make the FILE command usable.

        There are seven functions that  can  be  performed  by  the  FILE
        command.

             Format         Function

             FILE C         Check
             FILE D         Delete
             FILE F         File
             FILE L         Read
             FILE R         Retrieve
             FILE W         Wait
             FILE Z         Zero

        The C and W functions are the only requests  that  are  performed
        immediately.   Your  terminal  and job are free to proceed before
        the request is completed, except for  batch  jobs,  which  cannot
        continue until execution is complete.

   Formats

        1.  FILE C

            Checks the queue of FILE requests to determine if any of your
            requests  are  still  pending.   There  is no argument to the
            command in this format.  Pending requests for your  job  will
            be printed on your terminal.

        2.  FILE D,tape-id,file.ext,file.ext,...

            Deletes the  specified  files  from  DECtape.   This  command
            requires  tape  identification  and  a  list of file names as
            arguments.  The tape-id is a 1- to  6-character  alphanumeric
            name  that identifies the tape.  After the files are deleted,
            an automatic FILE L is performed.




                                   2-128
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                FILE Command


        3.  FILE F,tape-id file-spec,file-spec,...

            Copies the specified files onto the specified DECtape.   This
            command  requires  a  tape  identification  and  list of file
            specifications as arguments.   The  file  specifications  can
            include    an    explicit    file    structure    name    and
            project-programmer number so that you can copy files  from  a
            disk  area  other  than your own.  You do not have to specify
            the device and project-programmer number of  subsequent  file
            specifications  if  they  do  not  change.  That is, you must
            specify the programmer number (for example,  [,104])  if  the
            file  to  be  copied has the same project number as yours and
            you must specify  the  project  number  ([41,])  if  you  are
            copying files from another project.

            The protection of the disk file is checked to see if the file
            can  be  read.   In  addition,  the protection of the DECtape
            directory file (tape-id.DIR) is checked to  see  if  you  can
            update  it.   If  there  is not enough room on the DECtape to
            copy an entire file, that portion  (if  any)  that  has  been
            written  so  far is deleted and an error message is placed in
            the directory file.  When the files  have  been  successfully
            copied, an automatic FILE L is performed.

            When the wildcard construction is used with the  FILE  F  and
            FILE Z commands, your job's entire search list is used.  That
            is, all files matching the construction are transferred  from
            all structures in the search list.

            In  most  cases  you  do  not  need  to  specify  which  file
            structures  the  files  are on because UMOUNT determines this
            (with LOOKUPs) and passes the information  to  OMOUNT.   With
            the  FILE  F and FILE Z functions, if a file structure is not
            specified and the specified file  exists  on  more  than  one
            structure, the first one in your search list is copied.

        4.  FILE L,tape-id

            Reads the directory of a DECtape and writes it into your disk
            area  as  an  ASCII file with the file name tape-id.DIR.  The
            file is placed on  the  first  file  structure  that  can  be
            written on in your search list, as long as that structure has
            an area that matches your project-programmer number.  Tape-id
            is  a  1-  to  6-character  alphanumeric name that is used to
            identify the tape.  You can then print the directory on  your
            terminal  with  the  TYPE command.  The format of the DECtape
            directory is similar to the directory  file  written  by  the
            DIRECTORY command.  If errors occur while the FILE command is
            being processed, the system writes error  messages  into  the
            directory file tape-id.DIR.



                                   2-129
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                FILE Command


        5.  File R,tape-id,dev:file.ext,dev:file.ext...

            Transfers the specified files from your DECtape to the  disk.
            This  command  requires  tape-id  and a list of file names as
            arguments.  If the specified files already exist in the  disk
            area,  they  are  superseded, if their protection code allows
            it.  If the specified files do not exist, they are created on
            the  first file structure in your job's search list for which
            creation is  permitted.   After  files  are  transferred,  an
            automatic FILE L is performed.

            If  you  have  a  search  list   containing   multiple   file
            structures,  the  asterisk  construction  (when used with the
            FILE R command) can cause files to  be  created  rather  than
            superseded.   For the FILE R function, when no file structure
            is specified, the  files  are  copied  onto  the  first  file
            structure  in  your  search  list on which you are allowed to
            create files.   (Refer  to  the  description  of  the  SETSRC
            program.)  When a file structure name is typed or implied, it
            becomes the new default.

        6.  FILE W

            Waits until all of your pending requests are processed before
            allowing   your  job  to  continue.   If  there  are  pending
            requests, the message "WAITING...  TYPE 2 ^C'S  TO  EXIT"  is
            printed  on  your terminal.  Control returns to your job when
            all requests have been processed.  You can type  two  CTRL/Cs
            if you decide not to wait.

        7.  FILE Z,tape-id,dev:file.ext[ppn],dev:file.ext[ppn]...

            Deletes the files in the directory of the DECtape before  the
            files are copied and then performs the same operations as the
            FILE F command.  This command requires tape-id and can have a
            list  of  file  specification arguments.  After the files are
            copied, an automatic FILE L is performed.

            When you use the wildcard construction with the  FILE  F  and
            FILE Z commands, your job's entire search list is used.  That
            is, all files matching the construction are transferred  from
            all structures in the search list.











                                   2-130
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                FILE Command


        The wildcard constructions can be  used,  but  generic  DSK:  can
        define  many  file  structures;  the  specific  file structure is
        chosen as follows:

             When you use the wildcard construction for the file name  or
             extension,  the first structure in your search list that you
             can access is used.

             If you do not use the wildcard  construction  and  the  file
             exists,  the  first  file  structure in the search list that
             contains the specified file is used, unless overridden by  a
             default.   (Refer  to  the  examples.)  If the file does not
             exist, the standard structure is used.

   Examples

        In the following examples, your search list is as follows:

        SORT:,DSKA:/NOCREATE,DSKB:,DSKC:

        You are user 10,3421, with UFDs on DSKA:, DSKB:, and  DSKC:,  and
        the  file  EX.1  exists  on each of these three structures.  User
        10,4072 has the file EX.2 in his area on DSKB: and on DSKC:.

        1.  This command requests that the operator mount DECtape 1, that
            the  file  EX.1 in your area be copied onto it, that the file
            EX.2[10,4072]  also  be  copied  onto  the  DECtape,  that  a
            directory  of  the  DECtape be written in your area, and that
            the operator dismount the DECtape.

            The directory is written on the first  structure  encountered
            in  the  search  list  that is both writable and on which you
            have a UFD.  In the preceding example, you do not have a  UFD
            on  the  first  structure  in  your  search list (SORT:), you
            cannot create new files  on  the  second  structure  in  your
            search  list  (DSKA:), and so the directory is written on the
            third structure in your search list (DSKB:).

            The file EX.1 on DSKA: will be copied only onto  the  DECtape
            because  the  copy  on DSKA: was encountered first.  The file
            DSKB:EX.2[10,4072] will be copied onto  the  DECtape  because
            the copy on DSKB: was encountered first.

            .FILE F,TAPE1,EX.1,EX.2[10,4072]<RET>
            REQUEST QUEUED
            1. F JOB30 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE1
            DSKB:,DSKA0:EX.1,DSKB0:EX.2[10,4072]
            1 COMMAND IN QUEUE
            .




                                   2-131
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                FILE Command


        2.  In this example, you specified that DSKC: be copied from both
            areas.  DSKC: was typed only once because a device given in a
            file specification remains  in  effect  for  subsequent  file
            specifications  in the same command, unless another device is
            specified.  When you omit the project number the  default  is
            your  project-programmer number.  Also the project-programmer
            number can be specified either before the file  name  (as  in
            this  example)  or  after  the file name (as in the preceding
            example).

            .FILE F,TAPE2,DSKC:EX.1,[,4072]EX.2<RET>
            REQUEST QUEUED
            2. F JOB30 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE2 
            DSKB:DSKC0:EX.1,DSKC0:EX.2[10,4072]
            2 COMMANDS IN QUEUE
            .

            The response from the FILE C command indicates to  you  which
            of  your requests have not yet been processed.  In this case,
            both of your requests are still pending.

            .FILE C<RET>
            1. F JOB30 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE1
            DSKB:,DSKA0:EX.1,DSKB0:EX.2[10,4071]
            2. F JOB30 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE2
            DSKB:,DSKC0:EX.1,DSKC0:EX.2[10,4072]
            2 COMMANDS IN QUEUE
            .

            The FILE R command uses the same algorithm as the FILE F  and
            Z  command  for  determining the device on which to write the
            directory.  The file  EX.1  is  written  on  the  first  file
            structure  in your search list.  The file EX.1 already exists
            on DSKA:, DSKB:, and DSKC:.  DSKA: is NOCREATE, so  the  file
            EX.1  is  written  onto DSKB, superseding the EX.1 already on
            DSKB:.

            .FILE R,TAPE1,EX.1<RET>
            REQUEST QUEUED
            1. R JOB24 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE1
            DSKB:,DSKB:EX.1
            1 COMMAND IN QUEUE
            .










                                   2-132
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                FILE Command


        3.  When the wildcard  construction  is  used,  UMOUNT  uses  the
            entire search list to determine what files to copy for FILE F
            and FILE Z commands, whether or not  you  have  a  UFD  on  a
            particular  structure.  UMOUNT passes the construction, along
            with each structure in the search list, to OMOUNT.

            .FILE F,TAPE3,E?.*<RET>
            REQUEST QUEUED
            2. F JOB24 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE3 
            DSKB:,SORT:E?.*,DSKA:E?.*,DSKB:E?.*,DSKC:E?.*
            DSKC:E?.*
            2 COMMANDS IN QUEUE
            .








































                                   2-133
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               FINISH Command


                              FINISH Command



   Function

        The FINISH command terminates any input or  output  currently  in
        progress  on  the  specified  device,  closes any open files, and
        deassigns the device.  This command  completely  disassociates  a
        device  from  your  job  and  prevents  you  from  continuing the
        program.  If you want to continue your program after ending  I/O,
        use the DEASSIGN command instead of the FINISH command.

   Format

        FINISH dev:

        Where:    dev: is the logical or physical name of the  device  on
                  which  I/O  is  to  be  terminated.   This  argument is
                  optional.

                  If dev: is omitted I/O is terminated  on  all  devices,
                  except your job's controlling terminal, and any logical
                  name  associated  with  the  controlling  terminal   is
                  cleared.

                  Refer to Section 1.9.1  for  a  description  of  device
                  names.

   Characteristics

        Requires LOGIN.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Requires core.

   Restrictions

        When running a program, you cannot continue your program after  a
        FINISH  if  the  device  was  initialized,  but you can start the
        program from the beginning or enter DDT.











                                   2-134
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               FINISH Command


   Example

        Assign a card reader to your job.

        .ASSIGN CDR:<RET>

        Card reader number 1 is assigned.

        CDR261 ASSIGNED

        Show the devices that are busy.

        .SYSTAT B<RET>

        BUSY DEVICES:
        DEVICE    JOB    WHY     LOGICAL

        TTY144     18    INIT
        TTY235     18    INIT
        LPT260     18    INIT
        LPT261     18    INIT
        LPT263     18    INIT
        CDR260     18    INIT
        CDR261     29    AS

        Card reader number 1 is busy because it is assigned to your job.

        Finish using the card reader.

        .FINISH CDR<RET>

        Again, show the busy devices.

        .SYSTAT B<RET>

        BUSY DEVICES:
        DEVICE    JOB    WHY     LOGICAL

        TTY144     18    INIT
        TTY235     18    INIT
        LPT260     18    INIT
        LPT261     18    INIT
        LPT263     18    INIT
        CDR260     18    INIT

        .

        Card reader 1 is not in the list of busy devices.  Therefore,  it
        is available to other users.




                                   2-135
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               FUDGE Command


                               FUDGE Command



   Function

        The FUDGE command creates a library .REL file  from  a  temporary
        file  generated  by  a  previous COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG
        command string containing the /FUDGE switch.   (See  the  TOPS-10
        MAKLIB  User's  Guide and the TOPS-10 LINK Programmer's Reference
        Manual for descriptions of library .REL files.)

        The temporary file contains the library name and the list of .REL
        files which were entered by the previous command's /FUDGE switch.
        The FUDGE command runs PIP, which reads the list  of  .REL  files
        and  the  library  file  name  from the temporary file.  PIP then
        copies the listed .REL files into the library file  in  the  same
        order that they are listed in the temporary file.

                                    NOTE

           Unlike the COMPIL program's default action, the /FUDGE
           switch  combines files in the order that you list them
           in the command line.  The COMPIL program  sorts  files
           by  compilers.   COMPIL  sorts mixed FORTRAN and MACRO
           programs so that all  FORTRAN  programs  are  compiled
           first and MACRO programs second.

        After you use the /FUDGE switch, you must issue the FUDGE command
        before  you  issue  any other command that runs PIP (for example,
        TYPE and  COPY).   Otherwise,  the  library  information  in  the
        temporary file will be superseded by the information generated by
        the other PIP command.

   Format

        FUDGE

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Runs the PIP program (at CCL offset).

        Destroys your core image.








                                   2-136
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               FUDGE Command


   Example

        Compile the files PROG,NUMBER, and NUMB2.

        .COMPILE/FUDGE:LIBRAR PROG.FOR,NUMBER.FOR,NUMB2.FOR<RET>

        Create a file named LIBRAR that contains the .REL files generated
        by the COMPILE command.

        .FUDGE<RET>

        A DIRECTORY command shows the files created  less  than  an  hour
        ago, among them:  LIBRAR.REL.

        .DIR/SIN:-1<RET>

        PROG      REL  1  <055>  dd-mmm-yy  DSKC:[27,5055]
        NUMBER    REL  1  <055>  dd-mmm-yy
        NUMB2     REL  1  <055>  dd-mmm-yy
        LIBRAR    REL  3  <055>  dd-mmm-yy

































                                   2-137
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                GET Command


                                GET Command



   Function

        The GET command loads a core image  from  a  retrievable  storage
        device but does not execute it.

        This command clears all of your core.  However,  programs  should
        not  count on this action and should explicitly clear those areas
        of core that are expected to contain zeros.  (That  is,  programs
        should  be self-initializing).  This action allows programs to be
        restarted by a CTRL/C START sequence without another GET command.

   Format

        GET file-spec core/switch

        Where:    file-spec is  a  file  specification  in  the  standard
                  format.

                  core is the amount of core you want to reserve for  the
                  program.    The  core  argument  is  a  decimal  number
                  followed by an optional K or P  for  blocks  or  pages,
                  respectively.   If  you do not specify either K or P, K
                  is assumed.  If you do not specify a core argument, the
                  default  is  the  minimum amount of core needed to load
                  the program.

                  /switch is the following option:

                       /USE:n    Specifies the octal section  number  (n)
                                 in  which a core image is loaded.  Valid
                                 section numbers are 0-37, octal.   (Note
                                 that the limit is 40 octal sections.)

   Characteristics

        Destroys your core image.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.











                                   2-138
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                GET Command


   Example

        Load a program.

        .LOAD PROG.FOR
        FORTRAN:  PROG
        MAIN.
        LINK:   LOADING
        EXIT

        Save the executable format.

        .SAVE
        PROG SAVED

        Use GET to bring the program into memory.

        .GET PROG
        JOB SETUP

        START execution of the program.

        .START

        TESTING EXECUTION

        END OF EXECUTION
        CPU TIME:  0.02 ELAPSED TIME:  0.17
        EXIT

        .






















                                   2-139
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                HALT Command


                               HALT Command



   Function

        The HALT command (or CTRL/C) stops your job.

   Formats

        HALT

        (CTRL/C)

            CTRL/C echoes on your terminal as ^C.

   Characteristics

        Places your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not require LOGIN.

   Examples

        1.  Request a list of your directory.

            .DIR<RET>

            PATH1.RNO  3  <055>  dd-mmm-yy  DSKC:[27,5434]
            SWITCH.INI 1  <055>  dd-mmm-yy
            CALC.^C

            ^C

            .

            Type two CTRL/Cs to halt output.

        2.  Execute a program.

            .EXECUTE PROG.FOR<RET>
            LINK:  LOADING
            [LNKXCT PROG EXECUTION]
            ^^C
            ^^C
            .

            Two CTRL/Cs return you to monitor level, interrupting program
            execution.




                                   2-140
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                HALT Command


            Use  CCONTINUE  to  continue  execution  while  remaining  at
            monitor level.

            .CCONTINUE<RET>

            Use HALT to interrupt execution.  (See NOTE below.)

            .HALT<RET>
            .

            Use CONTINUE to re-enter  user  level  and  continue  program
            execution.

            .CONTINUE<RET>
            DONE
            END OF EXECUTION
            CPU TIME:6.12 ELAPSED TIME:45.73
            EXIT
            .

            Program successfully completes execution.

                                        NOTE

                    It  is  necessary  to  halt  execution  of  a
                    program if your terminal is to enter or leave
                    user level.  Therefore, you must issue a HALT
                    or  CTRL/C  at  monitor level, after you have
                    used the CCONTINUE or  CSTART  commands,  for
                    your terminal to enter user level.























                                   2-141
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                HELP Command


                               HELP Command



   Function

        The HELP command prints information about system features on your
        terminal.   You  can  select  this information from the following
        file structures:  HLP:, NEW:, OLD:, DOC:, and SYS:.

   Formats

        HELP

        Prints instructions for using the variations of the HELP command.


        HELP *

        Lists the names of features for which HELP is available, all  the
        monitor  commands,  all  site-specific commands, all user-defined
        (declared) commands, all the monitor SET  commands,  the  monitor
        SET  TTY  commands,  the terminal types supported by TOPS-10, and
        the SET WATCH commands.


        HELP name

        Where:    name is the name of a feature or program for which  the
                  monitor   has   a   HELP  file.   Only  the  first  six
                  alphanumeric characters are read by the HELP program.


        HELP dev:name

        Where:    dev:  is the file structure that the file is on.

                  name is the name of the program or  feature  for  which
                  you want help.

                  If the specified feature does not have a HELP  file  on
                  the  specified  device,  or  if  you do not specify the
                  device, the  devices  are  searched  in  the  following
                  order:

                  HLP:, SYS:, NEW:, OLD:, DOC:

                  You can change the search order by  changing  your  job
                  search list.  Refer to the SETSRC command.




                                   2-142
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                HELP Command


        You can use the asterisk wildcard construction (*) instead of the
        feature name, for information about all the HELP available on the
        specified device.  (See examples.) You cannot  use  the  asterisk
        (*) to specify the device name.

|       Because of the 6-character limit on file names, some of the  help
|       file  names  can  be  cryptic.   The  file names for the commands
|       topics are fairly  straightforward  and,  although  truncated  to
|       6-characters,  can  be  understood.   (For example, PASSWO is the
|       help file for the PASSWORD command.)   However,  help  files  are
|       provided  for  such general topics as line continuation (LNCONT),
|       command switches (COMSWI), and directory paths (DIRPAT)  and  the
|       file names for these topics may be difficult to ascertain.  These
|       general topics and their help file names are listed below:
|  
|  
|       _________________________________________________________________
|  
|       Help file         Topic
|       _________________________________________________________________
|  
|       ATSIGN            Indirect Commands (@ Construction)
|       ANGLEB            The Angle-Bracket (< >) Construction
|       CHRCOD            SIXBIT/ASCII Character Codes
|       CMDARG            Command Arguments
|       COMSWI            Compiler Switches
|       COMCMD            Compile-Class Commands
|       CRDCOD            ASCII Card Codes
|       DEFCOM            The Default Compiler
|       DELKEY            The DELETE Key
|       DEVHND            Device-Handling Commands
|       DEVNAM            Device Names
|       DIRNAM            Directory Names
|       DIRPAT            Directory Paths
|       DTARGS            Date-Time Arguments
|       EQUAL             The Equal (=) Construction
|       ERSNAM            Ersatz Device Names
|       FILEXT            File Name Extensions
|       FILHND            File-Handling Commands
|       FILNAM            File Names
|       FISPEC            File Specification
|       FNCCMD            Functional Groups of Commands
|       INFCMD            Information Commands
|       JOBCTL            Job-Control Commands
|       LIBS              Libraries
|       LNCONT            Line Continuation
|       LNKSWI            LINK Switches
|       MICCTL            MIC Commands
|       NETCMD            Network Commands
|       NEWUSE            Introductory Help to TOPS-10 Commands
|       PCODES            Protection Codes


                                   2-143
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                HELP Command


|       PLUS              The Plus (+) Construction
|       PRGCTL            Program-Control Commands
|       PRGPRE            Program-Preparation Commands
|       RESPPN            Reserved Project-Programmer Numbers
|       SERLST            Search Lists
|       SWINI             SWITCH.INI Files
|       SWITCH            Command Switches
|       SYSDEF            System Defaults
|       TEMFIL            Temporary Files
|       TERCTL            Terminal-Control and Terminal Communication
|       UCMNDS            User-Definable Commands
|       WLDCRD            Wildcard Constructions
|  
|       _________________________________________________________________
|  
|  
|       The various SET commands have their own help files and  they  are
|       listed in the general-topic help file SET.


        Characteristics

        Does an autopush, so it preserves your core image.

        Runs the HELP program.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not require LOGIN.

   Example

        For information about the HELP command, type HELP.

        .HELP<RET>

        The HELP command prints information  about  the  system  on  your
        terminal.   Use  one  of the following constructions for specific
        information.

        .HELP<RET>

        Prints out this message.

        .HELP *<RET>

        Prints out the names of all subjects for  which  there  is  help.
        Use  one  of these subjects as the name in the next construction.
        HELP * also prints out the names  of  the  system  commands,  the
        names  of  site-specific  commands,  the  names  of  job-specific
        commands, the names of the SET commands, the  names  of  the  SET


                                   2-144
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                HELP Command


        DEFAULT commands, the names of the SET TTY commands, the names of
        the SET WATCH commands, and the supported terminal types.

        .HELP name<RET>

        Prints all the information available about  the  subject  "name".
        For example:

        .HELP DIRECT<RET>

        Prints information about the DIRECT command/program.










































                                   2-145
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                HELP Command


        .HELP lib:*<RET>

        Prints out the names of all subjects  for  which  there  is  help
        available from the specified library device.  The standard system
        library devices are:

        SYS:    NEW:    OLD:    HLP:    DOC:

        For example:

        .HELP NEW:*<RET>

        Prints a list of all the information available in NEW:.

        .HELP lib:name<RET>

        Prints information about the specified subject in  the  specified
        library.



































                                   2-146
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               INITIA Command


                              INITIA Command



   Function

        The INITIA command sets the parameters for your  terminal.   This
        command  is  issued  automatically  at  system startup on certain
        designated terminals.  You can reissue the command at  any  time.
        This  command  also  starts  certain system programs, when issued
        from particular terminals.

        If you are logged in  and  you  run  INITIA,  INITIA  reads  your
        SWITCH.INI  file.   Refer  to  Appendix  B  for  a description of
        SWITCH.INI.

   Format

        INITIA arg arg ...

        Where:  arg can be one  of  the  following  arguments.   You  can
                precede  any  of  the following arguments with NO (except
                NORUN) to suppress a default setting.

             Argument                         Function

             ATTRIBUTES     Prints  the  terminal  attributes  for   this
                            terminal.

             CHECK:keyword  Sets  your  terminal  type  after  requesting
                            identification  from  your DEC terminal.  The
                            optional keyword is  DEFAULT,  meaning  CHECK
                            only  if  the  current  terminal  type is the
                            default type (usually TTY).

             HELP           Prints information about INITIA command.

             KSYS           Tells you when timesharing will end (if  KSYS
                            is set).

             NAME           Prints the  system  name  on  your  terminal.
                            NAME is the default argument.

             NORUN          Suppresses  the  execution  of  any   default
                            program.

             NOTICE         Prints the general operator notice.






                                   2-147
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               INITIA Command


             SETTTY         Sets  up  your  terminal  characteristics  or
                            attributes.   The SETTTY argument is required
                            in order to set terminal characteristics from
                            SWITCH.INI  if  you  are logged in.  When you
                            are not  logged  in,  INITIA  reads  terminal
                            characteristics        from       SYS:TTY.INI
                            automatically.  SETTTY can  be  specified  on
                            the  INITIA command line or in the SWITCH.INI
                            file.

             STRUCTURES     Prints any  operator  notices  about  mounted
                            structures.

             TEXT           Prints quick operator notice.

             TTY            Prints the terminal characteristics for  this
                            terminal.


        Terminal Characteristics Arguments

        In addition to the above arguments, you  can  use  the  following
        arguments  to  INITIA  SETTTY  in your SWITCH.INI file.  They are
        effective for any job that is logged in.  Most of  the  following
        arguments  are  equivalent  to  an argument to a SET TTY command.
        Many of the arguments can be  preceded  by  NO  and  a  space  to
        disable  the  defaults.  These are included in the description of
        the function of the arguments.  (Refer to Appendix B for  details
        about using SWITCH.INI.)

        Each argument, equivalent  SET  TTY  command,  and  function,  is
        listed below.

        Argument       Equivalent Command            Function

        SETTTY         None                Must be present for the  other
                                           INITIA  terminal  arguments to
                                           be effective.

        ALTMODE        TTY ALTMODE         Converts ALTmode codes 175 and
                                           176  to  the ESCape character.
                                           NO   ALTMODE   restores    the
                                           individual identities of codes
                                           175 and 176.

        BLANKS         TTY BLANK           Controls the output  of  blank
                                           lines.   NO  BLANKS suppresses
                                           the   output   of   automatic,
                                           consecutive  carriage  returns
                                           at the end of output.



                                   2-148
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               INITIA Command


        CRLF           TTY CRLF            Controls     the     automatic
                                           carriage  return and line feed
                                           at the  end  of  the  terminal
                                           line.   NO CRLF suppresses the
                                           automatic carriage return  and
                                           line feed.

        DEBREAK        TTY DEBREAK         No longer supported.

        DEFER          TTY DEFER           Suppresses echoing to a  video
                                           terminal    until   input   is
                                           requested.   NO  DEFER  allows
                                           characters typed to the system
                                           to be echoed when the terminal
                                           is idle.

        DISPLAY        TTY DISPLAY         Notifies the system  that  you
                                           have a display terminal.  This
                                           characteristic can be used  by
                                           programs  that  control output
                                           to the terminal.

        ECHO           TTY ECHO            Controls   echoing   to    the
                                           terminal.

        ELEMENT:xxx    TTY ELEMENT xxx     No longer supported.

        FILL:x         TTY FILL x          Assigns filler class x to  the
                                           terminal.

        FORM           TTY FORM            Controls   the    output    of
                                           line-feeds  for  formfeed  and
                                           vertical tab  characters.   NO
                                           FORM  instructs  the system to
                                           output the line-feeds.

        GAG            TTY GAG             Controls  the   reception   of
                                           messages  sent  with  the SEND
                                           command.    NO   GAG    allows
                                           messages when your terminal is
                                           at user level.

        IDLEDISCONN n  None                Sets  the  maximum  number  of
                                           seconds  your  terminal can be
                                           idle   before    the    system
                                           disconnects it.

        LC             TTY LC              Informs the system  that  your
                                           terminal     has     lowercase
                                           ability.  NO  LC  changes  all
                                           lowercase     characters    to
                                           uppercase.

                                   2-149
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               INITIA Command


        LENGTH:xx      TTY LENGTH n        Sets the forms length of  your
                                           terminal.

        LOCALCOPY      TTY LOCALCOPY       Does not require the system to
                                           echo    characters    to   the
                                           terminal.

        LOCATE node    None                Changes  the  default   device
                                           list   of   the   job,  making
                                           devices   at    other    nodes
                                           available to your job.  LOCATE
                                           is   only   valid    in    the
                                           SWITCH.INI and TTY.INI files.

        RCVSPEED:xxx   TTY SPEED xxx nnn   Changes the input speed of the
                                           terminal   to  be  xxx.   This
                                           argument affects the speed  at
                                           which   the  monitor  receives
                                           characters from your terminal.

        REMOTE         TTY REMOTE          Sets   your    terminal    for
                                           accounts  with remote or local
                                           access types.  REMOTE  is  not
                                           recommended    for    use   by
                                           non-privileged  users  because
                                           it  can only be reversed by an
                                           operator [1,2].

        RTCOMP         TTY RTCOMP          Controls the use of CTRL/R and
                                           CTRL/T.   Refer to Section 1.6
                                           for  the  function  of   these
                                           control   characters.   RTCOMP
                                           turns    off    the    control
                                           characters.   NO  RTCOMP turns
                                           them on.

        SPEED:xxxx     TTY SPEED xxxx      Sets   the   speed   of   your
                                           terminal  to  xxxx baud.  This
                                           construction  sets  the  input
                                           and   output   speeds   to  be
                                           equivalent.

        SSIZE:n        TTY [S]STOP n       Sets the page length  of  your
                                           terminal.   This  controls the
                                           number  of  lines   that   are
                                           output to your terminal before
                                           an automatic stop.

        SSTOP          TTY SSTOP           Ignores CTRL/Q until output is
                                           stopped  either  automatically
                                           by the system,  or  by  CTRL/S
                                           from the user.

                                   2-150
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               INITIA Command


        STOP           TTY STOP            Stops output to  the  terminal
                                           automatically    after    page
                                           length is reached.

        SYSDPY         None                Runs   the    display-oriented
                                           SYSTAT    program    that   is
                                           appropriate   for   your   set
                                           terminal type.  SYSDPY is only
                                           valid in  the  SWITCH.INI  and
                                           TTY.INI files.

        TABS           TTY TAB             Informs the system  that  your
                                           terminal  has tabular ability.
                                           NO TABS instructs  the  system
                                           to simulate tab stops.

        TAPE           TTY TAPE            Turns on the XON (CTRL/Q)  and
                                           XOFF  (CTRL/S)  keys for paper
                                           tape reading.  NO  TAPE  gives
                                           CTRL/Q and CTRL/S their normal
                                           function.  TAPE  is  discussed
                                           in  the  TOPS-10 Monitor Calls
                                           Manual.  CTRL/S and CTRL/Q are
                                           discussed in Section 1.6.

        TERMINET       None                Sets   tab   spacing   for   a
                                           TERMINET-300.

        TYPE:xxxx      TTY TYPE xxxx       Informs the system  that  your
                                           terminal is of the type xxxx.

        UC             TTY UC              Changes  all  the   characters
                                           input  from  your  terminal to
                                           uppercase.

        WIDTH:xxx      TTY WIDTH xxx       Sets the width of the line  on
                                           your     terminal    to    xxx
                                           characters.

        XMTSPEED:xxx   TTY SPEED nnn xxx   Changes the  output  speed  of
                                           your  terminal.  This argument
                                           affects the speed at which the
                                           monitor  sends  characters  to
                                           your terminal.

        The arguments listed above are described more thoroughly  in  the
        description of the SET TTY command.






                                   2-151
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               INITIA Command


        Terminal Attributes Arguments

        The following arguments to INITIA SETTTY set up the attributes of
        your  terminal.   Like  the  preceding  terminal  characteristics
        arguments, you can use the following arguments in your SWITCH.INI
        file.

        Unlike  the  terminal  characteristics  arguments,  most  of  the
        following  terminal  attributes  arguments do not have equivalent
        SET TTY commands.  The exceptions are DISPLAY, ISO, EIGHTBIT, and
        OVERSTRIKE.

        To display your current terminal attributes,  you  must  use  the
        command INITIA ATTRIBUTES.

        To set terminal attributes, use the following command format:

             INITIA SETTTY arg arg ...

        All the following arguments can be preceded with NO and  a  space
        to disable the setting.

        Argument                              Function

        ANSLEVEL:n          Indicates the level of  conformance  to  ANSI
                            CRT programming standards.

        AVO                 Indicates that the terminal has  an  advanced
                            video option or equivalent capability.

        BLOCKMODE           Indicates that the  terminal  is  capable  of
                            performing block-mode transfers.

        COLOR               Indicates the  terminal  has  a  color  video
                            display.

        DECLEVEL:n          Indicates the level of conformance to DEC CRT
                            programming standards.

        DECTCS              Indicates the DEC technical character set.

        DISPLAY             Indicates  that  the  terminal  has  a  video
                            display;  NO  DISPLAY  indicates  a hard-copy
                            terminal.

        DRCS                Indicates dynamically  redefinable  character
                            sets.

        EIGHTBIT            Indicates that the terminal uses an eight-bit
                            ASCII character code.



                                   2-152
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               INITIA Command


        8BITARCH            Indicates the terminal is capable of using an
                            eight-bit ASCII character code.

        GUARDEDAREA         Indicates  terminal   allows   guarded   area
                            transfer.

        HSCROLL             Indicates the  terminal  supports  horizontal
                            scrolling.

        IDCHAR              Indicates character insertion and deletion.

        IDLINE              Indicates line insertion and deletion.

        INTERROGATION       Indicates that the terminal supports terminal
                            state interrogation.

        ISO                 Indicates ISO  Latin-1  supplemental  graphic
                            character    set.     NO    ISO   means   DEC
                            Multinational Character Set.

        KATAKANA            Indicates the Katakana character set.

        KEYBOARD            Indicates the terminal has a keyboard.

        LOCATOR:device      Indicates whether locator  is  present.   The
                            device can be MOUSE, TABLET or NONE.

        NRC                 Indicates  national   replacement   character
                            sets.

        OVERSTRIKE          Indicates  that   the   terminal   allows   a
                            three-character   sequence   to   create  one
                            composite output character  by  printing  one
                            character,   backspacing  and  then  printing
                            another character over the first.

        PRINTERPORT         Indicates that the  terminal  has  a  printer
                            port option.

        REGIS               Indicates that the terminal understands ReGIS
                            graphic commands.

        SELECTERASE         Indicates selective erase.

        SESSIONS            Indicates  the  terminal  supports   multiple
                            sessions.

        SIXEL               Indicates that the  terminal  is  capable  of
                            displaying SIXEL graphics.

        SREGION             Indicates scroll regions.


                                   2-153
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               INITIA Command


        STATUSLINE          Indicates that  the  terminal  has  an  extra
                            status line in its video display.

        TEKEMULATION        Indicates TEK 4010/4014 terminal emulation.

        UDKEYS              Indicates    that    the     terminal     has
                            user-definable function keys.

        USERWINDOWS         Indicates the terminal supports user windows.

        VLENGTH             Indicates variable forms length.

        VT52EMULATION       Indicates VT52 terminal emulation.

        VWIDTH              Indicates variable forms width.

        For more information about these terminal  attributes,  refer  to
        your terminal manuals.

   Characteristics

        Runs the INITIA program.

        Does not require LOGIN.

   Example

        Use the INITIA TTY ATTRIBUTES command to show the characteristics
        and attributes of a generic terminal type:

        .I TTY ATTRIB<RET>

        RL357A DEC10 Development 08:11:23 TTY162 system 1026/1042/1322
        Connected to Node KL1026(26) Line # 162
        Job 20   User DOTY      [27,10024]

        TYPE:TTY        MODEL:TTY       CLASS:LT33      APC:HARDWIRED
        ECHO:DEFER      WIDTH:72        LENGTH:0        NOSTOP
        FILL:1          NOLC            NOTABS          NOFORM
        CRLF            NOGAG           SBELL           NOTAPE
        BLANKS          ALTMOD          NORTCOMP        NOREMOTE
        XONXOF          NOUNPAUS        NOESCAPE        NOQUOTE
        IDLEDI:0        EDITOR          NOSLAVE
        ANSLEVEL:0      DECLEVEL:0      NOEIGHTBIT      NO8BITARCH
        NODISPLAY       NOOVERSTRIKE    NOCOLOR         NOSTATUSLINE
        NOISO           NONRC           NODRCS          NOUDKEYS
        NOAVO           NOPRINTERPORT   NOIDCHAR        NOIDLINE
        NOREGIS         NOSIXEL         NOTEKEMULATION  NOVT52EMULATION
        NOSREGION       NOHSCROLL       NOVLENGTH       NOVWIDTH
        NOUSERWINDOWS   NOBLOCKMODE     NOGUARDEDAREA   NOSELECTERASE
        NOKATAKANA      NOSESSIONS      NODECTCS        NOINTERROGATION
        NOLOCATOR       KEYBOARD

                                   2-154
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               INITIA Command


        Use the SET TTY TYPE command to set your terminal type.

        .TTY TYPE VT240<RET>

        Use the INITIA TTY ATTRIBUTES command to show your  new  terminal
        characteristics and attributes.

        .I TTY ATTRIB<RET>

        RL357A DEC10 Development 08:11:40 TTY162 system 1026/1042/1322
        Connected to Node KL1026(26) Line # 162
        Job 20   User DOTY      [27,10024]

        TYPE:VT240     MODEL:VT240    CLASS:VT200    APC:HARDWIRED
        ECHO:DEFER     WIDTH:80       LENGTH:24      NOSTOP
        FILL:0         LC             TABS           NOFORM
        CRLF           NOGAG          SBELL          NOTAPE
        BLANKS         NOALTMOD       NORTCOMP       NOREMOTE
        XONXOF         NOUNPAUS       NOESCAPE       NOQUOTE
        IDLEDI:0       EDITOR         NOSLAVE
        ANSLEVEL:2     DECLEVEL:2     NOEIGHTBIT     8BITARCH
        DISPLAY        NOOVERSTRIKE   NOCOLOR        NOSTATUSLINE
        NOISO          NRC            DRCS           UDKEYS
        AVO            PRINTERPORT    IDCHAR         IDLINE
        REGIS          SIXEL          TEKEMULATION   VT52EMULATION
        SREGION        NOHSCROLL      NOVLENGTH      VWIDTH
        NOUSERWINDOWS  NOBLOCKMODE    NOGUARDEDAREA  SELECTERASE
        NOKATAKANA     NOSESSIONS     NODECTCS       NOINTERROGATION
        NOLOCATOR      KEYBOARD
























                                   2-155
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             JCONTINUE Command


                             JCONTINUE Command



   Function

        The JCONTINUE command forces the specified job to continue if the
        job was in a CTRL/C state because of a device error.

   Format

        JCONTINUE n

        Where:    n is the number of  the  job  to  be  continued.   This
                  argument is required.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not require LOGIN.

   Examples

        1.  Continue job 44:

            .JCONTINUE 44<RET>

            .

        2.  Continue job 12:

            .JCONT 12<RET>

            .


















                                   2-156
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                KJOB Command


                               KJOB Command



   Function

        The KJOB command:

        1.  Stops all assigned  I/O  devices  and  returns  them  to  the
            system's pool of available devices.

        2.  Returns  all  allocated  memory  to  the  system's  pool   of
            available memory.

        3.  Returns the job-number to the pool of available job-numbers.

        4.  Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        5.  Prints run-time information for your job.

        6.  Completes all deferred spooling requests.

   Format

        KJOB/switch

        KJOB can be abbreviated to K.  KJOB accepts one or  more  of  the
        following  switches.   All  switches can be preceded with NO (for
        example, NOTEMP) to negate their functions.

          Switch                           Function

        /BATCH         Deletes  files  only  when  you   are   over   the
                       logged-out  quota, then deletes enough files to be
                       below quota.  The algorithm for determining  which
                       files  are  deleted  first  is explained in detail
                       below.

        /CLEAR         Clears your terminal's display, if it has one  and
                       if the monitor knows the terminal type.

        /DISCONNECT    Disconnects a terminal  line  when  you  log  out.
                       This  includes  hanging  up  a dataset (modem), or
                       terminating a LAT connection, for  example.   This
                       switch  may  be  abbreviated  to /D.  NODISCONNECT
                       maintains the  connection  with  a  terminal  line
                       after logging you out.






                                   2-157
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                KJOB Command


        /HELP:key      Prints information about KJOB  on  your  terminal.
                       /HELP does not perform functions 1 through 4.  The
                       keywords for /HELP are SWITCHES  and  TEXT.   TEXT
                       prints  the help file and is the default argument.
                       SWITCHES  lists  the  KJOB  switches   and   their
                       meanings.

        /MESSAGE:key   Tells the system which messages to print  on  your
                       terminal.    NOMESSAGE  supresses  output  of  the
                       standard LOGOUT message but still prints error and
                       warning messages.  The keywords for /MESSAGE are:

                       ADDRESS        Prints out the  address  where  the
                                      message occurs.

                       CONTINUATION   Prints out  continuation  text,  if
                                      any.

                       FIRST          Prints out the first  line  of  the
                                      message.

                       PREFIX         Prints   out   the    six-character
                                      message prefix.

        /TEMP          Searches your disk area and deletes all files with
                       .TMP  extensions.   TEMP  is  a default switch for
                       KJOB.  Using the NOTEMP switch will  log  you  out
                       faster.

   KJOB/BATCH Algorithm

        The KJOB/BATCH  algorithm  categorizes  files  in  three  groups,
        according to their extensions:

         o  Expendable files have these extensions:

            TMP, TEM, SFD, BAK, Q??, MAP, CRF, LSD, LSQ, LST,  LIS,  LPT,
            PTP, PLT, CDP, Z??, FOO, LOG, BIN, DMP, FIN

         o  Important files have these extensions:

            RNO, RND, RNH, CMD, KBD, CED, MCR, SNO, FAI, FOR,  F4,   MAC,
            ALG,  AID,  BLI, B10, B11, COB, CBL, BAS, PAL, P11, SRC, IDA,
            IDX, DAT, DBS, B16, B32, B36, REQ, R16, R36, PAS, INI

         o  Unimportant files have other extensions.







                                   2-158
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                KJOB Command


        Files are deleted in the following order until the user is  under
        quota:

        1.  Recompute disk usage and delete files that are too large.

            The number of blocks used is recalculated by doing a wildcard
            directory and adding up the total space used.  Any files that
            are larger than the logged-out quota are deleted.

        2.  Delete unprotected expendable files.

            An individual wildcard directory search is performed for each
            of  the extensions listed in the expendable list.  If a match
            is found and the protection code is less  than  or  equal  to
            177, the file is deleted.

        3.  Delete unprotected unimportant files.

            Files with extensions that are NOT in the important list  and
            that  have  a  protection  code less than or equal to 177 are
            deleted.

        4.  Delete remaining expendable files.

            An individual wildcard directory search is performed for each
            of  the extensions listed in the expendable list.  If a match
            is found, the file is deleted, no matter how it is protected.

        5.  Delete unprotected important files.

            An individual wildcard directory search is performed for each
            of  the  extensions listed in the important list.  If a match
            is found and the protection code is less  than  or  equal  to
            177, the file is deleted.

            Notice that the extensions toward the end  of  the  important
            list  are  considered  to be more important than those toward
            the beginning of the list.

        6.  Delete all unimportant files.

            Files with extensions that are NOT in the important list  are
            deleted no matter what their protection codes.

        7.  Delete all files.








                                   2-159
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                KJOB Command


   Characteristics

        Deassigns your terminal.

        Stops all I/O devices that are assigned to your job.

        Runs the LOGIN program.

   Example

        .K<RET>
        JOB 99 User CUSTER,L.  [27,4072]
        Logged-off TTY64 at hh:mm:ss on dd-mmm-yy
        Runtime:  0:00:05, KCS:44, Connect time:  0:31:23
        Disk reads:  1534, Writes:  88, Blocks saved:  2510

        .




































                                   2-160
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LABEL Command


                               LABEL Command



   Function

        The LABEL command writes  an  identifier  onto  a  DECtape.   The
        identifier  is  stored on the tape itself and is printed when you
        print a directory of the  tape  with  the  DIRECT  command.   You
        should  assign  a unique label to each DECtape to avoid confusing
        one tape with another.  You must use the ASSIGN command to access
        the tape before you can use LABEL.

        This command  runs  the  COMPIL  program,  which  interprets  the
        command before running PIP.

   Format

        LABEL dev:  ^name^

        Where:    dev:  is a physical or logical name that  represents  a
                  DECtape.

                  ^ is the delimiter  of  the  DECtape  identifier.   The
                  delimiter  can  also  be  quotes.   If  the  identifier
                  consists  entirely  of  alphanumeric  characters,   the
                  delimiters can be omitted.

                  name is a 1- to 6-character name  to  be  used  as  the
                  identifier.   Any  characters  can  be  used except the
                  delimiter.

   Restriction

        You must use the ASSIGN command to access the tape before you can
        use LABEL.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.











                                   2-161
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LABEL Command


   Examples

        1.  Identify DECtape 4, which has the logical name TIME:

            .LABEL TIME ^2:00^<RET>

            .

        2.  Identify DECtape 5 as NAME:

            .LABEL DTA5: "NAME"<RET>

            .








































                                   2-162
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                LIST Command


                               LIST Command



   Function

        The LIST command prints one or more files  on  the  line  printer
        (LPT:).   The  output goes either to the line printer immediately
        or to the disk to be spooled to the  line  printer  if  the  line
        printer  is  being spooled for this job.  (Refer to the QUEUE and
        PRINT commands.) If the line printer is being spooled, the  PRINT
        command  is preferred over the LIST command because it saves time
        and disk accesses.

        This command  runs  the  COMPIL  program,  which  interprets  the
        command before running PIP.

   Format

        LIST file-spec

        Where:    file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
                  file   specifications  separated  by  commas.   A  file
                  specification consists of a device name,  a  file  name
                  and  extension, and a directory name.  This argument is
                  required.  When a  directory  name  precedes  the  file
                  name, it becomes the default for all succeeding files.

                  Switches can be passed to  PIP  by  enclosing  them  in
                  parentheses  in  the  LIST command string.  When COMPIL
                  interprets the command string, it passes  the  switches
                  to PIP.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.















                                   2-163
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                LIST Command


   Example

        Spool your line printer requests, print a file (FOR21.DAT) on the
        line printer, and look at the line printer queue.

        .SET SPOOL LPT:<RET>

        .LIST FOR21.DAT<RET>

        .PRI<RET>
        PRINTER QUEUE:
        JOB NAME     REQ#     LIMIT           USER
        *FOR21       61        12      MAROTTA[27,5434] ON UNIT:0

        THERE IS 1 JOB IN THE QUEUE (1 IN PROGRESS)

        .




































                                   2-164
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                LOAD Command


                               LOAD Command



   Function

        The  LOAD  command  translates  the  specified  source  files  if
        necessary,  runs  the  loader, and loads the generated .REL files
        into memory.  The appropriate language compiler is determined  by
        the  source  file extension or by switches in the command string.
        (Refer to the COMPILE command.) If a  .REL  file  already  exists
        with a more recent date than that of the source file, compilation
        is not performed  (unless  you  request  it  using  the  /COMPILE
        switch).

        This command  runs  the  COMPIL  program,  which  interprets  the
        command  before  running  the  appropriate  language compiler and
        linking loader.

        The LOAD command generates  a  core  image  but  does  not  begin
        executing  the  program.   After  the LOAD command, you can START
        your program or SAVE the core image for future execution.

        Each time  the  COMPILE,  LOAD,  EXECUTE,  or  DEBUG  command  is
        executed,  the  system  remembers  the  arguments  and  switches.
        Therefore, if you issue one of these commands with no  arguments,
        the system uses the stored arguments.

        The LOAD command accepts several command  constructions:   the  @
        construction  (indirect  commands),  the  +  construction,  the =
        construction, and the < > construction.  (Refer to Appendix C for
        a complete description of each of these constructions.)

   Format

        LOAD file-spec,file-spec,...

        Where:    file-spec is one or more file specifications  separated
                  by  commas.   A file specification consists of a device
                  name, a file name with or without an extension,  and  a
                  directory name.  (Refer to Section 1.9.)

        The following switches modify the command string.

            Switch                           Function

        /ALGOL           Compiles the file with ALGOL.  Assumed for files
                         with the extension .ALG.

        /BINARY          Generates a binary file for each file  compiled.
                         The  file  extension of the output file is .REL.


                                   2-165
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                LOAD Command


                         This is the default action.




















































                                   2-166
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                LOAD Command


        /BLISS           Compiles the file with  BLISS-10.   Assumed  for
                         files with the extensions .B10 and .BLI.

        /C68             Runs the specified COBOL compiler.
        /C74

        /COBOL           Compiles the file with COBOL.  Assumed for files
                         with the extension .CBL.

        /COMPILE         Compiles the file even if a binary  file  exists
                         with a newer date and time than the source file.
                         This  switch  is  used  to   obtain   an   extra
                         compilation (for example, to obtain a listing of
                         the  compilation)  because  compilation  is  not
                         performed  if  the binary file is newer than the
                         source file.

        /CREF            Produces a cross-referenced listing file on  the
                         disk   for   each   file   compiled,  for  later
                         processing  by  the  CREF  program.   The   file
                         extension of the output file is .CRF.  The files
                         can  then  be  listed  with  the  CREF  command.
                         However,  with  COBOL files the cross-referenced
                         listing is always appended to the listing file.

        /DDT             Loads the program debugger DDT with the program.

        /DEBUG:          Passes   the  specified  arguments  to  FORTRAN.
         (arg, arg,...)  Refer to the  TOPS-10/TOPS-20  FORTRAN  Language
                         Manual.

        /DLIST           Produces a .LST  file  and  stores  it  in  your
                         directory.  You can obtain a listing of the file
                         with the PRINT command.

        /F10             Obsolete
        /F40

        /F66             Applies  FORTRAN-66  rules  for  DO  loops   and
                         EXTERNAL statements.

        /FORDDT          Loads the FORTRAN debugger with the program.

        /FORTRAN         Compiles  the  file  with  a  FORTRAN  compiler.
                         Assumed  for files with the extension of .F4 and
                         .FOR and all  files  with  nonstandard  compiler
                         extensions.   This  switch  is  necessary if the
                         file has a nonstandard  compiler  extension  and
                         FORTRAN  is  not the standard compiler or is not
                         the current default.



                                   2-167
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                LOAD Command


        /FUDGE:          Creates  a disk file containing the names of the
         file-spec       .REL files produced by the command string.  When
                         you  give the FUDGE command, PIP reads this file
                         to generate a library REL file.  (Refer  to  the
                         FUDGE command description.)  The argument to the
                         switch is:

                         dev:file.ext[directory]

                         Where:       dev:  is the  device  on  which  to
                                      write  the  file.   If you omit the
                                      device name, DSK:  is assumed.

                                      file.ext is the name of the library
                                      file.   The  file name is required.
                                      If you omit the  extension,  it  is
                                      assumed to be .REL.

                                      [directory]  is  the  directory  in
                                      which  to  place  the  file.   Your
                                      default directory number is assumed
                                      if none is given.

                         This switch is permanent in that it pertains  to
                         all .REL files generated by the command string.

        /GFLOAT          Indicates that double-precision numbers  are  to
                         be stored in G-floating format.  This format has
                         an extended  exponent  range.   This  option  is
                         available on KL10 processors only.

        /K?10            Designates the machine on which the program will
                         execute  once it has been loaded.  The ?  can be
                         replaced by L or S.

        /LIBRARY         Loads the files in library  search  mode.   This
                         mode causes a program in a special library to be
                         loaded only if one or more of its declared entry
                         symbols satisfies an undefined global request in
                         the source  file.   The  default  libraries  are
                         always    searched.     (Refer   to   the   LINK
                         documentation.)

        /LINK            Obsolete

        /LIST            Generates a disk  listing  file  for  each  file
                         compiled.  The file extension of the output file
                         is .LST.  These files can be listed  later  with
                         the PRINT command.  If the line printer is being
                         spooled   for   this   job,   the   files    are
                         automatically  printed.   If  you do not specify
                         this switch, listing files are not generated.

                                   2-168
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                LOAD Command


        /LMAP            Produces a loader map during the loading process
                         that contains the local symbols.

        /MACRO           Assembles the  file  with  MACRO.   Assumed  for
                         files with extension .MAC.

        /MACY11          Assembles the file  with  MACY11.   Assumed  for
                         files  with  an  extension .P11.  This switch is
                         not supported.

        /MAP             Produces a loader map during loading.   After  a
                         library search of the default libraries, the map
                         is written in your disk  area  with  either  the
                         file  name  you specify (for example, /MAP:file)
                         or with the default  file  name  MAP.MAP.   This
                         switch  is  an exception to the permanent switch
                         rule, because although  it  may  be  used  as  a
                         permanent  switch,  it causes only one map to be
                         produced.

        /NEW             Runs the appropriate language compiler from  the
                         experimental  system  library (device NEW:) area
                         [1,5].  If the compiler does not exist on device
                         NEW:,  COMPIL  tries  to  obtain  it from device
                         SYS:.  (Refer to Restriction.)

        /NOBINARY        Does not generate binary  files.   This  switch,
                         when combined with the /CREF or /LIST switch, is
                         useful when compiling programs only to  generate
                         listings.

        /NOCOMPILE       Does not force a compilation of  a  source  file
                         whose  date  is not as recent as the date on the
                         binary file.  Note that this switch is  not  the
                         same  as  the  /REL  switch, which turns off all
                         compilation, even if the source  file  is  newer
                         than  the  .REL file.  /NOCOMPILE is the default
                         action.  Complement to the /COMPILE switch.

        /NODEBUG         Does not pass previously specified arguments  to
                         FORTRAN.

        /NOLIST          Does not generate listing files.   This  is  the
                         default action.

        /NOOPTIMIZE      Does not optimize the object source  code  of  a
                         FORTRAN program.






                                   2-169
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                LOAD Command


        /NOSEARCH        Loads all  routines  of  the  file  whether  the
                         routines are referenced or not.  Because this is
                         the  default,  this  switch  turns  off  library
                         search mode (/LIBRARY).

        /OLD             Runs the appropriate language compiler from  the
                         system  library  of  old  programs (device OLD:)
                         that resides on the disk  area  [1,3].   If  the
                         compiler  does  not exist on device OLD:, COMPIL
                         tries to obtain it from device SYS:.  (Refer  to
                         Restriction.)

        /OPTIMIZE        Optimizes the object source code  of  a  FORTRAN
                         program.

        /PAL10           Assembles the  file  with  PAL10.   Assumed  for
                         files with the extension .PAL.

        /PASCAL          Compiles the  file  with  Pascal.   Assumed  for
                         files with the extension .PAS.

        /REL             Uses the existing .REL files  although  a  newer
                         source file might be present.

        /SAVE            Saves the core image of the loaded program.

        /SEARCH          Loads the files in library  search  mode.   This
                         switch is identical to the /LIBRARY switch.

        /SELF            Runs  the  appropriate  language  compiler  from
                         device  DSK:  instead of from the system library
                         (device SYS:).  This switch  is  useful  if  you
                         keep  a  private copy of a compiler in your disk
                         area  to   test   new   features.    (Refer   to
                         Restriction.)

        /SNOBOL          Compiles the  file  with  SNOBOL.   Assumed  for
                         files  with  the extension .SNO.  This switch is
                         not supported.

        /SSAVE           Saves the core image of the loaded program in  a
                         sharable executable file.

        /SYS             Runs the appropriate language compiler from  the
                         system  library  (device  SYS:).   This  is  the
                         default action.







                                   2-170
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                LOAD Command


   Restrictions

        Once a language compiler has been  specified  from  a  particular
        area  (for  example, /SELF), it cannot be called from a different
        area within the same command string.  The following is illegal:

        .LOAD ITEM.CBL/SYS,ITEM02.CBL/SELF

        However, the following is valid:

        .COMPILE ITEM.CBL/SYS
        .COMPILE ITEM02.CBL/SELF
        .LOAD/REL ITEM,ITEM02

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Runs the appropriate compiler or language compiler and LINK,
        destroying your original core image.

   Example

        The following example shows how to LOAD and SAVE a program.

        The DIRECTORY command shows all the files named TEST.

        .DIR TEST.*
        TEST FOR 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy  DSKC:  [27,5055]

        LOAD the program.  The monitor compiles and loads TEST.

        .LOAD TEST.FOR
        FORTRAN:TEST
        MAIN.
        LINK:  LOADING

        EXIT

        Save the loaded program.

        .SAVE TEST<RET>  
        TEST SAVED

        A directory shows that the executable format has  been  saved  in
        your directory.

        .DIR TEST.*<RET>
        TEST FOR   1 <055> dd-mmm-yy  DSKC:  [27,5055]
        TEST REL   1 <055> dd-mmm-yy
        TEST EXE 160 <055> dd-mmm-yy  6(422)
          TOTAL OF 162 BLOCKS IN 3 FILES ON DSKC:  [27,5055]
        .
                                   2-171
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOCATE Command


                              LOCATE Command


   Function

        The LOCATE command changes the default device list  of  the  job,
        making  devices at other ANF-10 nodes available to your job.  For
        example, if you want to use the devices at node  FRATZ  for  your
        job, you can issue the following command:

        .LOCATE FRATZ

        Thereafter, the default I/O devices used will be  those  on  node
        FRATZ.   Note that terminal and disk I/O are not affected by this
        command.

        The LOCATE command does not change the location of your job;  the
        job runs on the node on which the job was started.

   Format

        LOCATE node-id

        Where:    node-id is the name or number of  the  ANF-10  node  at
                  which you want I/O to be processed.

                  An argument of 0 locates your job at the node where the
                  job's  command  interpreter  is.  If you do not specify
                  the node-id, the default is your physical node/station.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Is valid only in networks or in systems with a remote station.

        Does not destroy your core image.

   Associated Messages

        If the LOCATE succeeds, the system prints a message in the form:

        NODE node-name (node-num) sys-id date LOCATED

        Where node-name is the name of the node, node-num is  the  number
        of the node, sys-id is the system identification, and date is the
        date the system was last reloaded.






                                   2-172
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOCATE Command


        If the node specified is not currently in communication with  the
        network, the following message is printed:

        %NODE(x)    LOCATED BUT OFF-LINE

        The job is successfully LOCATEd, but the node  is  not  presently
        accessible.

   Examples

        1.  You LOCATE the job at the node named LONDON, node number 3.

            .LOCATE LONDON<RET>
            NODE LONDON(3)  RD020A  KL10 SYS#1279 11-06-79 LOCATED
            .

        2.  You attempt to LOCATE to a node that  the  monitor  does  not
            recognize  as  part  of  the  network.   An  error message is
            printed and your location is not changed.

            .LOCATE TOKYO<RET>
            ?UNDEFINED NETWORK NODE
            .     






























                                   2-173
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


                               LOGIN Command



   Function

        You use the LOGIN command to gain  access  to  the  system.   The
        LOGIN command runs the LOGIN program.  LOGIN accepts:

         o  your project-programmer number (PPN) or your user name

         o  your password

         o  optional account and remark strings

        You can obtain these from your system administrator.   LOGIN  can
        accept a path specification (directory name) in place of the PPN.

        To log in, type the  LOGIN  command,  and  press  RETURN.   LOGIN
        prompts  you with a pound sign (#).  Type your project-programmer
        number or your user name, and press RETURN.  You  can  also  type
        your  project-programmer  number  or  your  user name immediately
        after typing LOGIN, followed by a space.  After it receives  this
        information,  LOGIN  prints  another  prompt  (PASSWORD:) on your
        terminal.  Type your password, and press  RETURN.   The  password
        does not echo on your terminal.  You are finished logging in when
        the monitor prompt (a period) is returned.

        Your system may be running account validation software.  In  this
        case, LOGIN may not be complete after you type your password.  If
        your job requires an account string, LOGIN prompts you  for  your
        account  (ACCOUNT:).   Type  your  account string, and then press
        RETURN, or just press RETURN  if  the  system  administrator  has
        established a default account for your job.  If your job requires
        a remark string, LOGIN prompts for it (REMARK:).   Here  you  can
        type anything that will identify your job.  Your remark can be up
        to 39 characters.  If you do not have  a  remark,  press  RETURN.
        The  system  records spaces for your remark.  Example 3 shows the
        procedure for logging in with account validation software.

                                      NOTE

                When the account string is validated,  characters
                are  checked  according  to case.  Therefore, you
                must  type  your  account  in   the   same   case
                (uppercase or lowercase) as it is required.  This
                aspect of the system can be changed by the system
                administrator.





                                   2-174
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


        You can put your account string and  remark  in  your  SWITCH.INI
        file.  See Appendix B for further information.

        To  specify  a  default  path  for  disk  I/O,  type   the   path
        specification  instead of your project-programmer number.  A path
        specification more specifically identifies your  directory  area.
        It   specifies   either  a  user-file  directory  or  a  sub-file
        directory.  Refer  to  Section  1.14  of  this  manual  for  more
        information about path specifications.

        If you have detached your terminal from a job, and begin  to  log
        in  to  another job, the LOGIN program asks if you want to attach
        to the old job or  create  a  new  job.   For  information  about
        detaching and attaching jobs, see the ATTACH and DETACH commands.
        Example 2 shows the procedure for logging in to a new  job  after
        detaching the first.

   Format

        LOGIN identification/switches

        Where:    identification represents either your
                  project-programmer number (PPN), path specification
                  ([directory]), or your user name.

        You can type a path specification in place of  the  PPN  or  user
        name.   This allows you to establish a default directory path for
        the job.  The path specification is either a user-file  directory
        or  a  sub-file  directory.   Directory  paths  are  enclosed  in
        brackets (for example:  [27,5434,SFD]).

        The following switches modify the command string.  These switches
        can  be  included  in your SWITCH.INI file.  SWITCH.INI files are
        discussed in Appendix B.

        Most parameters set by these switches can be changed  by  monitor
        commands  after  you  log in.  (Refer to the SET commands and the
        SETSRC program description in the TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual.)















                                   2-175
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


             Switch                           Function

        /ACCOUNT:"string"   Specifies the account string  for  your  job.
                            If    the   account   string   contains   any
                            nonalphanumeric characters, you must  enclose
                            the  string  in quotation marks.  This switch
                            is often included in a SWITCH.INI file.

        /ASSIGN:            Assigns a  device to  your job and  a logical
        (dev1:log1,         name to the device.
        dev2:log2...)
                                 dev:  is the device name
                                 log   is the logical name

                            See Section 1.9.1 for more information  about
                            device names.

                            The logical name is  optional.   This  switch
                            can  be  used  more  than once to assign more
                            than one device.

        /ATTACH:argument    Sets the ATTACH state for  the  LOGIN  dialog
                            and  the  job  being created.  /ATTACH:ASK is
                            the  default  action.   By  default,   if   a
                            detached  job  exists with the specified PPN,
                            and the job was logged in  with  /ATTACH:ASK,
                            LOGIN  asks whether you want to attach to the
                            detached job, instead of creating a  new  job
                            with the same PPN.  The /ATTACH:IGNORE switch
                            suppresses  the   default   action   of   the
                            /ATTACH:ASK switch.  Jobs you create with the
                            IGNORE argument will be ignored by LOGIN when
                            you  do  additional logins with the same PPN.
                            LOGIN will not ask you if you want to  attach
                            to jobs set to the IGNORE argument.

|       /BATCH:             Sets  the batch  parameters.  Used by  BATCON
|       (arg:n, arg:n)      only).  Multiple keywords can be given to the
|                           /BATCH  switch;  in  that  case, they must be
|                           enclosed in parentheses  and  separated  with
|                           commas.   Arguments and their meanings are as
|                           follows:
|  
|                           Argument                  Meaning
|  
|                           INTERVENTION   Specifies  whether  the  batch
|                           NOINTERVENTION job     requires      operator
|                                          intervention to run.
|  
|                           NAME:"name"    Sets the  batch  job  name  to
|                                          "name".


                                   2-176
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


|                           SEQUENCE:n     Sets the batch sequence number
|                                          to "n".
|  
|                           STREAM:n       Sets the batch  stream  number
|                                          to "n".
|  
|                           REQUESTID:n    Sets the batch request  number
|                                          to "n".

        /CORE:nx            Informs the system of the maximum  amount  of
                            core memory that your job can use.  The value
                            for x must be either P or  K.   P  represents
                            pages  of  memory (each page is equivalent to
                            512  words);  K  represents  blocks  of  1024
                            words.   The  value  n is any decimal number.
                            Refer  to  the  CORE  command   for   further
                            information.

        /DEFAULT:           Specifies  job   characteristics.    Multiple
        (arg:n, arg:n)      keywords can be given to the /DEFAULT switch;
                            in  that  case,  they  must  be  enclosed  in
                            parentheses  and   separated   with   commas.
                            Arguments and their meanings are as follows:

                            Argument                  Meaning

                            BIGBUF:n       Sets the default BIGBUF buffer
                                           size  for  disk  to  n blocks.
                                           Refer to  SET  DEFAULT  BIGBUF
                                           command.

                            BUFFERS:n      Sets  the  default  number  of
                                           disk  buffers  to n.  Refer to
                                           SET DEFAULT BUFFERS command.

                            PROTECTION:n   Sets    the    default    file
                                           protection  for your job to n.
                                           Refer    to    SET     DEFAULT
                                           PROTECTION command.

        /DEFER              Defers queueing of spooled output  until  you
                            log out.

        /DSKFUL:arg         Sets the action to be performed if  your  job
                            exceeds  the  disk  area  allowed to it.  The
                            arguments  are  ERROR  and  PAUSE.   If   the
                            argument  is  ERROR,  an  error  condition is
                            passed to your job.  This usually  terminates
                            the  program.   If the argument is PAUSE, the
                            program  is  suspended,  and  your   job   is
                            returned  to  monitor level.  This allows you


                                   2-177
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


                            to  request  operator  assistance  and   then
                            continue the job, as long as you do not issue
                            any commands that destroy  your  core  image.
                            Refer to the SET DSKFUL command.

        /DSKPRI:n           Allows privileged users to set  the  priority
                            for   their   job's   disk  operations  (data
                            transfers and head positionings).  The  value
                            can   range  from  -3  to  +3.   The  default
                            timesharing priority is 0.  Refer to the  SET
                            DSKPRI command.

        /GUIDELINE          Specifies that the numeric value cited in the
                            /PHYSICAL switch is a guideline.  This is the
                            default setting for /PHYSICAL.

        /HELP:keyword       Prints HELP text  on  your  terminal.   Valid
                            keywords are:  ARGUMENTS, SWITCHES, and TEXT.
                            The ARGUMENTS keyword prints out  a  list  of
                            valid   switches   and  arguments.   SWITCHES
                            displays only a list of switches.  TEXT  will
                            print  the entire HELP text.  TEXT is assumed
                            if no keyword  is  supplied.   /HELP  may  be
                            abbreviated to /H.

        /LIB:[ppn]          Sets the library area (LIB:) to the specified
                            PPN.

        /LIMIT              Specifies that the numeric value specified in
                            the /PHYSICAL switch is a limit rather than a
                            guideline.  If  /LIMIT  is  not  issued,  the
                            system  assumes  that the numeric value given
                            for the /PHYSICAL switch is a guideline.

        /LOCATE:node        Sets the job location to the specified  octal
                            ANF   node   number.   Refer  to  the  LOCATE
                            command.

        /MAILCHECK          Checks the file DSK:MAIL.TXT to  see  if  you
                            have  mail from the MS mail system.  You must
                            have DECMAIL/MS on your  system.   /MAILCHECK
                            is the default action.

        /NAME:"name"        Associates the given   name  with  your  job.
                            This  name  will  appear on output, listings,
                            and  on  other  information  output  by   the
                            system.   Enclose the name in quotation marks
                            if it contains non-alphanumeric characters.





                                   2-178
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


        /NEW                /NEW causes NEW:([1,5]) to be searched before
                            SYS:([1,4])  whenever  SYS:   is specified or
                            implied.  If the files are not on NEW:,  SYS:
                            will be searched.  (See Section 1.13 for more
                            information about NEW:.)

        /NODEFER            Does not defer queued  output  until  logout.
                            Refer  to the SET DEFER command.  This is the
                            default.

        /NOMAILCHECK        Suppresses checking the file DSK:MAIL.TXT  to
                            see if you have mail from the MS mail system.

        /NONEW              Removes the [1,5] directory (NEW:) from  your
                            SYS:   specification.   This  is  the default
                            setting.

        /NOSCAN             Cancels the /SCAN switch  for  the  directory
                            path.   When  scanning  is  set,  the  system
                            searches  for  files   through   the   entire
                            directory    path.    Directory   paths   are
                            described  in  Section  1.14.   This   switch
                            disables scanning.  Thus, the system will not
                            search for files past the specified directory
                            area.    (Refer   to   the   SETSRC   program
                            description in  the  TOPS-10  User  Utilities
                            Manual.) /NOSCAN is the default switch.

        /NOSETTTY           Instructs the system not  to  change  any  of
                            your  terminal's characteristics as specified
                            in your SWITCH.INI file.  The default  action
                            is   that  LOGIN  reads  SWITCH.INI,  setting
                            terminal   characteristics    according    to
                            switches  specified in the LOGIN line.  Refer
                            to Appendix  B  for  more  information  about
                            SWITCH.INI files.

        /NOSFDCREATE        Does not create an SFD that was specified  as
                            the directory path.

        /NOSTR              Suppresses the printing of SYS:STR.TXT.

        /NOSYS              Removes  the   SYS:   structure   from   your
                            DSKspecification,  which is your job's search
                            list.  Refer to Section 1.12.

        /NOTE:file-spec     Prints the specified file after you  log  in.
                            The  file  specification must be included; it
                            may  contain  wild-cards.   This  switch   is
                            useful  for  printing  a  project notice file
                            that is kept in a  library  area.   Refer  to
                            /NOTICE.

                                   2-179
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


        /NOTICE:arg         Controls printing of SYS:NOTICE.TXT  and  the
                            argument  to the /NOTE switch.  The arguments
                            for /NOTICE are:

                            ALWAYS         Always prints notices.

                            SOMETIMES      Prints notices  you  have  not
                                           yet  seen.   SOMETIMES  is the
                                           default argument.

                            NEVER          Never prints notices.

        /NOWATCH            Suppresses the printing  of  incremental  job
                            statistics.  Refer to the SET WATCH command.

        /PASSWORD           Allows you to change your password during the
                            LOGIN   procedure.    Type  in  your  current
                            password at the Password: prompt.  Then  type
                            in your new password when the monitor prompts
                            you, and verify it.  Your password will  then
                            be  changed.   This  switch  is ignored under
                            batch.  The system manager may, at times, set
                            /PASSWORD  on  your account, so that when you
                            log  in,  you  will  have  to   change   your
                            password.

        /PATH:[dir]         Specifies a default path for disk I/O.  Refer
                            to Section 1.14 for further information.

        /PHYSICAL:nx        Sets the maximum physical page limit of  your
                            job.  The value n is any decimal number.  The
                            value x is either K (for 1024-word blocks) or
                            P  (for  512-word pages).  You can use either
                            /LIMIT  or  /GUIDELINE  with  the   /PHYSICAL
                            switch.  The default is /GUIDELINE.  Refer to
                            the SET PHYSICAL command.

        /QUOTA:             Recomputes the disk quota for  the  specified
         (str1,str2,...)    structures.  If  you  specify  more than  one
         ALL                structure,  you  must  separate the structure
         DSK                names with commas, and enclose  the  list  in
                            parentheses.   However,  if  you specify only
                            one  structure,  the  parentheses   are   not
                            required.   If you specify no structures, all
                            the structures in your job's search list  are
                            assumed.  Instead of (str1,str2,...), you can
                            use  ALL  or  DSK.   ALL   expands   to   all
                            structures in the system.  DSK expands to all
                            structures in your search list.




                                   2-180
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


        /REMARK:"text"      Specifies a remark string for your  job.   If
                            you  include  non-alphanumeric  characters in
                            the remark, you must enclose  the  remark  in
                            quotation marks.

        /RUN:file-spec      Runs the specified program immediately  after
                            LOGIN,   unless   another  program  has  been
                            designated by the system manager.

        /SCAN               Sets the /SCAN switch for the directory path.
                            When  /SCAN is specified, scanning is enabled
                            for  the  directory  path.   Scanning  allows
                            searches  to  be  made  through  the complete
                            path.  If  scanning  is  disabled,  only  the
                            first  directory  is searched.  (Refer to the
                            SETSRC program.)

        /SETTTY             Sets   your   terminal   characteristics   as
                            specified  in  the  file SWITCH.INI.  This is
                            the default function.  Refer  to  Appendix  B
                            for more information.

        /SFDCREATE          Automatically   creates   an   SFD   on   the
                            structure,  if  the  SFD was specified as the
                            directory path,  and  if  the  SFD  does  not
                            already exist.  This is the default.

        /SFDPROT:nnn        Sets the protection of all  created  SFDs  to
                            nnn.

        /SPOOL:dev or       Adds the  specified  device(s) to the current
        /SPOOL:(dev1,...)   list of  those spooled for the job.  Spooling
           or               is  the  mechanism by  which  I/O to  or from
        /SPOOL:ALL          slow-speed  devices  is  simulated  on  disk.
                            Data   temporarily  stored  on  disk  can  be
                            automatically output on the specified  device
                            when it becomes available.  These devices can
                            be spooled:  the  line  printer  (LPT:),  the
                            card  punch  (CDP:),  the card reader (CDR:),
                            the paper-tape punch (PTP:), and the  plotter
                            (PLT:).

        /STR                Causes  all  files  in  the  standard  system
                            library  [1,4]  with  name  ???STR.TXT  to be
                            printed  on  your  terminal.    Assume,   for
                            example,  that  there  is  a  file on private
                            structure "PR:" called PRLSTR.TXT[1,4]  which
                            says:   "PR:PAYROLL  DEBUG  PACK  -- NOT REAL
                            DATA".  Any user who logged in with /STR  (or
                            had  /STR  in his SWITCH.INI file) would have
                            the warning message printed on his terminal.


                                   2-181
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


        /SYS                Adds  the  SYS:  structure   to   your   DSK:
                            specification.   Consequently,  if  a file is
                            not found in the directories in  your  search
                            list  or  in your library directory (if /LIB:
                            [proj,prog] has been specified),  the  system
                            directory [1,4] will then be searched for the
                            file.

        /TERMINAL:          Sets     the     terminal     characteristics
        (arg,arg,...)       specified by  the  arguments.This  switch  is
                            useful for recording terminal characteristics
                            in your SWITCH.INI file.  Refer to Appendix B
                            for  information  about  the SWITCH.INI file.
                            To specify a single argument, type  it  after
                            the colon.  To specify two or more arguments,
                            enclose them in parentheses and separate them
                            with commas.

                            The arguments to  the  /TERMINAL  switch  and
                            their   meanings   are   listed   after   the
                            description of  the  switches.   All  of  the
                            arguments  except those which take values can
                            be preceded by NO to turn off the function of
                            the argument.

        /TIME:n             Sets a central  processor  time  limit  of  n
                            seconds  for  a  job.  When the time limit is
                            reached, the system stops the job and  prints
                            a   message.    A   timesharing  job  can  be
                            continued by typing CONTINUE, but unless  the
                            time  is  reset with the SET TIME command, no
                            time limit will be in effect.   A  batch  job
                            cannot be continued.

        /UFDPROT:nnn        Sets the protection of all  created  UFDs  to
                            nnn.

        /VIRTUAL:n          Specifies the current virtual page limit,  as
                            represented  by  n.   (For  a  description of
                            CVPL,   see   the   TOPS-10   Monitor   Calls
                            Manual.)  In    /VIRTUAL:nK    and   :nP,   K
                            represents a block, and P a page;  1K  equals
                            1024  words, and 1P equals 512 words.  If you
                            type neither letter, K is assumed.  K can  be
                            specified within the range 1 to 512P.  If you
                            type /VIRTUAL:0, the value of CVPL, as set by
                            the system administrator, is used.






                                   2-182
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


        /WATCH:ALL or       Duplicates the  SET  WATCH  command, printing
        /WATCH (arg,arg...) messages  automatically  according   to   the
                            argument.    See   the   SET   WATCH  command
                            description for a list of arguments and their
                            uses.


        Arguments to /TERMINAL

            Argument                           Meaning

        ALTMODE             Converts the ASCII  characters 175 and 176 to
        NOALTMODE           ALTmode (ESCape).  If you use NOALTMODE,  175
                            and  176  regain  their  original identity as
                            right brace (]) and tilde (~).   The  default
                            setting is NOALTMODE.

        BLANKS              Prints  blank  lines  during  output  to  the
        NOBLANKS            terminal.   NOBLANKS  is  often  used  on   a
                            display  terminal  to  conserve  space on the
                            screen.  The default setting is BLANKS.

        CRLF                Prints an automatic carriage-return/line-feed
        NOCRLF              at the end of each line.  The width  of  this
                            line  is  set  with WIDTH.  NOCRLF suppresses
                            the automatic carriage-return/line-feed.  The
                            default is CRLF.

        DEBREAK             No longer supported.
        NODEBREAK

        DEFER               Suppresses echoing of the characters you type
        NODEFER             until output to  the  terminal  is  finished.
                            For  example,  when  the  system  is  sending
                            output to your terminal and you type  another
                            command,  the system will echo the characters
                            as it is printing output  on  your  terminal.
                            DEFER holds the characters you type until the
                            output is finished.  NODEFER is  the  default
                            setting.    For   video   terminals,   it  is
                            recommended that you set DEFER.

        DISPLAY             Informs  the system  that  you have a display
        NODISPLAY           terminal.   Your  programs   can   use   this
                            information   when  sending  output  to  your
                            terminal.  NO DISPLAY turns off  the  DISPLAY
                            function.






                                   2-183
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


        ECHO                Prints  the  characters   you  type  on  your
        NOECHO              terminal.  This puts your  terminal  in  full
                            duplex  mode.   NOECHO  puts your terminal in
                            half duplex mode.  That  is,  the  characters
                            you type are not printed on your terminal.
|  
|       EIGHTBIT            Sets 8-bit mode.
|       NOEIGHTBIT
|  
|       ESCAPE:chr          Sets the <ESCAPE>  translation  character  to
|                           chr.

        FILL:n              Controls  the filler class of  the  terminal.
        NOFILL              This effects the output of filler characters.
                            NOFILL is the equivalent to FILL:0.

        FORM                Sends   eight   line-feeds   for  every  FORM
        NOFORM              character,  and  four  line-feeds  for   each
                            vertical  tab.   NOFORM  does  not  send  the
                            line-feeds.

        GAG                 Suppresses  any  messages  sent  by  the SEND
        NOGAG               command when your job is in user mode.   This
                            does  not  affect messages from the operator.
                            NOGAG allows you to receive messages  at  any
                            stage of your job.

        LC                  Allows   the   system   to   print  lowercase
        NOLC                characters  on  your  terminal  when  echoing
                            characters from your terminal.  This argument
                            is used  on  terminals  that  have  lowercase
                            ability   but   are  not  printing  lowercase
                            characters.  NOLC makes the system  translate
                            all input characters to uppercase as they are
                            transmitted.

        LENGTH:n            Sets the terminal page length to n lines.
|  
|       LOCALCOPY           Sets terminal to local copy.
|       NOLOCALCOPY
|  
|       QUOTE               Enables control-v character quoting.
|       NOQUOTE

        RCVSPEED:nnnn       Sets the speed at which  your  terminal  will
                            receive characters to n baud.







                                   2-184
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


        RTCOMP              Controls  the function of CTRL/R  and CTRL/T.
        NORTCOMP            NORTCOMP   makes   the   control   characters
                            function  as  they  are  described in Section
                            1.6.  RTCOMP prevents them  from  functioning
                            this  way,  which  is useful when you plan to
                            run a program that uses CTRL/R and CTRL/T for
                            other purposes.

        SBELL               Rings   the   bell   when  output  is stopped
        NOSBELL             automatically    by    the   system.  NOSBELL
                            suppresses  the  terminal bell when output is
                            stopped automatically by the system.

        SPEED:nnnn          Sets the receiving and transmitting speed  of
                            your terminal to n baud.

        SSTOP:n             Sets the terminal  to  stop  output  after  n
                            lines,  where  n  is  page  length,  ignoring
                            intermittent <CTRL/Q>s.

        STOP:n              Sets the terminal  to  stop  output  after  n
                            lines, where n is page length.

        TABS                Informs  the system  that  your terminal  has
        NOTABS              tab stops.  NOTABS informs  the  system  that
                            your  terminal  does not have tab stops.  The
                            system will then simulate tab stops for  your
                            terminal.

        TAPE                Informs  the system  that  your terminal  has
        NOTAPE              paper tape output.  This changes the function
                            of  CTRL/S  and  CTRL/Q  to control the paper
                            tape.  NOTAPE restores the function of CTRL/S
                            and CTRL/Q.  Refer to Section 1.6.

        TIDY                No longer supported.
        NOTIDY              

        TYPE:nnnn           Specifies the type of terminal.  This informs
                            the  system that your terminal is of the type
                            nnnn.    This   sets   some   characteristics
                            automatically.    For   a  complete  list  of
                            supported terminal types, type:

                            HELP *

                            A portion of the information  returned  is  a
                            list  of  terminal  types  supported  by  the
                            monitor.




                                   2-185
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


        UC                  Tells   the  system  to  translate  all   the
        NOUC                characters  that  it   receives   from   your
                            terminal   to  upper  case.   NOUC  does  not
                            translate the characters.
|  
|       UNPAUSE:chr         Sets the unpause character to chr.

        WIDTH:n             Sets the width of the terminal screen  to  n.
                            Used  in conjunction with CRLF, this controls
                            the automatic  RETURNs  that  are  output  at
                            monitor level.

        XMTSPEED:n          Sets the speed at which  your  terminal  will
                            send characters to n baud.

        XONXOF              Allows  you  to  use  CTRL/S  and  CTRL/Q  to
        NOXONXOF            control  the   output   to   your   terminal.
                            NOXONXOF  prevents  the  system from stopping
                            terminal output automatically.

   Characteristics

        Returns your terminal  to monitor  level or starts  a program  if
        specified in ACTDAE.SYS.

   Associated Messages

        If you are already logged in when you issue  the  LOGIN  command,
        the monitor prints:

        ?PLEASE KJOB OR DETACH

        If the system is running  the  maximum  number  of  jobs  it  can
        handle,  you  will not be able to log in.  When you issue a LOGIN
        command, you will receive the message:

        ?JOB CAPACITY EXCEEDED

        In this event, wait a few minutes, then try again.














                                   2-186
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


   Examples

        1.  To gain access to the system, log in with your user  name  as
            follows:

            .LOGIN MCWILLIAMS
            JOB 42 RZ373B KL#1026/1042 TTY363

            If you do not type your  project-programmer  number  or  your
            user  name  on  the  same  line  as  the LOGIN command, LOGIN
            prompts you for that information with a number sign (#).

            .LOGIN<RET>
            JOB 29 RZ373B KL #1026/1042 TTY220
            #10,6073<RET>

            LOGIN prints  your  assigned  job  number  (job  number  29),
            followed  by  monitor  name,  version  number,  and  terminal
            number.

            PASSWORD:<RET>

            The system prompts you for  your  password.   You  type  your
            password followed by a carriage-return.  To maintain password
            security, the  monitor  does  not  echo  your  password.   On
            terminals  with  local-copy  (see  the  TOPS-10 Monitor Calls
            Manual), a mask is printed to make your password unreadable.

            [LGNLAS  Last   access   to   [10,6073]   succeeded   on
            dd-mmm-yy:hh:mm:ss]
            hh:mm dd-mmm-yy MON
            .

            If your entries are  correct,  the  system  responds  with  a
            message  indicating  when  the  last attempt to login to your
            account was, and whether it was successful time, date, day of
            the  week,  the  message  of  the day (if any), and a period,
            indicating readiness to accept another command.

        2.  The following example illustrates the process of detaching  a
            job,  logging  in  a second job, detaching the second job and
            logging in a third  job.   First,  detach  the  job  that  is
            currently running:

            .DETACH<RET>
            FROM JOB 52

            Then log in again:

            .LOGIN 27,5434<RET>
            JOB 54 RZ125A KL #1022/1046 TTY213


                                   2-187
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


            PASSWORD: <RET>

            OTHER JOBS DETACHED WITH SAME PPN:
                JOB 52 PIP STOPPED

            DO YOU WANT TO ATTACH TO THIS JOB?  [Y] NO<RET>
            [LGNJSP OTHER JOBS SAME PPN:52]
            [LGNLAS Last access to [27,5434] succeeded on
            dd-mmm-yy:hh:mm:ss]
            hh:mm dd-mmm-yy       MON

            When you log in, if you have a detached job (logged  in  with
            /ATTACH:ASK),  LOGIN prompts you whether you want to log in a
            new job or attach to the existing  job.   (To  suppress  this
            function, use the /ATTACH:IGNORE switch when you log in.)  To
            log in a new job at this point, type NO and press RETURN.  If
            you  type  YES  or  just  press RETURN, your terminal will be
            attached to the existing job.

            Detaching a job is useful when you are running a program  you
            expect  to  run for a long time.  If you want to allow such a
            program  to  run,  while  you  start  another  job,  use  the
            CCONTINUE  command.  For example, start a DIRECTORY search of
            SYS:

            .DIRECT EXEVER.SYS=SYS:*.EXE/PRVERSION<RET>
            ^C
            ^C
            .CCONTINUE<RET>

            The DIRECT program continues to  search  for  files  in  SYS:
            with  the  extension  .EXE,  and  stores  them in EXEVER.SYS.
            Meanwhile, you can log in a third job.  To  log  in  a  third
            job, first detach the second:

            .DETACH<RET>
            FROM JOB 54

            Log in:

            .LOGIN 27,5434/ATTACH:IGNORE<RET>
            JOB 55 RZ125A KL #1022/1046 TTY213
            PASSWORD: <RET>

            [LGNJSP OTHER JOBS SAME PPN:52,54]
            [LGNLAS Last access to [27,5434] succeeded on 
            dd-mmm-yy:hh:mm:ss]
            hh:mm dd-mmm-yy       MON

            .



                                   2-188
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


            The /ATTACH:IGNORE switch  was  used  here  to  suppress  the
            question  about existing detached jobs.  To log in a new job,
            as here, press RETURN.

            When the DIRECT program is finished running (as may  be  seen
            using  SYSDPY),  you  may  want to attach back to job 54.  In
            this case, detach the current job, or log out:

            .K<RET>

            [LGTOUL OTHER USERS LOGGED-IN UNDER [27,5434], JOBS:52,54]

            JOB 55 USER MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
            LOGGED-OFF TTY64 AT hh:mm:ss ON dd-mmm-yy
            RUNTIME: 0:05:33, KCS:64, CONNECT TIME: 1:45:20
            DISK READS: 1534, WRITES: 105, BLOCKS SAVED: 2513

            Then log in again:

            .LOGIN 27,5434
            JOB 36 RZ125A KL #1022/1046 TTY213
            PASSWORD: <RET>

            OTHER JOBS DETACHED WITH SAME PPN:
                     JOB 52 PIP STOPPED
                     JOB 54 DIRECT RUNNING

            TYPE JOB NUMBER TO ATTACH OR CARRIAGE-RETURN TO LOGIN 
            NEW JOB:54<RET>
            .ATTACH 54[27,5434]
            [LGNATJ ATTACHING TO JOB 52 IN USER MODE]
                     TOTAL OF 344 FILES
            .

            LOGIN prints a message after attaching to  the  running  job.
            This  message  informs  you that the job is in the process of
            running.  Then DIRECTORY prints a message showing  the  total
            number of files found.















                                   2-189
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                MAIL Command


                               MAIL Command



   Function

        The MAIL command starts up a program to send, receive, and  store
        messages  to and from other users.  For complete details, see the
        TOPS-10/TOPS-20 DECmail/MS Manual.

   Format

        MAIL

   Characteristics

        Runs the MS program.

        Requires LOGIN.

        Destroys your core image.

        Places your terminal at user level.

   Example

        Start up MS, then exit.

        .MAIL<RET>

        MS>EXIT<RET>

        .




















                                   2-190
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                MAKE Command


                               MAKE Command



   Function

        The MAKE command creates a new file on the disk with  TECO  (Text
        Editor  and  Corrector).   If a file already exists with the same
        name, the system prints  a  warning  message.   If  you  continue
        despite this warning, the system program supersedes the file.  If
        you type two CTRL/Cs to leave TECO, the program does not  destroy
        the   file.   (See  the  TECO  manual  in  the  TOPS-10  Software
        Notebooks.)

   Format

        MAKE dev:file.ext[directory]

        Where:    dev: is the device or file structure name on which  the
                  system  creates  the  file.  If you omit it, the system
                  assumes DSK:.

                  file.ext  is  any  legal  file  name  and   file   name
                  extension.   The  file  name is required; the file name
                  extension is optional.

                  [directory] is the directory area in which  the  system
                  creates  the  file.   If  you  omit  this argument, the
                  system assumes your default directory  area  (that  is,
                  your project-programmer number).  Note that the default
                  directory can be an SFD or a UFD.

        You can pass switches to TECO if you precede each switch  with  a
        slash in the MAKE command string.

   Characteristics

        Place your terminal at user level.

        Destroys your core image.













                                   2-191
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                MAKE Command


   Example

        Create a file named TEXT3.MAI.

        .MAKE TEXT3.MAI<RET>

        *EX<ESC><ESC>

        Exit from TECO.

        Use DIRECTORY to see the file.

        .DIR TEXT3<RET>

        TEXT3  MAI   1  <055>  dd-mmm-yy  DSKC:[27,5434]

        .




































                                   2-192
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MERGE Command


                               MERGE Command



   Function

        The MERGE command combines  the  low  segment  of  an  executable
        program  in the specified file with the program that is currently
        in memory.  The MERGE command, like the  GET  command,  does  not
        start execution of the program.  MERGE is used to load page fault
        handlers and DDT.

   Format

        MERGE dev:file.ext[directory] /switch

        Where:    dev: is the logical or name of  the  device  containing
                  the  program  you want to merge into core.  The default
                  device is DSK:.

                  file.ext is the name of the file containing the program
                  you want to merge into core.  You must specify the file
                  name.  The file extension defaults to .EXE.

                  [directory] is the directory name, required only if the
                  core  image  file  is located in a disk area other than
                  yours.  The default is  the  directory  area  that  you
                  logged in to.

                  /switch is the following option:

                  /USE:n    Specifies the octal section number, (n), into
                            which  a  program  is  merged.  Valid section
                            numbers are 0-37, octal.

   Characteristics

        Places your terminal at user level.

        Requires LOGIN.

        Changes your core image.











                                   2-193
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MERGE Command


   Example

        Type two programs.

        .TY FIRST.MAC<RET>
        FIRST:  RESET
                JRST    700000
                END     FIRST

        .TY SECOND.MAC<RET>
                 .PSECT FOO,700000
        SECOND:   OUTSTR [ASCIZ/
        EXECUTION AT 700000
        /]
                EXIT
                END

        Compile the programs.

        .COMPILE FIRST.MAC<RET>
        MACRO:   .MAIN

        EXIT

        .COMPILE SECOND.MAC<RET>
        MACRO:   .MAIN

        EXIT

        Run LINK and save the files.

        .R LINK<RET>

        *FIRST/SAVE=FIRST/GO<RET>

        EXIT

        .R LINK<RET>

        *SECOND/SAVE=SECOND/GO<RET>

        EXIT

        Use GET to bring the first program into memory.

        .GET FIRST<RET>
        JOB SETUP






                                   2-194
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MERGE Command


        Use MERGE to bring the second program into memory.

        .MERGE SECOND<RET>
        SECOND MERGED

        Start execution of the programs.

        .START<RET>

        EXECUTION AT 700000

        EXIT

        After a successful execution, examine the memory area.  Note that
        address 777 is occupied.

        .E 777<RET>
        000777/ 000000 000000   .

        Address 1000 does not exist.

        .E 1000<RET>
        ?OUT OF BOUNDS

        Address 700000 is occupied.

        .E 700000<RET>
        700000/ 051140 700002  .

        Address 701000 does not exist.

        .E 701000<RET>
        ?OUT OF BOUNDS
        .



















                                   2-195
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                MIC Commands


                               MIC Commands



   Function

        MIC allows you to create a new command  by  writing  any  desired
        sequence  of  monitor-mode and user-mode commands in a disk file.
        MIC commands are discussed in  the  file  DOC:MICV2.DOC,  on  the
        system.  MIC is not a supported product.

        You may include any of the following commands in your MIC command
        file, along with any number of monitor commands.

   Commands

        BACKTO     Specifies a 1- to 6-  character  label  at  which  MIC
                   processing  is  to  resume.   Note  that labels in MIC
                   command files are terminated by ::  and must be at the
                   beginning of a line.

        ERROR/     Specifies  a character that is used to denote an error
        NOERROR    condition when displayed at the beginning of a line.

        GOTO       Specifies a 1- to 6-  character  label  at  which  MIC
                   processing  is  to  resume.   Note  that labels in MIC
                   command files are terminated by ::  and must be at the
                   beginning of a line.

        IF         Conditionally processes a monitor command.

        LET        Allows you to change the value of any user  parameters
                   in  a  MIC  file.   For  example,  LET  C= "THIS IS C"
                   substitutes the text within double quotes as the value
                   of C.

        MIC Arg    Allows you to ABORT, SUSPEND, CANCEL, RETURN, or  EXIT
                   from MIC processing.

        OPERATOR/  Specifies   one  ASCII  character  to  be  treated  as
        NOOPERATOR introducing a line that requires user attention.   For
                   example, if the operator character is output in column
                   1, MIC suspends output and  displays  [BREAK].   After
                   this,  type  the  requested  information.   Then  type
                   CTRL/P (PROCEED), which will continue  the  processing
                   of the command file.







                                   2-196
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                MIC Commands


        SILENCE/   Suppresses   and   resumes  output  to  the  terminal.
        REVIVE     You can type another monitor command on the same  line
                   as the SILENCE/REVIVE command.  For example,

                        .REVIVE.DIR<RET>

                   causes terminal output to be revived  after  the  .DIR
                   command  has  been  typed.  Therefore, only the output
                   from the .DIR command will be printed on the terminal.

        WHENEVER/  Changes  the  default  action  whenever  a  particular
        ON         action  or  event  occurs.   ON   and   WHENEVER   are
                   equivalent commands.

   Example

        ;A MIC DEMO OF THE ERROR COMMAND
        ;A MACRO TO COMPARE TWO FILES AND DELETE DSK COPY IF THEY
        ;ARE THE SAME
        .
        .TYPE CHECK.MIC<RET>

        .ERROR ?
        .R FILCOM<RET>
        *TTY:/Q='A.'B<RET>
        .DELETE 'A<RET>

        .
        ;A TYPICAL CALL - CHECK IF DSK:C.MIC IS A COPY OF SYS:C.MIC
        .DIRECT/CHECK C.MIC.SYS:<RET>


        .
        .ERROR ?

        .R FILCOM<RET>

        *TTY:/Q=C.MIC,SYS:<RET>
        NO DIFFERENCES ENCOUNTERED

        *C

        .DELETE C.MIC<RET>
        FILES DELETED
        C.MIC
        01 BLOCKS FREED
        ;CREATE AN INCORRECT COPY OF C.MIC WITH PIP.
        .R PIP<RET>





                                   2-197
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                MIC Commands


        *C.MIC=TTY:
        WRONG FILE
        ^Z
        *^C
        ;AND USE C.MIC TO CHECK IT
        .DO CHECK C.MIC,SYS:<RET>


        .
        .ERROR ?
        .R FILCOM<RET>

        *TTY:/Q=C.MIC,SYS:<RET>
        FILE 1) DSK:C.MIC     CREATED: 1349  dd-mmm-yyyy
        FILE 2) SYS:C.MIC     CREATED: 1202  dd-mmm-yyyy

        ?FILES ARE DIFFERENT

        *[ABORT ON ERROR]
        ^C

        .































                                   2-198
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MOUNT Command


                               MOUNT Command


   Function

        The MOUNT command requests ownership of a device.  Because  MOUNT
        calls  for  action  by  the operator, the command is not complete
        (the monitor prompt is not printed on your  terminal)  until  the
        operator  has mounted the device.  If more than one volume in the
        volume set must be mounted at one time, the system  ensures  that
        the  resources  will  be available.  Volumes that must be mounted
        sequentially,  such  as  tape  volume  sets,  will   be   mounted
        automatically.   Therefore,  you  use  MOUNT  only  once for each
        volume set.

        Resources are pre-allocated to a job using the ALLOCATE  command.
        This  informs  the system of your future need for a resource.  If
        you use the MOUNT command without previously using  the  ALLOCATE
        command  for  the  same resource, MOUNT allocates the resource as
        well as mounting it.  Note,  however,  that  the  implicit  MOUNT
        allocation  is  cancelled  when  you use DISMOUNT.  An explicitly
        allocated resource remains your property until you use DEALLOCATE
        to relinquish it.

        You can use MOUNT to assign a logical name to a resource.  A tape
        volume set must always have a logical name.  Therefore, if you do
        not assign a logical name when  you  allocate  or  mount  a  tape
        volume   set,   the   system  uses  the  first  six  alphanumeric
        characters, or up to the first non-alphanumeric character, as the
        default logical name.

   Format

        MOUNT resource:log-name/switch/switch...

        Where:    resource is one of the following:

                   o  Disk structure or volume set name, such as DSKB:.

                   o  Tape  volume   set   and   identifiers,   such   as
                      PAY-WK4:(PM34,PM35),  where  PAY-WK4 is the name of
                      the volume set, and (PM34,PM35) is a  list  of  the
                      names of each tape in the volume set.

                   o  A logical name that was previously associated  with
                      a resource.

                   o  A physical device name.





                                   2-199
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MOUNT Command


                  Note that a tape mount request must  include  a  volume
                  identification.   This is accomplished by including the
                  volume identifier in the resource name, or by using the
                  /SCRATCH, /VOLID or /REELID switch in the command line.

                  log-name is the logical name you assign to  the  device
                  that  you  will  use.   The logical name can be up to 6
                  alphanumeric characters.  The logical name is optional.
                  Disk volume sets do not require a logical name, but you
                  can assign one.  Tape volume sets must have  a  logical
                  name.   If  you  do not assign a logical name to a tape
                  volume set, the default logical name  will  be  derived
                  from   the   volume  set  name,  using  the  first  six
                  characters,  or  up  to  the   first   non-alphanumeric
                  character.

        If you assigned a logical name  to  the  resource  by  using  the
        ALLOCATE command, you can mount the device by typing:

        MOUNT log-name/switch/switch...

        Any switches that you specified in a previous  ALLOCATE  command,
        using the same resource name, become effective when you MOUNT the
        resource.  However, you cannot specify any switches with MOUNT to
        change the switches you specified in the ALLOCATE command.  Also,
        you cannot specify any further switches with the  MOUNT  command,
        except  for non-status-setting switches such as /REMARK.  This is
        because defaults are assumed when the request is ALLOCATEd.

                                      NOTE

                To MOUNT more than one device at a time, separate
                the volume set identifications with a comma (,).

        You can obtain a list of all the requests in the mount  queue  by
        typing MOUNT with no arguments or switches.

        The following is a list of the switches you can use  with  MOUNT.
        Some  switches  apply  to  both  tape and disk volume sets, other
        switches apply to one or the other.  The center column  indicates
        the kind of volume set the switch applies to.












                                   2-200
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MOUNT Command


            Switch     Device                    Function

        /ACTIVE         Disk     Requests that the volume set  be  placed
                                 in  your job's active search list.  (See
                                 the SETSRC program  description  in  the
                                 TOPS-10   User  Utilities  Manual.)  The
                                 structure will become part of  the  list
                                 that  the  system  automatically uses to
                                 search for a file.  This is the  default
                                 function.  This switch is the complement
                                 to /PASSIVE.

        /CHECK          Tape     Prints on your terminal    a list of the
                        Disk     mount requests made by your job.

        /CREATE         Disk     Allows  files  to  be  created  on   the
                                 structure.     This    switch   is   the
                                 complement   /NOCREATE.    This   switch
                                 implies the /ACTIVE switch.

        /DENSITY:n-BPI  Tape     Specifies    the    recording    density
                                 (bits-per-inch)  of the volume set.  The
                                 argument (n) can  be:   200,  556,  800,
                                 1600,  or 6250.  The -BPI portion of the
                                 value is optional.

        /DISK           Disk     Identifies the  volume  set  as  a  disk
                                 volume set.

        /EXCLUSIVE      Disk     Ensures that  you  will  have  exclusive
                                 access  to  the  volume  set.   No other
                                 users will  be  allowed  to  access  the
                                 resource.    You   must  have  the  same
                                 project  number  as  the  owner  of  the
                                 volume set.

        /HELP           Tape     Prints  a   brief  description   of  the
                        Disk     MOUNT command.















                                   2-201
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MOUNT Command


        /LABEL-TYPE:    Tape     Specifies the kind  of  label processing
         arg                     to  be  used  and  indicates  the  label
                                 status  of  the tape.  The label type is
                                 used to ensure that the correct tape has
                                 been  mounted.   The arguments and their
                                 meanings are:

                                 ANSI      The   label    is    formatted
                                           according to ANSI standards.

                                 BLP       The tape  may or may not  have
                                 BYPASS    labels, but it is  treated  as
                                           if  it  were  unlabeled.  This
                                           argument can only be  used  by
                                           privileged users.

                                 EBCDIC    The   label   is     formatted
                                 IBM       in EBCDIC

                                 NOLABELS  The  tape  does  not  have   a
                                 NONE      standard  label.  You will not
                                 UNLABELED be    informed    when     the
                                           end-of-tape is reached.

                                 USER-EOT  The   tape   does   not   have
                                           standard  labels.  However, it
                                           may have  user  labels.   When
                                           the  end-of-tape  is  reached,
                                           the user is notified.  This is
                                           useful  for  programs  such as
                                           BACKUP.

        /NEW-VOLUME-SET Tape     Specifies that a new volume set is going
                                 to be created.  The operator will choose
                                 a new  tape  or  tapes  for  you.   This
                                 switch implies /WRITE-ENABLE.

        /NOCREATE       Disk     Prevents the creation of files  on  this
                                 volume set unless you specify the volume
                                 set when  you  write  the  files.   This
                                 switch  is the complement to /CREATE and
                                 it implies /ACTIVE.

        /NONOTIFY       Tape     Does not notify you when your request is
                        Disk     finished.  This is the default function.








                                   2-202
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MOUNT Command


        /NOTIFY         Tape     Sets  the system  to inform you when the
                        Disk     resource is mounted or dismounted.   The
                                 system  sends a message to your terminal
                                 when any of the following occurs:

                                  o  The resource is physically mounted.

                                  o  The resource is  dismounted  by  the
                                     operator  without  a request by your
                                     job.

                                  o  Another volume in a tape volume  set
                                     is mounted.

                                  o  The  disk  structure  is  locked  or
                                     unlocked by the operator.

        /NOWAIT         Tape     Allows  you  to continue working  on the
                        Disk     system before the resource  is  mounted.
                                 This  switch  implies  /NOTIFY and it is
                                 the complement to /WAIT.

        /PASSIVE        Disk     Requests that the structure be placed in
                                 your  job's  passive  search list.  (See
                                 the SETSRC program.) The system will not
                                 search   for  files  on  this  structure
                                 unless you specify the structure name in
                                 the  file specification.  This switch is
                                 the complement to /ACTIVE.

        /QUOTA          Disk     Recomputes  the  usage  quota   on   the
                                 specified structure.

        /READ-ONLY      Tape     Specifies that you will not write on the
                        Disk     volume set.  Tape volume  sets  will  be
                                 checked  as  they are mounted, to ensure
                                 that they are not  write-enabled.   This
                                 is the default for tape volume sets.

                                 On disk volume sets,  the  monitor  will
                                 not update access dates.  If you specify
                                 /EXCLUSIVE and /READ-ONLY, the  operator
                                 may write-protect the volume set.

                                 This switch supersedes  /RONLY,  /WLOCK,
                                 and /WRITE:NO.







                                   2-203
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MOUNT Command


        /REMARK:"text"  Tape     Allows  you  to  send  a message  to the
                        Disk     operator identifying the  volume  to  be
                                 mounted.   The argument (text) can be up
                                 to 50 characters  long.   Use  quotation
                                 marks  if  the  text  contains spaces or
                                 punctuation.

        /SCRATCH        Tape     Instructs  the  operator  to   mount   a
                                 scratch  tape.  The operator will select
                                 a tape that is blank, with the intention
                                 of   keeping   the  tape  when  you  are
                                 finished with it.  This  switch  implies
                                 /WRITE-ENABLE.

        /SHARABLE       Disk     Allows  other  users   to   access   the
                                 resource.  This is the default function.
                                 This  switch  is   the   complement   to
                                 /EXCLUSIVE.

        /TAPE           Tape     Specifies that the volume set is a  tape
                                 volume  set.   This  switch  is required
                                 when the volume set has the same name as
                                 a cataloged disk volume set.

        /TRACKS:n       Tape     Specifies the number of  tracks  on  the
                                 tape.  The value of n can be 7 or 9.

        /USER:[ppn]     Tape     Prints  on your terminal  a list of  all
                        Disk     requests for a particular user.

        /VOLID:volid    Tape     Identifies the volumes in a tape  volume
                                 set.   This  switch  can be used only if
                                 the   volid-list   was   not   specified
                                 previously.    If   the  volume  set  is
                                 comprised of more than one  volume,  the
                                 volids  should  be  separated by commas,
                                 and the volid-list should be enclosed in
                                 parentheses.    This  switch  supersedes
                                 /REELID.

        /WAIT           Tape     Ensures  that  the  volume set  will  be
                        Disk     mounted before you continue  working  on
                                 the   system.    This   is  the  default
                                 function.  This switch is the complement
                                 to /NOWAIT.

        /WRITE-ENABLE   Tape     Ensures   that  you  can  write  on  the
                        Disk     volume  set.   For  tape,  the   monitor
                                 checks  each volume as it is mounted, to
                                 be sure that it is write-enabled.   This
                                 is  the default function for disk volume
                                 sets.

                                   2-204
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MOUNT Command


   Associated Commands

        ALLOCATE         Informs the system of your  future  need  for  a
                         resource.

        DISMOUNT         Removes the specified volume set from  your  job
                         search  list.   If  no other users are accessing
                         the resource, and it is not a system  structure,
                         the volume set will be dismounted from the unit.

        DEALLOCATE       Removes the resource from  your  job's  list  of
                         allocated resources.

        SHOW ALLOCATION  Prints a list of  the  resources  allocated  and
                         mounted for your job.

        SHOW QUEUE       Prints a list of the jobs in the system queues.

   Characteristics

        Runs the QUEUE program.

        Destroys your core image.

        Requires LOGIN.

   Example

        The following example shows the use of the ALLOCATE,  DEALLOCATE,
        MOUNT, DISMOUNT, and SHOW ALLOCATION commands.  The resources are
        reserved for a multivolume tape  volume  set  with  the  ALLOCATE
        command.  The name of the volume set is TAPE-SET, and it contains
        three volumes.  The logical name TS is assigned to the tape  set.
        The tape is write enabled, and it does not have standard labels.

        .ALLOCATE
        TAPE-SET(VOL1,VOL2,VOL3):TS/WRITE-ENABLE/LABEL:NONE<RET>
        [ALLOCATE REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUESTS #672]

        A file structure named DSKR: is mounted for the job:

        .MOUNT DSKR:<RET>
        [MOUNT REQUEST DSKR QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
        [STRUCTURE DSKR MOUNTED]









                                   2-205
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MOUNT Command


        The job's resources are shown using the SHOW ALLOCATION command:

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
             VOLUME SET           RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        --------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   9 TK 800/1600      MAGTAPE UNIT  1    0
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     2    2
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKR                  DSKR               STRUCTURE     1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0


        The tape set is mounted, and the resources are again displayed:

        .MOUNT TS<RET>
        [MOUNT REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
        [MAGTAPE TS MOUNTED]

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
             VOLUME SET           RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        --------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   9TK 800/1600       MAGTAPE UNIT  1    1
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     2    2
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKR                  DSKR               STRUCTURE     1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0

        After work  is  finished  by  accessing  the  tape  set  and  the
        structure,  the  structure  is dismounted.  Because the structure
        was not explicitly allocated, it is automatically deallocated.

        .DISMOUNT DSKR<RET>
        [STRUCTURE DSKR DISMOUNTED]

        The tape volume set is dismounted:

        .DISMOUNT TS<RET>
        [VOLUME SET TS DISMOUNTED]





                                   2-206
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MOUNT Command


        The job's resources are displayed:

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
             VOLUME SET           RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        --------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   9 TK 800/1600      MAGTAPE UNIT  1    0
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     1    1
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0


        At this point, the tape set can again be mounted, or  it  can  be
        dismounted   and  released  from  your  job.   The  tape  set  is
        deallocated:

        .DEALLOCATED TS<RET>
        [VOLUME SET TS HAS BEEN DEALLOCATED] 

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
             VOLUME SET           RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        --------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     1    1
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1


        .

















                                   2-207
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              NETWORK Command


                              NETWORK Command



   Function

        The NETWORK command prints information  about  the  nodes  in  an
        ANF-10  and/or DECnet-10 network environment.  Your terminal must
        be attached to one of the  nodes  in  the  network  to  use  this
        command.   You  can use the NETWORK command to obtain information
        about the other nodes in either type of network,  and  about  the
        device configuration of each node in the ANF-10 network.

        You can specify  the  node-name  or  node-number  in  the  ANF-10
        network, or just node-name in the DECnet-10 network, to limit the
        output to specific nodes.  You can use  switches  to  change  the
        output format.

        NETWORK reads your SWITCH.INI file and accepts indirect commands.
        The indirect command files should be formatted as follows:

        node-list/switch/switch...

        Indirect command files are discussed in Appendix C.

   Formats

        NETWORK node-list/switch

        Where:    node-list is the node-names or  node-numbers  (ANF-10),
                  or  just node-names (DECnet-10), of nodes for which you
                  want information.  If you do not specify the node-list,
                  information  is  output  for every node in the network.
                  The  node-names  or  node-numbers  (ANF-10),  or   just
                  node-names (DECnet-10) are separated by commas.

        You can use the wildcard construction in the command string.  The
        node  name, or any part of the node name, can be replaced by * or
        ?  to represent groups of  nodes.   Wildcards  are  discussed  in
        Section 1.11.

        The switches to NETWORK allow you to specify:

         o  The format of the output.

         o  The configurations that you want to examine.







                                   2-208
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              NETWORK Command


                                    NOTE

           You use switches to select a node with  or  without  a
           specific  attribute.  Use the proper switch, or prefix
           the switch with NO.  If you do not use the switch, the
           selection   of  a  node  does  not  depend  upon  that
           attribute.  If you do not specify a node, the  default
           output is /BRIEF.

           The command line takes the format specified below:

           NETWORK node-name,
           node-number,.../switch/switch...

           You can repeat node names, but not switches.

        The switches to the NETWORK command follow.

        Output Control Switches

          Switch                            Function

        /ANF10         Forces output of ANF-10 information.

        /BRIEF         Suppresses the output of a  list  of  devices  for
                       each  node.   This  is  the  default if you do not
                       specify a node-list in the command string.

        /COST          Controls the listing of the physical  link  "cost"
                       associated with the /TOPOLOGY switch.

        /DECNET        Forces output of DECnet-10 information.

        /ERROR         Prints all error messages.  This is the default.

        /FAST          Prints only the name and number of the nodes.   If
                       you   also  specify  /NOBRIEF,  the  configuration
                       information is printed.

        /HEADER        Prints header information.  This  is  the  default
                       action.

        /HELP          Prints a description of the NETWORK command.

        /LAT           Prints LAT terminal server information.

        /NOANF10       Suppresses output of ANF-10 information.

        /NOBRIEF       Prints a list of the devices on each  node.   This
                       is the default if you specify a node-list.



                                   2-209
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              NETWORK Command


        /NOCOST        Suppresses the listing of the physical link "cost"
                       associated with the /TOPOLOGY switch.

        /NODECNET      Suppresses output of DECnet-10 information.

        /NOERROR       Suppresses the output of error messages.

        /NOFAST        Suppresses printing the name  and  number  of  the
                       nodes.    If   you   also  specify  /NOBRIEF,  the
                       configuration information is suppressed.

        /NOHEADER      Suppresses output of header information.

        /NOLAT         Suppresses LAT terminal server information.

        /NOSILENCE     Prints all information.  This is the default.

        /NOSORT        Suppresses sorting of the nodes according to  node
                       number.

        /NOTOPOLOGY    Suppresses  printing  of  the  topology   of   the
                       network.

        /SILENCE       Prints only error messages.

        /SORT          Sorts the nodes according to node number.

        /TOPOLOGY      Prints the topology of the network as a node  name
                       and  number  followed  by  its neighbors' numbers.
                       Each neighbor has a physical link "cost" following
                       it  in  parentheses  unless  you  also include the
                       /NOCOST switch.


        ANF-10 Node Selection Switches

          Switch                            Function

        /CDP           Prints only nodes that have card-punch devices.

        /CDR           Prints only nodes that have card readers.

        /DTA           Prints only nodes that have DECtape units.

        /LPT           Prints only nodes that have line printers.

        /MCR           Prints only nodes that have  command  interpreters
                       (monitors).  MCR signifies that the node is a host
                       system.

        /MTA           Prints only nodes that have magnetic tape units.


                                   2-210
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              NETWORK Command


        /NOCDP         Prints only nodes  that  do  not  have  card-punch
                       devices.

        /NOCDR         Prints only nodes that do not have card readers.

        /NODTA         Prints only nodes that do not have DECtape units.

        /NOLPT         Prints only nodes that do not have line printers.

        /NOMCR         Prints  only  nodes  that  do  not  have   command
                       interpreters.

        /NOMTA         Prints only nodes that do not have  magnetic  tape
                       units.

        /NOPLT         Prints only nodes that do not have plotters.

        /NOPTP         Prints only nodes that  do  not  have  paper  tape
                       punch units.

        /NOPTR         Prints only nodes that  do  not  have  paper  tape
                       readers.

        /NORDA         Prints only nodes that do not  have  RDX  devices.
                       RDX  devices  control  lines from high-speed input
                       (block-mode) terminals.

        /NOTSK         Prints only nodes that do not have TSK:  devices.

        /NOTTY         Prints only nodes that do not support terminals.

        /TYPE:DNxxx    Prints only nodes of  the  specified  type.   This
                       does  not  output host nodes.  However, if you use
                       /TYPE:  with no value, the host nodes are printed.

        /PLT           Prints only nodes that have plotters.

        /PTP           Prints only  nodes  that  have  paper  tape  punch
                       units.

        /PTR           Prints only nodes that have paper-tape readers.

        /RDA           Prints only nodes  that  have  RDX  devices.   RDX
                       devices   control   lines  from  high-speed  input
                       (block-mode) terminals.

        /TSK           Prints only nodes that have TSK:  devices.

        /TTY           Prints only nodes that support terminals.




                                   2-211
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              NETWORK Command


        DECnet-10 Node Selection Switches

            Switch                          Function

        /LINKS         Prints only nodes  that  have  one  or  more  open
                       logical links.

        /NOLINKS       Prints only nodes that do not  have  one  or  more
                       open logical links.

        /NOUNREACHABLE Suppresses listing of all known DECnet nodes.

        /UNREACHABLE   Lists all known DECnet nodes.


        Network Topology

        The topology of a network is determined by the interconnection of
        nodes  in  a  network.   Nodes  can  be  adjacent  to  each other
        connected by a physical link.  They can also  be  connected  with
        intermediate  nodes.   These  connections, with associated costs,
        determine the routes (paths) a message takes  from  one  node  to
        another.   The  costs are arbitrary values given to each physical
        connection of  the  network.   The  cost  of  a  given  route  is
        determined  by  the  sum of the costs of the physical connections
        along that route.  In cases where multiple routes  exist  between
        nodes,  the  route  with the lowest cost is taken.  In the ANF-10
        network, this information is available when you use the /TOPOLOGY
        switch.

        In  the  DECnet  network,  the  /TOPOLOGY  switch  displays   the
        information  available  for DECnet nodes.  The first two items of
        information are the node name  and  number,  followed  by  DECnet
        routing  information  for that node.  If the node is unreachable,
        then  this  information   is   placed   in   the   output   line:
        "Unreachable."  The  remaining information columns are left blank
        to indicate that information is not available.  If  the  node  is
        reachable, then the column shows the circuit name for the initial
        routing of a message to that node.

        The following columns show cost and number of hops, analogous  to
        the  ANF-10 network topology.  The cost for DECnet is set through
        network management functions on a per physical-connection  basis.
        If  you  ever  form  a  logical  link  between  your node and the
        destination node, information is available for the count of  open
        logical  links  and  the  round-trip delay time in milli-seconds.
        Otherwise, this information is not available, and the information
        fields  are  left blank.  Example 4 shows the output from the use
        of the /TOPOLOGY switch for both  ANF-10  and  DECnet-10  network
        environments.



                                   2-212
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              NETWORK Command


   Associated Messages

        The output from the NETWORK command is in one  of  the  following
        formats.

        When you do not specify a node-list:

        For ANF-10:
          node-name (node-number) system-name system-generation-date
        For DECnet-10:
          Node list (node-name)


        When you specify a node-list:

        For ANF-10:
          node-name (node-number)  system-name system-generation-date
        device[number-of-devices] device[number-of-devices]
        device[number-of-devices]...
        For DECnet-10:
          same as when you don't specify node names.

   Characteristics

        Runs the NETWORK program.

        Does not require that you be logged in.

   Examples

        1.  The following example shows the NETWORK  command  and  output
            when  you  omit  the  node-list.   There  are 17 nodes in the
            ANF-10 network; five are shown in this  example.   There  are
            183  reachable  nodes  in the DECnet network; 14 are shown in
            this example.

            .NETWORK<RET>

            [ANF10  network:   connected  to  SPIRIT  (30),  located   at
            KL1026(26), 17 nodes]
            Node CTCH22  (22)    DN82 V23(174)        dd-mmm-yy
            Node KL1026  (26)    RC117B KL #1026/1042 dd-mmm-yy
            Node NEXT    (27)    DN87 V23(173)        dd-mmm-yy
            Node SPIRIT  (30)    DN87 V23(174)        dd-mmm-yy
            Node NOVA    (31)    DN87S V23(174)       dd-mmm-yy

            [DECnet network: local node KL1026, 183 reachable nodes in
            area 7]
            ABLE    ADAM    AJAX    ALGOL   ALIEN   ALPHA   ALPINE
            BLUE    CACHE   CADVAX  CAR     CASTOR  CDR     CHAOS



                                   2-213
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              NETWORK Command


        2.  The following example shows  the  NETWORK  command  when  the
            node-list  is specified.  Node-number 33 is valid; node 76 is
            invalid.

            .NETWORK 33,76<RET>
            [ANF10 network: connected to NOVA(31), located at KL1026(26), 
            15 nodes]
            Node    DWARF    (33)   DN87S V23(174)  28-Sep-82
                    TSK[2] TTY[64]

            %NWKNNN Node 76 not in Network

            .

        3.  The following example shows  the  use  of  NETWORK  with  the
            /NOTSK switch.

            .NETWORK/NOTSK<RET>

            [ANF10 network: connected to NOVA(31), located at KL1026(26), 
            15 nodes]
            Node    SOFDCP  (75)    DN82 V22E/52A
            Node    WOBBLE  (143)   DN81 V22E/52A

            [DECnet network: local node KL1026, 182 reachable nodes in
            area 7]
            ABACUS  ABLE    ADAM    AJAX    ALGOL   ALIEN   ALPHA   ALPINE
            ANIMAL  ARK     BAXTER  BERGIL  BISON   BLUE    CACHE   CADVAX
            CAR     CASTOR  CDR     CHAOS

        4.  The following example shows the use of  the  NETWORK  command
            with   the  /TOPOLOGY  switch  for  both  ANF-10  and  DECnet
            networks.  The connected node (the node running your job)  is
            KL1026.   KL1026  has  a direct line to node ENCORE(32), node
            NOVA(31), node JINX(34), node DWARF(33), and  node  NEXT(27).
            Each  of  these  lines costs 10.  Therefore, they are equally
            acceptable links.  Note that node NEXT(27) has a direct  line
            to  node KL1026(26), but this line costs 62, and is therefore
            less acceptable than the line which connects node  KL1026  to
            node NEXT.













                                   2-214
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              NETWORK Command


            .NETWORK/TOPOLOGY<RET>
            [ANF10 network: local node KL1026(26), 17 nodes]

            Node    KL1026  (26)    32(10)  34(10)  33(10) 27(10)
            Node    CTCH22  (22)    76(8)   
            Node    KS4101  (76)    22(10)  27(10)
            Node    SOFDCP  (75)    71(8)   6(8)
            Node    TWINKY  (71)    75(10)  123(10)
            Node    WIZARD  (123)   71(8)   27(8)
            Node    NEXT    (27)    26(62)  123(16) 76(16)
            Node    DWARF   (33)    26(62)  
            Node    ENCORE  (32)    26(62)
            Node    JINX    (34)    26(62)
            Node    NOVA    (31)    26(62)  20(8)

            The DECnet network /TOPOLOGY switch displays cost and  number
            of hops between nodes.

            [Decnet network: local node KL1026, 183 reachable nodes in
            area 7]
            Name    Number    Line          Cost   Hops L.Links Delay
            LARRY   (7.221)   DTE-0-3       7      3
            LYRA    (7.236)   ETH-0         1      1

            .

        5.  The following example shows the use of  the  NETWORK  command
            for  a DECnet Ethernet endnode.  An Ethernet endnode does not
            know DECnet topology information,  so  the  system  prints  a
            summary line containing DECnet information.

            .NETWORK/DECNET<RET>
            [DECnet network:local node KL1026,
            running as an Ethernet endnode]



















                                   2-215
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                NODE Command


                               NODE Command



   Function

        The NODE command prints ANF-10 and DECnet  network  configuration
        information.   If  you  do  not  specify  a  node-id,  the system
        displays information about the node to  which  your  terminal  is
        connected.   If you specify a node-id, the system displays system
        configuration information for the node(s) you specified.

        To use some commands (for example, SET HOST), you must know if  a
        node  has  a  command interpreter.  The NODE command displays the
        symbol MCR as a device on each ANF-10 node  that  has  a  command
        interpreter.

   Format

        NODE node-id

        Where:    node-id is a node identifier of a node in the  network.
                  If you specify 0 as the node-id, the host to which your
                  terminal is connected is printed.  That is, the  system
                  prints  the command interpreter of your job.  If you do
                  not specify a node-id, the subject of the output is the
                  node to which your terminal is connected.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not destroy your core image.

   Associated Messages

        When you specify a node-id, the information for ANF-10  nodes  is
        displayed in the following format:

        node type node-name (node-num) software-id creation-date
        device[number-of-devices] device[number-of-devices]...

        Where node-name is the name of the node, node-num is  the  node's
        number,  software-id  is  the  name and version of the monitor on
        that  node,  and  creation-date  is  the  date  of  the   monitor
        generation.

        The second line of output lists each kind of device on the  node,
        and the number of devices.




                                   2-216
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                NODE Command


        Information for DECnet nodes is displayed in one of the following
        formats:

         o  DECnet node-name (node-address)  HOPS:m  COST:n  VIA  circuit
            name

         o  DECnet node-name (node-address) may be reachable via the area
            router

         o  DECnet node-name (node-address)  may  be  reachable  via  the
            designated router

         o  DECnet node-name (node-address) unreachable

        Where node-name is the name of the DECnet node,  node-address  is
        the  DECnet  area  and  node  number,  HOPS and COST refer to the
        length of the path to that node,  circuit  is  DTE-cpu-lineno  or
        ETH-0 (on a KL) or KDP-0-lineno (on a KS), and cpu and lineno are
        the numbers of the  CPU  and  line  through  which  the  node  is
        reachable.   If  the  node  is in a different DECnet area, or the
        system is running as an Ethernet endnode, you will get either the
        second   or  the  third  message.   The  node  is  classified  as
        unreachable only if it is in the same  area,  but  not  currently
        running.

   Examples

        1.  The following example shows the command interpreter to  which
            your terminal is connected.

            .NODE 0<RET>
            Local       KL1026(26)     RZ357A KL  1024/1042 mm-dd-yy
                        MCR[1] TTY[137] CDR[2] LPT[5] PTR[2] PTP[2] PLT[1]
            .

        2.  Print the information  associated  with  various  DECnet  and
            ANF-10 nodes:

            .NODE KL2116<RET>

            DECnet  KL2116(7.116) Hops:6 Cost:11 via DTE-0-3
            .

            The message indicates KL2116 is available, via DTE.









                                   2-217
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                NODE Command


            .NODE ELROND<RET>

            DECnet  ELROND(4.19)